Sei sulla pagina 1di 589

MXXXXXXXXXXXXXE REV A 1

FANUC Robotics
SYSTEM R-J2 Controller
Maintenance Manual
MAREG2AMS03503E REV B

B–80525EN/04
This publication contains proprietary information of FANUC Robotics
North America, Inc. furnished for customer use only. No other uses are
authorized without the express written permission of FANUC Robotics
North America, Inc.
FANUC Robotics North America, Inc.
3900 W. Hamlin Road
Rochester Hills, Michigan 48309-3253
2 MXXXXXXXXXXXXXE REV A

The descriptions and specifications contained in this manual were in effect


at the time this manual was approved for printing. FANUC Robotics
North America, Inc, hereinafter referred to as FANUC Robotics, reserves
the right to discontinue models at any time or to change specifications or
design without notice and without incurring obligations.
FANUC Robotics manuals present descriptions, specifications, drawings,
schematics, bills of material, parts, connections and/or procedures for
installing, disassembling, connecting, operating and programming FANUC
Robotics’ products and/or systems. Such systems consist of robots,
extended axes, robot controllers, application software, the KAREL
programming language, INSIGHT vision equipment, and special tools.
FANUC Robotics recommends that only persons who have been trained in
one or more approved FANUC Robotics Training Course(s) be permitted
to install, operate, use, perform procedures on, repair, and/or maintain
FANUC Robotics’ products and/or systems and their respective
components. Approved training necessitates that the courses selected be
relevant to the type of system installed and application performed at the
customer site.

WARNING
This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio
frequency energy and if not installed and used in
accordance with the instruction manual, may cause
interference to radio communications. As temporarily
permitted by regulation, it has not been tested for
compliance with the limits for Class A computing devices
pursuant to subpart J of Part 15 of FCC Rules, which are
designed to provide reasonable protection against such
interference. Operation of the equipment in a residential
area is likely to cause interference, in which case the user,
at his own expense, will be required to take whatever
measure may be required to correct the interference.

FANUC Robotics conducts courses on its systems and products on a


regularly scheduled basis at its headquarters in Rochester Hills, Michigan.
For additional information contact
FANUC Robotics North America, Inc.
Training Department
3900 W. Hamlin Road
Rochester Hills, Michigan 48309-3253
web site: www.fanucrobotics.com
Send your comments and suggestions about this manual to:
product.documentation@fanucrobotics.com
MXXXXXXXXXXXXXE REV A 3

Copyright 2000 by FANUC Robotics North America, Inc.


All Rights Reserved

The information illustrated or contained herein is not to be reproduced,


copied, translated into another language, or transmitted in whole or in part
in any way without the prior written consent of FANUC Robotics North
America, Inc.

AccuStat, ArcTool, DispenseTool, FANUC LASER DRILL,


KAREL, INSIGHT, INSIGHT II, PaintTool, PaintWorks,
PalletTool, SOCKETS, SOFT PARTS SpotTool,
TorchMate, and YagTool are Registered Trademarks of FANUC
Robotics.

FANUC Robotics reserves all proprietary rights, including but not limited
to trademark and trade name rights, in the following names:
AccuFlow
ARC Mate
ARC Mate Sr.
IntelliTrak
LaserTool
MotionParts
PaintWorks II
PalletMate
SureWeld
TurboMove

Conventions Used in This manual includes information essential to the safety of personnel,
this Manual equipment, software, and data. This information is indicated by headings
and boxes in the text.

WARNING
Information appearing under WARNING concerns the
protection of personnel. It is boxed and in bold type to set
it apart from other text.

CAUTION
Information appearing under CAUTION concerns the protection
of equipment, software, and data. It is boxed to set it apart
from other text.

NOTE Information appearing next to NOTE concerns related information


or useful hints.
R–J2 B–SIZE CONTROLLER CABINET
DIMENSION UPDATE
MAREG2AMS03503E REV B Updates–1

This section lists the updates that have been made to the FANUC Robotics
SYSTEM R–J2 Controller Maintenance Manual in the following areas:

Page

R–J2 B–Size Controller Cabinet Dimensions Updates–1


Update

R–J2 B–Size Controller Cabinet Dimensions

B–Size Controller This update was created to provide dimensional information on the B–Size
Cabinet Dimensions Controller Cabinet height. See note on Figure 1.

Figure 1. B–Size Controller Cabinet Dimensions

Control unit Control unit Control unit

Note: Height of cabinet is


1100mm. Add 200mm if optional
riser is used. (Dimensions in mm)
B–80525E/04 PREFACE

PREFACE

This manual covers the following models.

Model Abbreviation
FANUC Robot ARC Mate 100 ARC Mate 100
FANUC Robot ARC Mate 120 ARC Mate 120
FANUC Robot ARC Mate 100i ARC Mate 100i
FANUC Robot ARC Mate 120i ARC Mate 120i
FANUC Robot S–6 S–6
FANUC Robot S–12 S–12
FANUC Robot M–6i M–6i
FANUC Robot M–16i M–16i
FANUC Robot S–420i F/iW/iS/iL/iR S–420 iF/iW/iS/iL/iR
FANUC Robot S–450L/S/U S–450
FANUC Robot S–500 S–500
FANUC Robot S–700 S–700
FANUC Robot S–800 S–800
FANUC Robot S–900 S–900
FANUC Robot M–410 iW/iWX M–410 iW/iWX
FANUC Robot M–500 M–500
FANUC Robot M–400i M–400i
FANUC Robot M–710i M–710i
FANUC Robot A–520i A–520i

(Note) When a description is common to all the types of S–420 i, it simply refers to S–420 i.
When a description is common to all the type of M–410 i, it simply refers to M–410 i.
FANUC Robotics Hotline

For a PRODUCTION robot that is DOWN


call 24 hours a day, 7 days a week
810-377-7159

For all other Troubleshooting and Technical Support


contact your local distributor or call the Hotline
Monday – Friday, 8:00 A.M. – 5:00 P.M. Eastern Time

BEFORE YOU CALL please have your Maintenance and Troubleshooting manual, and the
following information, ready.

INFORMATION DETAILS
Customer Information Include
 your company’s name
 caller’s name
 phone number where caller can be reached, including
area code and extension
Robot type On the arm of the robot.
(A, L, M, P, or S, & 3-digit number)
Controller style Ask your supervisor.
(RA, RB, RC, RF, RG, RG2, RH, RJ, RJ2)
F Number On the identification tag on the robot and controller, near the
cable connection.
Robot serial number On the identification tag located near the cable connection.
(if no F Number is available)
Controller serial number On the controller tag located on the doors.
(if no F Number is available)
Software edition and revision numbers Shown on the CRT or teach pendant status screen during the
power-up sequence.
List of error messages Include
 error message number
 message following error message number
 any numbers following error message
List of diagnostic LEDs Note the PCB where the LED is located and the LED name or
designation.
History of problem Description of events leading up to the problem.
Application software List
 any application software running the system
 the line number where the program halted
 a description of what is happening on that line
B–80525E/04 Table of Contents
PREFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . p–1

I SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
1. SAFETY PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1.1 OPERATOR SAFETY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1.1.1 Operator Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
1.1.2 Safety of the Teach Pendant Operator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
1.1.3 Safety During Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
1.2 SAFETY OF THE TOOLS AND PERIPHERAL DEVICES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
1.2.1 Precautions in Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
1.2.2 Precautions for Mechanism . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
1.3 SAFETY OF THE ROBOT MECHANISM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
1.3.1 Precautions in Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
1.3.2 Precautions in Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
1.3.3 Precautions for Mechanisms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
1.4 SAFETY OF THE END EFFECTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
1.4.1 Precautions in Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
1.5 SAFETY IN MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12

II MAINTENANCE
1. OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

2. CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
2.1 EXTERNAL VIEW OF THE CONTROLLER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
2.2 COMPONENT FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
2.3 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

3. TROUBLESHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
3.1 POWER CANNOT BE TURNED ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
3.2 TROUBLESHOOTING USING THE ERROR CODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
3.3 POSITION DEVIATION FOUND IN RETURN TO THE REFERENCE POSITION
(POSITIONING) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
3.4 VIBRATION OBSERVED DURING MOVEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
3.5 MANUAL OPERATION IMPOSSIBLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194

4. PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196


4.1 MAIN CPU PC BOARDS (A16B–3200–0040) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
4.2 EMERGENCY STOP CONTROL PC BOARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
4.3 BACKPLANE PC BOARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
4.4 PROCESS INPUT/OUTPUT PC BOARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
4.4.1 Process Input/Output PC Board CA (A16B–2201–0470) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
4.4.2 Process Input/Output PC Board CB (A16B–2201–0472) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
4.4.3 Process Input/Output PC Board DA (A16B–2201–0480) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
4.4.4 Process I/O Printed Board EA (A16B–3200–0230) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
4.4.5 Additional Axis Control Printed Board (A16B–2200–0820) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217

1
Table of contents B–80525E/04

5. SERVO AMPLIFIERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218


5.1 SERVO AMPLIFIER FOR (ARC MATE 100, ARC MATE 120, ARC MATE 100i,
ARC MATE 120i, S–6, S–12, M–6, M–16i, S–420i, S–500, S–700, M–400i, M–710i, A–520i) . . . 220
5.2 POWER SUPPLY IMODULE (PSM) (A06B–6087–H115) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
5.3 SERVO AMPLIFIER MODULE (SVM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
5.4 SERVO AMPLIFIER (A06B–6066–H006) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
5.5 SERVO AMPLIFIER UNIT (A06B–6089–H106) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240

6. SETTING AND ADJUSTING THE POWER SUPPLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248


6.1 BLOCK DIAGRAM OF THE POWER SUPPLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
6.2 SELECTING TRANSFORMER TAPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
6.3 CHECKING THE LINE FILTER UNIT AND TRANSFORMER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
6.4 CHECKING THE POWER SUPPLY UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257

7. REPLACING A UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260


7.1 REPLACING A PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
7.1.1 Replacing the Backplane Printed Circuit Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
7.1.2 Replacing the Power Supply Unit or a Printed Circuit Board on the
Backplane Printed Circuit Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
7.1.3 Replacing the process I/O EA printed circuit board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
7.2 REPLACING A MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
7.3 REPLACING THE I/O UNIT MODEL B INTERFACE UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
7.4 REPLACING THE INPUT/OUTPUT UNIT OF MODEL A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
7.4.1 Replacing the Base Unit of the Input/Output Unit of Model A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
7.4.2 Replacing a Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
7.5 MOUNTING I/O UNIT MODEL B ON THE DIN RAIL
(USE A RAIL THAT IS 3.5MM WIDE AND 7.5MM HIGH.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
7.5.1 The DIN Rail is in the Operator’s Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
7.6 REPLACING THE TRANSFORMER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
7.7 REPLACING A SERVO AMPLIFIER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
7.8 REPLACING THE OPERATOR’S BOX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
7.9 REPLACING THE TEACH PENDANT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
7.10 REPLACING THE FAN MOTOR OF THE CONTROL UNIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
7.11 REPLACEMENT OF FUSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
7.11.1 Transformer, line filter unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
7.11.2 Servo Amplifier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
7.11.3 Replacing Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
7.11.4 Power Supply Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
7.11.5 Process Input/Output Printed Circuit Boards CA, CB, DA and EA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
7.12 REPLACING A RELAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
7.13 REPLACING THE BATTERY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299

2
B–80525E/04 Table of contents

III CONNECTIONS
1. GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303

2. BLOCK DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304

3. ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305


3.1 CONNECTION DIAGRAM BETWEEN MECHANICAL UNITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
3.2 EXTERNAL CABLE WIRING DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
3.2.1 Robot Connection Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
3.2.2 Teach Pendant Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
3.2.3 Connecting the Input Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
3.2.4 Connecting the External Power Supply ON/OFF Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
3.2.5 Connecting the External Emergency Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343

4. PERIPHERAL DEVICE, ARC WELDING,


AND END EFFECTOR INTERFACES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
4.1 PERIPHERAL DEVICE INTERFACE BLOCK DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
4.1.1 When Process I/O Printed Circuit Board CA, CB or EA is used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
4.1.2 When Process I/O Printed Cricuit Board DA is used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
4.1.3 When I/O Unit Model A is used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
4.1.4 When I/O Unit Model B is used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
4.1.5 When Two or more Process I/O Printed Circuit Boards and I/O Unit
(Model A or Model B) are used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
4.2 PERIPHERAL DEVICE INTERFACE COMBINATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
4.3 PROCESS I/O PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD SIGNALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
4.4 INTERFACE FOR PERIPHERAL DEVICES, END EFFECTORS, AND WELDERS . . . . . . . . . . 368
4.4.1 Peripheral Device and Control Unit Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
4.4.2 Connection Between the Mechanical Unit and End Effector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
4.4.3 Connection Between the Control Unit and Welder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
4.5 DIGITAL I/O SIGNAL SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
4.5.1 Peripheral Device Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
4.5.2 End Effector Control Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
4.5.3 I/O Signal Specifications for ARC–Welding Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
4.6 SPECIFICATIONS OF THE CABLES USED FOR PERIPHERAL DEVICES
AND WELDERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
4.6.1 Peripheral Device Interface A Cable (CRM2: Honda Tsushin, 50 pins) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
4.6.2 Peripheral Device Interface B Cable (CRM4: Honda Tsushin, 20 pins) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
4.6.3 ARC Weld Connection Cable (CRW1: Honda Tsushin, 34 pins) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
4.7 CABLE CONNECTION FOR THE PERIPHERAL DEVICES, END EFFECTORS,
AND ARC WELDERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
4.7.1 Peripheral Device Connection Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
4.7.2 Peripheral Device Cable Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
4.7.3 End Effector Cable Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398
4.7.4 Recommended Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
4.8 QUICK CHANGE (I–CABINET) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
4.8.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
4.8.2 Flowchart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
4.8.3 Replacement front cabinet unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
4.8.4 Hardware items required for quick change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
4.8.5 Notes on quick change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
4.8.6 Faulty unit replacement procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406

3
Table of contents B–80525E/04

5. TRANSPORTATION AND INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418


5.1 TRANSPORTATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
5.2 INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
5.2.1 Installation Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
5.2.2 Connecting Cables at Installation (Combined Type of i Cabinet) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
5.2.3 Separate–Type Control Unit of i Cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
5.3 INSTALLATION CONDITION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
5.4 ADJUSTMENT AND CHECKS AT INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
5.5 RESETTING OVERTRAVEL AND EMERGENCY STOP AT INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
5.5.1 Peripheral Device Interface Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
5.5.2 Resetting Overtravel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428

APPENDIX
A. TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
A.1 I–CABINET (ARC MATE 100, ARC MATE 120, ARC MATE 100i, ARC MATE 120i, S–6,
S–12, M–6i, M–16i, S–420i, S–500, S–700, M–400i, M–710i, A–520i) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
A.2 B–CABINET (ARC MATE 100, ARC MATE 120, ARC MATE 100i, ARC MATE 120i, S–6,
S–12, M–6i, M–16i, S–420i, S–500, S–700, M–400i, M–710i, A–520i) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
A.3 CABINET OF S–800/M–500 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472
A.4 CABINET OF M–410i AND S–450 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494
A.5 B–CABINET OF S–900 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 522

B. SPECIFICATIONS OF PERIPHERAL DEVICE INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 542


B.1 SIGNALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 542
B.2 SETTING COMMON VOLTAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 544
B.3 I/O SIGNALS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 544
B.3.1 Input Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 544
B.3.2 Output signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 550
B.4 SPECIFICATIONS OF DIGITAL INPUT/OUTPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554
B.4.1 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554
B.4.2 Input/Output Hardware Usable in the R-J2 Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554
B.4.3 Software Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554

C. DIAGRAM OF POWER SUPPLY PATH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 555

4
I SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
B–80525E/04 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS 1. SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

1 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

For the safety of the operator and the system, follow all safety precautions
when operating a robot and its peripheral devices installed in a work cell.

1.1 Operator safety is the primary safety consideration. Because it is very


dangerous to enter the operating space of the robot during automatic
OPERATOR SAFETY operation, adequate safety precautions must be observed.
The following lists the general safety precautions. Careful consideration
must be made to ensure operator safety.
(1) Have the robot system operators attend the training courses held by
FANUC.

FANUC provides various training courses. Contact our sales office for details.

(2) Even when the robot is stationary, it is possible that the robot is still
ready to move state and is waiting for a signal. In this state, the robot
is regarded as still in motion. To ensure operator safety, provide the
system with an alarm to indicate visually or aurally that the robot is
in motion.
(3) Install a safety fence with a gate so that no operator can enter the work
area without passing through the gate. Equip the gate with an
interlock that stops the robot when the gate is opened.

The controller is designed to receive this interlock signal. When the gate is
opened and this signal received, the controller stops the robot in an emergen-
cy. For connection, see Fig. 1.1 (a).

(4) Provide the peripheral devices with appropriate grounding (Class 1,


Class 2, or Class 3).
(5) Try to install the peripheral devices outside the work area.
(6) Draw an outline on the floor, clearly indicating the range of the robot
motion, including the tools such as a hand.
(7) Install a mat switch or photoelectric switch on the floor with an
interlock to a visual or aural alarm that stops the robot when an
operator enters the work area.
(8) If necessary, install a safety lock so that no one except the operator
in charge can turn on the power of the robot.

The circuit breaker installed in the controller is designed to disable anyone


from turning it on when it is locked with a padlock.

3
1. SAFETY PRECAUTIONS SAFETY PRECAUTIONS B–80525E/04

(9) When adjusting each peripheral device independently, be sure to turn


off the power of the robot.

Limit switch which operates


when the gate is opened.

Limit switch for


the safety gate
Printed circuit board for
operator’s box

Note) Terminals FENCE1 and FENCE2 are


on the PC board in the operator’s box.

Fig.1.1 (a) Safety Fence and Safety Gate

4
B–80525E/04 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS 1. SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

1.1.1 The operator is a person who operates the robot system. In this sense, a
Operator Safety worker who operates the teach pendant is also an operator. However, this
section does not apply to teach pendant operators.
(1) If it is not necessary for the robot to operate, turn off the power of the
robot controller or press the EMERGENCY STOP button, and then
proceed with necessary work.
(2) Operate the robot system at a location outside the work area.
(3) Install a safety fence with a safety gate to prevent any worker other
than the operator from entering the work area unexpectedly and also
to prevent the worker from entering a dangerous area.
(4) Install an EMERGENCY STOP button within the operator’s reach.

The robot controller is designed to be connected to an external EMER-


GENCY STOP button. With this connection, the controller stops the robot
operation when the external EMERGENCY STOP button is pressed. See the
diagram below for connection.

External EMERGENCY STOP button


Printed circuit board for
operator’s box
EMGIN1
EMGIN2

Note) Connect to EMGIN1 and EMGIN2.


Terminals EMGIN1 and EMGIN2 are on the PC board in the
operator’s box.

Fig.1.1 (b) Connection Diagram for External Emergency Stop Switch

5
1. SAFETY PRECAUTIONS SAFETY PRECAUTIONS B–80525E/04

1.1.2 While teaching the robot, it is necessary for the operator to enter the work
Safety of the Teach area of the robot. It is particularly necessary to ensure the safety of the
teach pendant operator.
Pendant Operator
(1) Unless it is specifically necessary to enter the robot work area, carry
out all tasks outside the area.
(2) Before teaching the robot, check that the robot and its peripheral
devices are all in the normal operating condition.
(3) When entering the robot work area and teaching the robot, be sure to
check the location and condition of the safety devices (such as the
EMERGENCY STOP button and the deadman’s switch on the teach
pendant).

The teach pendant supplied by FANUC is provided with a teach pendant en-
able switch and a deadman’s switch in addition to the EMERGENCY STOP
button. The functions of each switch are as follows.
EMERGENCY STOP button : Pressing this button stops the robot in an
emergency, irrespective to the condition of
the teach pendant enable switch.
Deadman’s switch : The function depends on the state of the
teach pendant enable switch.
When the enable switch is on – Releasing the finger from the dead
man’s switch stops the robot in an
emergency.
When the enable switch is off – The deadman’s switch is ineffective.

NOTE
The deadman’s switch is provided so that the robot operation can
be stopped simply by releasing finger from the teach pendant in
case of emergency.

(4) The teach pendant operator should pay careful attention so that no
other workers enter the robot work area.

NOTE
In addition to the above, the teach pendant enable switch and the
deadman’s switch also have the following function.
By pressing the deadman’s switch while the enable switch is on,
the emergency stop factor (normally the safety gate) connected
to FENCE1 and FENCE2 of the controller is invalidated. In this
case, it is possible for an operator to enter the fence during teach
operation without pressing the EMERGENCY STOP button. In
other words, the system understands that the combined
operations of pressing the teach pendant enable switch and
pressing the deadman’s switch indicates the start of teaching. The
teach pendant operator should be well aware that the safety gate
is not functional under this condition and bear full responsibility to
ensure that no one enters the fence during teaching.

6
B–80525E/04 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS 1. SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

(5) When entering the robot work area, the teach pendant operator should
enable the teach pendant whenever he or she enters the robot work
area. In particular, while the teach pendant enable switch is off, make
certain that no start command is sent to the robot from any operator’s
panel other than the teach pendant.

The teach pendant, operator’s box, and peripheral device interface send
each robot start signal. However the validity of each signal changes as fol-
lows depending on the mode of the teach pendant enable switch and the re-
mote switch on the operator’s panel.

Teach pen-
dant enable Remote Teach Operator’s Peripheral
switch switch pendant panel devices

On Independent Allowed to Not allowed Not allowed


start
Off Remote OFF Not allowed Allowed to Not allowed
start
Off Remote ON Not allowed Not allowed Allowed to
start

(6) To start the system using the operator’s box, make certain that nobody
is in the robot work area and that there are no abnormal conditions in
the robot work area.
(7) When a program is completed, be sure to carry out a test run according
to the procedure below.
(a) Run the program for at least one operation cycle in the single step
mode at low speed.
(b) Run the program for at least one operation cycle in the continuous
operation mode at low speed.
(c) Run the program for one operation cycle in the continuous opera-
tion mode at the intermediate speed and check that no abnormali-
ties occur due to a delay in timing.
(d) Run the program for one operation cycle in the continuous opera-
tion mode at the normal operating speed and check that the sys-
tem operates automatically without trouble.
(e) After checking the completeness of the program through the test
run above, execute it in the automatic operation mode.
(8) While operating the system in the automatic operation mode, the
teach pendant operator should leave the robot work area.

1.1.3 For the safety of maintenance personnel, pay utmost attention to the
following.
Safety During
Maintenance (1) Except when specifically necessary, turn off the power of the
controller while carrying out maintenance. Lock the power switch,
if necessary, so that no other person can turn it on.
(2) When disconnecting the pneumatic system, be sure to reduce the
supply pressure.
(3) Before the start of teaching, check that the robot and its peripheral
devices are all in the normal operating condition.

7
1. SAFETY PRECAUTIONS SAFETY PRECAUTIONS B–80525E/04

(4) If it is necessary to enter the robot work area for maintenance when
the power is turned on, the worker should indicate that the machine
is being serviced and make certain that no one starts the robot
unexpectedly.
(5) Do not operate the robot in the automatic mode while anybody is in
the robot work area.
(6) When it is necessary to maintain the robot alongside a wall or
instrument, or when multiple workers are working nearby, make
certain that their escape path is not obstructed.
(7) When a tool is mounted on the robot, or when any moving device
other than the robot is installed, such as belt conveyor, pay careful
attention to its motion.
(8) If necessary, have a worker who is familiar with the robot system
stand beside the operator’s panel and observe the work being
performed. If any danger arises, the worker should be ready to press
the EMERGENCY STOP button at any time.
(9) When replacing or reinstalling components, take care to prevent
foreign matter from entering the system.
(10) When handling each unit or printed circuit board in the controller
during inspection, turn off the power of the controller and also turn
off the circuit breaker to protect against electric shock.
(11)When replacing parts, be sure to use those specified by FANUC.
In particular, never use fuses or other parts of non-specified ratings.
They may cause a fire or result in damage to the components in the
controller.

8
B–80525E/04 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS 1. SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

1.2
SAFETY OF THE
TOOLS AND
PERIPHERAL
DEVICES

1.2.1
Precautions in (1) Use a limit switch or other sensor to detect a dangerous condition and,
Programming if necessary, design the program to stop the robot when the sensor
signal is received.
(2) Design the program to stop the robot when an abnormal condition
occurs in any other robots or peripheral devices, even though the
robot itself is normal.
(3) For a system in which the robot and its peripheral devices are in
synchronous motion, particular care must be taken in programming
so that they do not interfere with each other.
(4) Provide a suitable interface between the robot and its peripheral
devices so that the robot can detect the states of all devices in the
system and can be stopped according to the states.

1.2.2
Precautions for (1) Keep the component cells of the robot system clean, and operate the
Mechanism robot in an environment free of grease, water, and dust.
(2) Employ a limit switch or mechanical stopper to limit the robot motion
so that the robot does not come into contact with its peripheral devices
or tools.

9
1. SAFETY PRECAUTIONS SAFETY PRECAUTIONS B–80525E/04

1.3
SAFETY OF THE
ROBOT MECHANISM

1.3.1
Precautions in (1) When operating the robot in the jog mode, set it at an appropriate
Operation speed so that the operator can manage the robot in any eventuality.
(2) Before pressing the jog key, be sure you know in advance what
motion the robot will perform in the jog mode.

1.3.2
Precautions in (1) When the work areas of robots overlap, make certain that the motions
Programming of the robots do not interfere with each other.
(2) Be sure to specify the predetermined work origin in a motion program
for the robot and program the motion so that it starts from the origin
and terminates at the origin.
Make it possible for the operator to easily distinguish at a glance that
the robot motion has terminated.

1.3.3
Precautions for (1) Keep the work area of the robot clean, and operate the robot in an
Mechanisms environment free of grease, water, and dust.

10
B–80525E/04 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS 1. SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

1.4
SAFETY OF THE END
EFFECTOR

1.4.1
Precautions in (1) To control the pneumatic, hydraulic and electric actuators, carefully
Programming consider the necessary time delay after issuing each control command
up to actual motion and ensure safe control.
(2) Provide the end effector with a limit switch, and control the robot
system by monitoring the state of the end effector.

11
1. SAFETY PRECAUTIONS SAFETY PRECAUTIONS B–80525E/04

1.5
SAFETY IN (1) Never enter the robot work area while the robot is operating. Turn off
the power before entering the robot work area for inspection and
MAINTENANCE
maintenance.
(2) If it is necessary to enter the robot work area with the power turned
on, first press the EMERGENCY STOP button on the operator’s box.
(3) When replacing or reinstalling components, take care to prevent
foreign matter from entering the system.
When replacing the parts in the pneumatic system, be sure to reduce
the pressure in the piping to zero by turning the pressure control on
the air regulator.
(4) When handling each unit or printed circuit board in the controller
during inspection, turn off the power of the controller and turn off the
circuit breaker to protect against electric shock.
(5) When replacing parts, be sure to use those specified by FANUC.
In particular, never use fuses or other parts of non-specified ratings.
They may cause a fire or result in damage to the components in the
controller.
(6) Before restarting the robot, be sure to check that no one is in the robot
work area and that the robot and its peripheral devices are all in the
normal operating state.

12
II MAINTENANCE
B–80525E/04 MAINTENANCE 1. OVERVIEW

1 OVERVIEW

This manual describes the maintenance and connection of the R-J2 robot
controller (called the R-J2).
Maintenance Part : Troubleshooting, and the setting, adjustment,
and replacement of units
Connection Part: Connection of the R-J2 controller to the robot
mechanical unit and peripheral devices, and
installation of the controller

NOTE
Before entering the robot working area, be sure to turn off the
power to the controller or press the emergency stop button on the
operator’s box or teach pendant.

15
2. CONFIGURATION MAINTENANCE B–80525E/04

2 CONFIGURATION

2.1 Fig. 2.1 (a) to (d) show the R-J2.


EXTERNAL VIEW OF
THE CONTROLLER

Operator’s box
(option)

Teach pendant
R–J2 controller

Integrated type ARC Mate 100i, M–6i, S420i, A520i, M–710i


Remote mount type ARC Mate 100, ARC Mate 120, ARC Mate 100i, ARC Mate 120i
S6, S–12, M–6i, M–16i, S–420i, S–500, S–700, M–400i, M–710i, A520i

Fig.2.1 (a) External View of the R-J2 Controller (i cabinet)

16
B–80525E/04 MAINTENANCE 2. CONFIGURATION

Teach pendant
Operator’s pendant

(ARC Mate 100, ARC Mate 120, ARC Mate 100i, ARC Mate 120i, S–6, S–12, M–6i, M–16i
S–420i, S–450, S–500, S–700, S–800, M–500, M–410i, M–710i, A–520i)

Fig.2.1 (b) External View of the R-J2 controller (B–Cabinet)

17
2. CONFIGURATION MAINTENANCE B–80525E/04

Fig.2.1 (c) External View of the R-J2 controller (B–Cabinet) (S–900)

18
B–80525E/04 MAINTENANCE 2. CONFIGURATION

Operator’s box
(option)

R–J2 Control unit Teach pendant

Cabinet for M–410i is


installed in robot’s frame.

Fig.2.1 (d) External View of the R-J2 controller (Cabinet for M–410i) (M410i)

19
2. CONFIGURATION MAINTENANCE B–80525E/04

The R-J2 consists of the units shown in Fig. 2.1 (e) to (l).
The appearance and components may slightly differ depending on the
controlled robot, application, and options used.

Operator’s box Circuit breaker


(option)
Operator’s panel

FANUC Handy File Teach pendant

Main CPU printed


Servo amplifier for 6 axes circuit board
PC board for
operator’s box
Cooling unit
Power supply unit

Fan unit
(Optional printed circuit board)

Back plane

Regenerative discharge registance

Fan unit

Circuit breaker

Louver
Printed circuit board for emergecy stop
control Transformer

Magnetic
contactor (MCC)

Fig.2.1 (e) R-J2 Controller Interior (i Cabinet)


20
B–80525E/04 MAINTENANCE 2. CONFIGURATION

FANUC Handy File Teach pendant

Fan 1
Printed board for emergecy stop
Servo amplifier control

Main CPU printed board


Operator’s panel
Power supply unit

Optional printed board

I/O unit model A or model B

Braker

Fan 2

Line filter or transformer

Fan 3

Fig.2.1 (f) R-J2 Controller Interior (ARC Mate 100, ARC Mate 120, ARC Mate 100i, ARC Mate 120i, S–6, S–12,
M–6i, M–16i, S–420i, S–500, S–700, M–400i, A–520i)

21
2. CONFIGURATION MAINTENANCE B–80525E/04

FANUC Handy File


Teach pendant

Servo amplifier 5 Fan 1


Printed board for emergecy stop
Servo amplifier 4
control
Operator’s panel Main CPU printed board
Power supply unit
Optional printed board

I/O unit model A or model B

Braker

Fan 3 Fan 2
transformer or Line filter

Servo amplifier 3
Servo amplifier 2
Servo amplifier 1

Fig.2.1 (g) R-J2 Controller Interior (B–Cabinet) (S–800)

22
B–80525E/04 MAINTENANCE 2. CONFIGURATION

Regenerative discharge unit


Fan 1
Servo amplifier 4
Servo amplifier 3
Additional cabinet

Operator’s panel Conversion printed board


Main CPU printed board
Power supply unit
Optional printed board

Printed board for emergecy


stop control

Braker

Fan 2

transformer or Line filter

Servo amplifier 2
Fan 3 Servo amplifier 1

Servo amplifier 6
Teach pendant
Servo amplifier 5

Additional contactor
FANUC Handy File
I/O unit model A or model B

Fan 4

Fan 5
transformer or Line filter

(Additional cabinet interior)

Fig.2.1 (h) R-J2 Controller Interior (B–Cabinet) (S–900)

23
2. CONFIGURATION MAINTENANCE B–80525E/04

Servo module 1
Power supply module 1

Servo module 2

Servo module 3

Servo module 4

Fan 1

MCC

Battery unit AC reactor

Trans tap

I/O unit model B

Braker

I/O unit model A or B

transformer for brake


Optional printed board

Power supply unit

Main CPU printed board

Fan 2 Printed board for emergecy stop control

Fig.2.1 (i) R-J2 Controller Interior (Cabinet for M–410i)

24
B–80525E/04 MAINTENANCE 2. CONFIGURATION

FANUC Handy File Teach pendant

Servo module 1

Servo module 2 Fan 1

Servo module 3

Emergency stop control


printed board

Operator’s panel Main CPU printed board

Power supply unit

Optional printed board

I/O unit model A


or
I/O unit model B

Braker

Fan 2

Line filter
or
Transformer

Fan 3
Servo module 4

Power supply module

Fig.2.1 (j) R-J2 Controller Interior (B–Cabinet) (M–410i)

25
2. CONFIGURATION MAINTENANCE B–80525E/04

FANUC Handy File Teach pendant

Regenerative discharge unit


Fan 1

Servo amplifier 2
Servo amplifier 1 Conversion printed board

Main CPU printed board


Operator’s panel
Power supply unit

Optional printed board

I/O unit model A or model B

Braker

Fan 2

transformer or Line filter

Servo amplifier 4
Fan 3
Servo amplifier 3

Fig.2.1 (k) R–J2 Controller Interior (B–cabinet) (M–500)

26
B–80525E/04 MAINTENANCE 2. CONFIGURATION

FANUC Handy File Teach pendant

Servo module 2

Servo module 3 Fan 1


Servo module 1
Servo module 4

Emergency stop control


printed board

Operator’s panel Main CPU printed board

Power supply unit

Additional axis control


printed board

Optional printed board

I/O unit model A


or
I/O unit model B

Braker

Fan 2

Line filter
or
Transformer

Fan 3

Power supply module

Fig.2.1 (l) R-J2 Controller Interior (B–Cabinet) (S–450)

27
2. CONFIGURATION MAINTENANCE B–80525E/04

Robots and servo amplifier


J1 J2 J3 J4 J5 J6 J7
ARC Mate 100 A06B–6076–H005 (6–axis AMP) or A06B–6076–H105
ARC Mate 120 A06B–6076–H004 (6–axis AMP) or A06B–6076–H104
ARC Mate 120i
ARC Mate A06B–6076–H105 (6–axis amplifier)
100i/M–6i
S–6 A06B–6076–H005 (6–axis AMP) or A06B–6076–H105
S–12, M–16i A06B–6076–H004 (6–axis AMP) or A06B–6076–H104
S–420i A06B–6076–H001 (6–axis AMP) or A06B–6076–H101
S–450 A06B–6077–H111 (PSM)
AMP1/L AMP1/M AMP2/M AMP2/L AMP3/L AMP3/M AMP4
A06B A06B A06B A06B A06B A06B S–450S:
–6079 –6079 –6079 –6079 –6079 –6079 A06B–6079
–H206 –H206 –H207 –H207 –H206 –H206 –H104
S–450L:
A06B–6079
–H101
S–500 A06B–6076–H002 (6–axis AMP) or A06B–6076–H102
A–520i
M–400i
S–700 A06B–6076–H103 (6–axis AMP) or A06B–6076–H103
S–800 AMP1 AMP2 AMP3 AMP4/M AMP4/M AMP5
A06B A06B A06B A06B A06B A06B
–6089 –6089 –6089 –6089 –6089 –6089
–H105 –H105 –H105 –H208 –H208 –H105
S–900 AMP1 AMP3 AMP5 AMP2 AMP4 AMP6
A06B A06B A06B A06B A06B A06B
–6066 –6066 –6066 –6066 –6066 –6066
–H008 –H008 –H008 –H006 –H006 –H006
AMP1 AMP3 AMP5 AMP2 AMP4 AMP6
A06B A06B A06B A06B A06B A06B
–6089 –6089 –6089 –6089 –6089 –6089
–H106 –H106 –H106 –H105 –H105 –H105
M410i A06B–6087–H115 (PSM)
AMP1 AMP2 AMP3 AMP4
A06B A06B A06B A06B
–6079 –6079 –6079 –6079
–H106 –H106 –H106 –H103
M–500 AMP1 AMP3/M AMP2 AMP3/L AMP4
A06B A06B A06B A06B A06B
–6089 –6089 –6089 –6089 –6089
–H106 –H206 –H105 –H206 –H104
M–710i A06B–6076–H106 (6–axis amplifier)

28
B–80525E/04 MAINTENANCE 2. CONFIGURATION

The 2.1 (m) to (q) show the block diagram of the R–J2.

Peripheral Handy File External


Teach device emergency
Sensor CRT/KB Stop
pendant External
computer Printer on/off

Robot Peripheral
Operator’s

device
box

Pulse coder signal


Process I/O
or
I/O unit
model A
Main CPU printed board

model B
I/O signal (FANUC I/O Link)
Motor power supply
Brake power supply
Robot RDI/RDO signal
Back planeprinted circuit board

Pulse coder signal


Printed
circuit board
Servo signal for emergency
stop control

servo amplifier
Servo amplifier
Power supply unit

(6–axis amplifier)
precharge

Transformer
(Servo power

Battery over heat signal


210VAC

supply)

Fan
200-550 VAC
breaker

Transformer
AC input

Fig.2.1 (m) Block Diagram of the R-J2 (i–Cabinet) (ARC Mate 100, ARC Mate 120, ARC Mate 100i, ARC Mate
120i, S–6, S–12, M–6i, M–16i, S–420i, S–500, S–700, M–400i, M–710i, A–520i)

29
2. CONFIGURATION MAINTENANCE B–80525E/04

Peripheral External
Teach device Handy File emergency Robot Peripheral
pendant Sensor CRT/KB Stop
device
External
computer Printer on/off

Pulse coder signal


Operator’s
Process I/O
or

panel
I/O unit
model A
model B
Main CPU printed board

I/O signal (FANUC I/O Link)


Robot RDI/RDO signal
Back planeprinted circuit board

Brake power supply


Motor power supply
Pulse coder signal
Printed
circuit board
Servo signal for emergency
stop control

servo amplifier
Servo amplifier

(6–axis amplifier)
Power supply unit

precharge

(Servo power

Transformer
Battery over heat signal
210VAC

supply)

Fan
200-550 VAC
breaker

Transformer or
AC input

line filter unit


3

Fig.2.1 (n) Block Diagram of the R-J2 (B–Cabinet) (ARC Mate 100, ARC Mate 120, ARC Mate 100i, ARC
Mate 120i, S–6, S–12, M–6i, M–16i, S–420i, S–500, S–700, M–400i, M–710i, A–520i)

30
B–80525E/04 MAINTENANCE 2. CONFIGURATION

Peripheral External
Teach device Handy File emergency
Sensor CRT/KB Stop
pendant External
computer Printer on/off

Robot Peripheral
device

Motor power supply


Operator’s

Brake power supply


Pulse coder signal
Process I/O
or
panel

I/O unit
model A
model B
I/O signal (FANUC I/O Link)
Main CPU printed board

Robot RDI/RDO signal

Pulse coder signal


Back planeprinted circuit board

Printed servo amplifier


circuit board
Servo signal for emergency
stop control

Emergency
stop signal
Power supply unit

Transformer over heat signal

210VAC
Battery (Servo power
supply)
200-550 VAC

Fan
breaker

Transformer or
AC input

AC reactor
3

Fig.2.1 (o) Block Diagram of the R-J2 (B–Cabinet) (S–800, S–900, M–500)

31
2. CONFIGURATION MAINTENANCE B–80525E/04

Peripheral Handy File External


Teach device emergency
Robot Peripheral
Sensor CRT/KB Stop
pendant External device
computer Printer on/off

Pulse coder signal


Operator’s
Process I/O
or

panel
I/O unit
model A
model B
Main CPU printed board

I/O signal (FANUC I/O Link)


Robot RDI/RDO signal for emergency

Pulse coder signal


circuit board
stop control

Brake power supply


Back planeprinted circuit board

Motor power supply


Printed
Conversion

Servo signal
printed
board

servo amplifier
(C series)
Power supply unit

Transformer
over heat signal

Battery 210VAC
(Servo power supply)
200-550 VAC

Fan
breaker

Transformer or
AC input

line filter unit


3

Fig.2.1 (p) Block Diagram of the R-J2 (B–Cabinet) (S–900)

32
B–80525E/04 MAINTENANCE 2. CONFIGURATION

Peripheral Handy File External


Teach device emergency
CRT/KB Stop
pendant Sensor External
computer Printer on/off

Robot Peripheral
device
Operator’s
box

Pulse coder signal

Motor power supply


Process I/O

Brake power supply


or
I/O unit
model A
Main CPU printed board

model B

I/O signal (FANUC I/O Link)


Robot RDI/RDO signal
Back planeprinted circuit board

Pulse coder signal


Printed
circuit board Servo module
Servo signal for emergency
stop control

Power supply module


Power supply unit

Energency
stop signal
(Servo power
210VAC

supply)
Transformer

Battery
MMC unit

200-550 VAC
Transformer or

Fan
Transformer

breaker
AC reactor

AC input

Fig.2.1 (q) Block Diagram of the R-J2 (Cabinet) (S–450, M–410i)

33
2. CONFIGURATION MAINTENANCE B–80525E/04

2.2 – Main CPU PC board


COMPONENT The main CPU PC board contains a microprocessor, its peripheral
circuits, memory, a serial interface to connect a unit such as a teach
FUNCTIONS pendant, and operator’s panel control circuit. The main CPU controls
servo mechanism positioning and servo amplifier voltages.
- I/O printed circuit board, FANUC I/O Unit MODEL–A and MODEL B
Various types of printed circuit boards are provided forapplications
including process I/O. The FANUC I/O unit MODEL-A or MODEL
B can also be installed. When it is used, various I/O types can be
selected. These are connected with FANUC I/O Link.
- Printed circuit board for emergency stop control
This printed circuit board controls the emergency stop system
(including overtravel and Wrist breakdown).
- Power supply unit
The power supply unit converts the AC power to various levels of DC
power. It contains batteries to back up data memory.
- Backplane printed circuit board
The control printed circuit boards are mounted on the backplane
printed circuit board.
- Teach pendant
All operations including robot programming are performed with this
unit. The controller status and data are indicated on the liquid-crystal
display (LCD) on the pendant.
- Servo amplifier
The servo amplifier controls servo motor power amplification.
- Operator’s box/operator’s panel
Buttons and LEDs on the operator’s box are used to start the robot and
to indicate the robot status. The box has a port for the serial interface
to an external device. It also controls the emergency stop control
circuit.
- Transformer
The supply voltage is converted to an AC voltage required for the
controller by the transformer. The transformer accepts a line voltage
from 200 to 575 VAC according to tap setting.
- Fan unit
The fan unit cools the inside of the controller.
- Circuit breaker
If the electric system in the controller malfunctions, or if abnormal
input power causes high current in the system, the input power is
connected to the circuit breaker to protect the equipment.
- Regenerative discharge registance
This unit is connected to a servo amplifier to discharge the back
electromotive force generated in the servo motor.

34
B–80525E/04 MAINTENANCE 2. CONFIGURATION

2.3 Daily maintenance and periodic maintenance/inspection ensure reliable


robot performance for extended periods of time.
PREVENTIVE
(1) Daily maintenance
MAINTENANCE
Before operating the system each day, clean each part of the system
and check the system parts for any damage or cracks. Also check the
following:
(a) Before service operation
Check the cable connected to the teach pendant for excessive
twisting. Check the controller and peripheral devices for
abnormalities.
(b) After service operation
At the end of service operation, return the robot to the specified
position, then turned off the controller. Clean each part, and
check for any damage or cracks. If the ventilation port of the
controller is dusty, clean it.
(c) Check after one month
Check that the fan is rotating normally. If the fan has dirt and dust
built up, clean the fan according to step (d) described below for
inspection to be performed every 60 days.
When a B–cabinet is used, clean the filter installed at the air inlet
on the side of the control unit. When an i–cabinet is used, clean
the louver on the back of the control unit.
(d) Periodic inspection performed every six months
i–cabinet: Remove the top cover, louver, and back panel (if
possible), then remove any dirt and dust from the
inside of the transformer room. Wipe off dirt and
dust from the fan and transformer.
B–cabinet: Remove the back panel, then remove any dirt and
dust from the inside. Wipe off dirt and dust from the
fan and transformer.
(2) Maintenance tools
It is recommended that the following maintenance tools be prepared:
(a) Measuring instruments
AC/DC voltmeter (A digital voltmeter is sometimes required.)
Oscilloscope with a frequency range of 5 MHz or higher, two
channels
(b) Tools
Phillips screwdrivers: Large, medium, and small
Standard screwdrivers: Large, medium, and small
Pliers
Long-nose pliers
Cutting pliers

35
3. TROUBLESHOOTING MAINTENANCE B–80525E/04

3 TROUBLESHOOTING

This chapter describes the checking method and corrective action for each
error code indicated if a hardware alarm occurs. Refer to the operator’s
manual for releasing program alarms.

36
B–80525E/04 MAINTENANCE 3. TROUBLESHOOTING

3.1
POWER CANNOT BE
TURNED ON
 Check1 Check that the circuit breaker is on and has not tripped.
Corrective action: Turn on the circuit breaker.

 Check2 Check whether the LED (PIL: green) on the power supply unit is on.
Corrective action: If the LED is not on, 200 VAC is not supplied to the
power supply unit. Find the cause. Investigate the cause
according to the overall circuit diagram in Appendix.

 Check3 Check whether the OFF and COM signals are connected on the terminal
block on the panel printed circuit board.
Corrective action: If OFF and COM are not connected : If the external
ON/OFF function is not used, connect the external ON
and OFF lines. If the external ON and OFF lines are
already connected, check the mating contacts and the
cable.

 Check4 Checks 1 to 3 above confirm that 200 VAC power is supplied to connector
CP1 of the power supply unit and that the ON/OFF switch functions
normally. So check the power supply unit using the following procedure:
If the LED (PIL: green) on the power supply unit is not on
a) Fuses F1 is blown : See corrective action (1).
b) None of the above fuses blown : Check that 200 VAC is supplied
to connector CP1 again.
If it is supplied, replace the power
supply unit.
If the LED (ALM: red) on the power supply unit is on
Check if the +24 V external connection cable is connected to 0 V or
ground.
a) Fuse F3 blown : See corrective action (2).
b) Fuse F4 blown : See corrective action (3).
c) None of the above fuses blown [d) is also probable] :
A printed circuit board or unit that
uses a DC supply voltage (+5 V,
+24 V, or +15 V) is faulty.
d) None of the above fuses blown : Check that 200 VAC is supplied
to connector CP1. If it is supplied
replace the power supply unit.
Corrective action: If the power supply unit is not
faulty, replace the operator’s box or
operater’s panel.

37
3. TROUBLESHOOTING MAINTENANCE B–80525E/04

 Corrective action 1 Causes of blown fuses F1 and corrective action


(a) Short-circuit in the surge absorber VS11
VS11 is inserted to absorb surge voltage between input lines.
If the surge voltage is excessive or sustained, excessively high
voltage is applied to VS11 and a failure occurs in the short-circuit
mode, causing F1 to blow. If a short-circuit occurs in VS11, and
there is not spare part, the system is permitted to operate without
VS11. In this case, however, obtain and install a new VS11 as
soon as possible.
VS11 ordering number: A50L-2001-0122#G431k
(b) Short-circuit of diode stack DB11
(c) Short-circuit between D and S in switching transistors Q21 and
Q22
(d) Short-circuit between diodes D31 and D32
(e) The secondary power supply module is faulty :
If one of the causes (b) to (e) above is detected, replace the power
supply unit with a spare unit.
The codes for F1 is : A60L-0001-0245#GP75

Corrective action 2 Causes of blown fuse F3 and corrective action


The device connected to connector CP5 of the power supply unit may be
faulty. If no device is connected to CP5 or the connected device is normal,
the +24 V power used in a printed circuit board connected to the backplane
is faulty.
The code of F3 is A60L–0001–0075#5.0 :

Corrective action 3 Causes of blown fuse F4 and corrective action


The device connected to connector CP6 of the power supply unit may be
faulty. If no device is connected to CP6 or the connected device is normal,
the +24E used in a printed circuit board connected to the backplane is
faulty.
The code of F4 is A60L-0001-0046#5.0.

38
B–80525E/04 MAINTENANCE 3. TROUBLESHOOTING

3.2
TROUBLESHOOTING (1) SRVO–001 SVAL1 Operator panel E–stop
(Explanation) The emergency stop button on the operator’s box or
USING THE ERROR operator’s panel is pressed.
CODE (Action) Release the emergency stop button pressed on the
operator’s box or operator’s panel.

Operator’s box

Operator’s panel
Emergency stop (B–cabinet)
button

Emergency stop
button

(2) SRVO–002 SVAL1 Teach pendant E–stop


(Explanation) The emergency stop button on the operator’s panel
was pressed.
(Action) Release the emergency stop button on the teach
pendant.

Emergency stop button

39
3. TROUBLESHOOTING MAINTENANCE B–80525E/04

(3) SRVO–003 SVAL1 Deadman switch released


(Explanation) The teach pendant is valid, but the deadman’s switch
is not pressed.
(Action) Press the deadman switch to run the robot.

Deadman switch

(4) SRVO–004 SVAL1 Fence open


(Explanation) On the terminal block of the panel printed circuit
board, no connection is made between FENCE1 and
FENCE2. If a safety fence is connected between
FENCE1 and FENCE2, the door of the safety fence
is open.
(Action 1) If a safety fence is connected, close the door.
(Action 2) Check the switch and cable connected to FENCE1
and FENCE2.
(Action 3) Make a connection between FENCE1 and FENCE2.

Panel printed circuit board

FENCE 1 FENCE 2

40
B–80525E/04 MAINTENANCE 3. TROUBLESHOOTING

(5) SRVO–005 SVAL1 Robot overtravel


(Explanation) The robot has gone beyond an axis/direction hardware
limit switch. The robot is designed so that normally it
will neither go out of each axial movable range
(software limit) nor reach any hardware limit. It is
however factory–set in an overtravel state for
convenience of packing.
(Action 1) 1) Release axes from overtravel using the overtravel
release screen [OT_RELEASE].
2) Hold down the shift key and press the RESET
button to reset the alarm condition.
3) While still holding down the shift key, jog–feed
the robot until its overtraveled axes return within
the movable range.
(Action 2) Check fuse F4 of the power supply unit. If the fuse
has blown, replace it with a new one.
(Action 3) When a B–cabinet is used, check fuse F2 of the
emergency stop control printed circuit board. If the
fuse has blown, replace it with a new one.
(Action 4) Check the overtravel connection cable (i–cabinet
integration type) or robot connection cable (RP1) for
a connection to the ground.
(Action 5) Replace the emergency stop control printed circuit
board.
(6) SRVO–006 SVAL1 Hand broken
(Explanation) If a safety joint is used, it is broken. If the joint is not
broken, the voltage of the HBK signal in the robot
connection cable is 0 V for some reason.
(Action 1) 1.Hold down the shift key and press the alarm reset
button to reset the alarm condition.
(Action 2) While still holding down the shift key, jog–feed the
robot until the tool moves to the working area.
1) Exchange the safety joint.
2) Check the cables.
(7) SRVO–007 SVAL1 External E–stop
(Explanation) On the terminal block of the panel printed circuit
board, no connection is made between EMGIN1 and
EMGIN2. If an external emergency stop switch is
connected between EMGIN1 and EMGIN2, the
switch is pressed.
(Action 1) If an external emergency stop switch is connected,
releases the switch.
(Action 2) Check the switch and cable connected to EMGIN1
and EMGIN2.
(Action 3) Make a connection between EMGIN1 and EMGIN2.

41
3. TROUBLESHOOTING MAINTENANCE B–80525E/04

Panel printed circuit board

EMGIN 1 EMGIN 2

(8) SRVO–009 SVAL1 Pneumatic pressure alarm


(Explanation) While checking the air pressure, an abnormal air
pressure was detected. If the air pressure is normal,
the PPABN signal in the robot connection cable
became abnormal for some reason.
(Action) If the pneumatic pressure is normal, check the cables.
(9) SRVO–014 WARN Fan motor abnormal
(Explanation) A fan motor in the backplane is abnormal.
(Action) Check the fan motor and its cables. Replace them if
necessary.
Fan motor

42
B–80525E/04 MAINTENANCE 3. TROUBLESHOOTING

(10) SRVO–015 SVAL1 SYSTEM OVER HEAT (Group : i Axis : j)


(Explanation) The temperature in the control unit exceeds the
specified value.
(Action 1) If the ambient temperature is higher than specified
(45°C), cool down using the air conditioner.
(Action 2) If the fan motor is not running, check it and its cables.
Replace them if necessary.
(Action 3) If the thermostat on the backplane PC board is
defective, replace the backplane unit.

Fan motor

Fan motor

i cabinet

43
3. TROUBLESHOOTING MAINTENANCE B–80525E/04

Fan motor

Fan motor

Fan motor B–Cabinet


(ARC Mate 100, ARC Mate 120, ARC Mate 100i, ARC Mate 120i, S–6, S–12i, M–6i, M–16i, S–420i, S–500, S–700i,
M–400i, A–520)

44
B–80525E/04 MAINTENANCE 3. TROUBLESHOOTING

Fan motor

Fan motor

(S–800)

Fan motor
Fan motor

Fan motor

(M–500)

Fan motor

45
3. TROUBLESHOOTING MAINTENANCE B–80525E/04

Fan motor

Additional cabinet

Fan motor

Fan motor

Fan motor

Fan motor

(Additional cabinet interior)

B–Cabinet/S–900

46
B–80525E/04 MAINTENANCE 3. TROUBLESHOOTING

Fan motor

Fan motor

Cabinet for M–410i

47
3. TROUBLESHOOTING MAINTENANCE B–80525E/04

(11)SRVO–018 SVAL1 Brake abnormal


(Explanation) An excessive break current is detected. When the
ARC Mate 100, ARC Mate 120, ARC Mate 100i,
ARC Mate 120i, S–6. S–12, M–6i, M–16i, S–420i,
S–500, S–700, M–400i, M–710i or A–520i is used,
the seven–segment LED on the servo amplifier
indicates 1. When the S–800, M–410i, M–500 or
S–450 is used, the LED (red) on the emergency stop
control printed circuit board lights. When the S–900
is used, the LED (red) on the conversion printed
circuit board or the emergency stop control printed
circuit board lights.
(Action 1) Check the robot connection cable (RM1) and cables
internal to the mechanical section for a short–circuit
and connection to the ground.
(Action 2) Replace the servo amplifier (when the ARC Mate
100, ARC Mate 120, ARC Mate 100i, ARC Mate
120i, S–6. S–12, M–6i, M–16i, S–420i, S–500,
S–700, M–400i, M–710i or A–520i is used), the
emergency stop control printed circuit board (when
the S–450, S–800, M–410i, or M–500 is used), or the
conversion printed circuit board or the emergency
stop control printed circuit board (the conversion
printed circuit board is not installed.) (when the
S–900 is used).

Servo amplifier

i–Cabinet

48
B–80525E/04 MAINTENANCE 3. TROUBLESHOOTING

Servo amplifier

B–Cabinet

(ARC Mate 100, ARC Mate 120, ARC Mate 100i, ARC Mate 120i, S–6, S–12, M–6i, M–16i, S–420i, S–500, S–700, M–400i,
M–710i, A–520i)

49
3. TROUBLESHOOTING MAINTENANCE B–80525E/04

S–800

Emergency stop control


printed board

M–500

50
B–80525E/04 MAINTENANCE 3. TROUBLESHOOTING

Emergency stop control


printed board

(M–410i)

Conversion printed board

(S–900)

51
3. TROUBLESHOOTING MAINTENANCE B–80525E/04

Emergency stop control


printed board

S–450, M–410i (B–Cabinet)

52
B–80525E/04 MAINTENANCE 3. TROUBLESHOOTING

(12) SRVO–019 SVAL1 SVON input


(Explanation) On the terminal block of the panel printed circuit
board, no connection is made between SVON1 and
SVON2. If a switch is connected between SVON1
and SVON2, the switch is pressed.
(Action 1) If a switch is connected, releases the switch.
(Action 2) Check the switch and cable connected to SVON1 and
SVON2.
(Action 3) Make a connection between SVON1 and SVON2.

Panel printed circuit board

SVON 1 SVON 2

53
3. TROUBLESHOOTING MAINTENANCE B–80525E/04

(13) SRVO–021 SVAL1 SRDY off (Group : i Axis : j)


(Explanation) The HRDY is on and the SRDY is off, although there
is no other cause of an alarm. (HRDY is a signal with
which the host directs the servo system whether to
turn on or off the servo amplifier MCC. SRDY is a
signal with which the servo system informs the host
whether the MCC is turned on.)
If the servo amplifier MCC cannot be turned on when
directed so, it is most likely that a servo amplifier
alarm has occurred. If a servo amplifier alarm has
been detected, the host will not issue this alarm
(SRDY off). To sum up, this alarm indicates that the
MCC cannot be turned on for an unknown reason.
(Action 1) Check that the door is completely closed. Check that
the door switch operates normally. (In case of
i–cabinet)
(Action 2) Check the input voltage (200 VAC) to the servo
amplifier. If it is 170 VAC or lower, check the line
voltage.
(Action 3) Replace the emergency stop control PC board.
(Action 4) Replace the main CPU PC board.
(Action 5) Check the cable between the servo amplifier and the
CPU PC board, and replace it if necessary.
(Action 6) Replace the servo amplifier.

Servo amplifier Main CPU

Door switch

Printed circuit board for


emergency stop control

54
B–80525E/04 MAINTENANCE 3. TROUBLESHOOTING

Emergency stop control Main CPU


printed board

Servo amplifier

B–Cabinet
(ARC Mate 100, ARC Mate 120, ARC Mate 100i, ARC Mate 120i, S–6, S–12, M–6i, M–16i, S–420i, S–500, S–700, M–400i, M–710i,
A–520i)

55
3. TROUBLESHOOTING MAINTENANCE B–80525E/04

Emergency stop control


printed board Main CPU

Servo amplifier 5

Servo amplifier 4

Servo amplifier 3
S–800 Servo amplifier 2
Servo amplifier 1

Emergency stop control Main CPU


printed board
Servo amplifier 2

Servo amplifier 1

Servo amplifier 4
M–500
Servo amplifier 3

56
B–80525E/04 MAINTENANCE 3. TROUBLESHOOTING

Servo amplifier 4
Servo amplifier 3
Additional cabinet

Conversion printed board

Main CPU printed board

Emergency stop control


printed board

Servo amplifier 2
Servo amplifier 1

Servo amplifier 6
Servo amplifier 5

(Additional cabinet interior)

B–Cabinet/S–900

57
3. TROUBLESHOOTING MAINTENANCE B–80525E/04

Servo module 4

Servo module 3

Servo module 2

Servo module 1
Power supply module

Main CPU printed board

Emergency stop control printed board

Cabinet for M–410i

58
B–80525E/04 MAINTENANCE 3. TROUBLESHOOTING

Servo module 3
Emergency control printed board

Servo module 2 Main CPU printed board

Servo module 1

Power supply module Servo module 4

M–410i (B–Cabinet)

59
3. TROUBLESHOOTING MAINTENANCE B–80525E/04

Servo module 4
Servo module 3 Emergency stop control printed board

Servo module 2
Main CPU printed board

Servo module 1

Power supply module

S–450

60
B–80525E/04 MAINTENANCE 3. TROUBLESHOOTING

(14) SRVO–022 SVAL1 SRDY on (Group : i Axis : j)


(Explanation) When the HRDY is about to go on, the SRDY is
already on. (HRDY is a signal with which the host
directs the servo system whether to turn on or off the
servo amplifier MCC. SRDY is a signal with which
the servo system informs the host whether the MCC
is turned on.
(Action 1) Replace the emergency stop control PC board.
(Action 2) Replace the main CPU PC board.
(Action 3) Check the cable between the servo amplifier and the
CPU PC board, and replace it if necessary.
(Action 4) Replace the servo amplifier.

Servo amplifier
Main CPU

Printed circuit board for


emergency stop control

61
3. TROUBLESHOOTING MAINTENANCE B–80525E/04

Emergency stop control Main CPU


printed board

Servo amplifier

B–Cabinet
(ARC Mate 100, ARC Mate 120, ARC Mate 100i, ARC Mate 120i, S–6, S–12, M–6i, M–16i, S–420i, S–500, S–700, M–400i, M–710i,
A–520i)

62
B–80525E/04 MAINTENANCE 3. TROUBLESHOOTING

Emergency stop control


printed board Main CPU

Servo amplifier 5

Servo amplifier 4

Servo amplifier 3
Servo amplifier 2
Servo amplifier 1
S–800

Emergency stop control Main CPU


printed board
Servo amplifier 2

Servo amplifier 1

Servo amplifier 4
Servo amplifier 3
M–500

63
3. TROUBLESHOOTING MAINTENANCE B–80525E/04

Servo amplifier 4
Servo amplifier 3
Additional cabinet

Conversion printed board

Main CPU printed board

Emergency stop control


printed board

Servo amplifier 2
Servo amplifier 1

Servo amplifier 6
Servo amplifier 5

(Additional cabinet interior)

B–Cabinet/S–900

64
B–80525E/04 MAINTENANCE 3. TROUBLESHOOTING

Servo module 4

Servo module 3

Servo module 2

Servo module 1
Power supply module

Main CPU printed board

Emergency stop control printed board

Cabinet for M–410i

65
3. TROUBLESHOOTING MAINTENANCE B–80525E/04

Servo module 3
Emergency control printed board

Servo module 2 Main CPU printed board

Servo module 1

Power supply module Servo module 4

M–410i (B–Cabinet)

66
B–80525E/04 MAINTENANCE 3. TROUBLESHOOTING

Servo module 4
Servo module 3 Emergency stop control printed board

Servo module 2
Main CPU printed board

Servo module 1

Power supply module

S–450

67
3. TROUBLESHOOTING MAINTENANCE B–80525E/04

(15) SRVO–023 SVAL1 Stop error excess (Group : i Axis : j)


(Explanation) When the servo is at stop, the position error is
abnormally large.
(Action 1) Check to see if the load is greater than the rating. If
greater, reduce it to within the rating. (If the load is
too greater, the torque required for
acceleration/deceleration becomes higher than the
capacity of the motor. As a result, the motor becomes
unable to follow the command, and an alarm is
issued.)
(Action 2) Check each phase voltage of the three–phase power
(200 VAC) input to the servo amplifier. If it is 170
VAC or lower, check the line voltage. (If the voltage
input to the servo amplifier becomes low, the torque
output also becomes low. As a result the motor may
become unable to follow the command, hence
possibly an alarm.)
(Action 3) If the line voltage is 170 VAC or higher, replace the
servo amplifier.
(Action 4) Check continuity of motor power cables.
(Action 5) Replace the motor.

Servo amplifier
Main CPU

Printed circuit board for


emergency stop control

68
B–80525E/04 MAINTENANCE 3. TROUBLESHOOTING

Emergency stop control Main CPU


printed board

Servo amplifier

B–Cabinet
(ARC Mate 100, ARC Mate 120, ARC Mate 100i, ARC Mate 120i, S–6, S–12, M–6i, M–16i, S–420i, S–500, S–700, M–400i, M–710i,
A–520i)

69
3. TROUBLESHOOTING MAINTENANCE B–80525E/04

Emergency stop control


printed board Main CPU

Servo amplifier 5

Servo amplifier 4

Servo amplifier 3
Servo amplifier 2
Servo amplifier 1
S–800

Emergency stop control Main CPU


printed board
Servo amplifier 2

Servo amplifier 1

Servo amplifier 4
Servo amplifier 3
M–500

70
B–80525E/04 MAINTENANCE 3. TROUBLESHOOTING

Servo amplifier 4
Servo amplifier 3
Additional cabinet

Conversion printed board

Main CPU printed board

Emergency stop control


printed board

Servo amplifier 2
Servo amplifier 1

Servo amplifier 6
Servo amplifier 5

(Additional cabinet interior)

B–Cabinet/S–900

71
3. TROUBLESHOOTING MAINTENANCE B–80525E/04

Servo module 4

Servo module 3

Servo module 2

Servo module 1
Power supply module

Main CPU printed board

Emergency stop control printed board

Cabinet for M–410i

72
B–80525E/04 MAINTENANCE 3. TROUBLESHOOTING

Servo module 3
Emergency control printed board

Servo module 2 Main CPU printed board

Servo module 1

Power supply module Servo module 4

M–410i (B–Cabinet)

73
3. TROUBLESHOOTING MAINTENANCE B–80525E/04

Servo module 4
Servo module 3 Emergency stop control printed board

Servo module 2
Main CPU printed board

Servo module 1

Power supply module

S–450

(16) SRVO–024 SVAL1 Move error excess (Group : i Axis : j)


(Explanation) When the robot is running, its position error is greater
than a specified value ($PARAM _ GROOP.
$MOVER _ OFFST or $PARAM _ GROUP.
$TRKERRLIM). It is likely that the robot cannot
follow the speed specified by program.
(Action) Take the same actions as described for the above
alarm.
(17) SRVO–025 SVAL1 Motn dt overflow (Group : i Axis : j)
(Explanation) The specified value is too great.

74
B–80525E/04 MAINTENANCE 3. TROUBLESHOOTING

(18) SRVO–026 WARN2 Motor speed limit (Group : i Axis : j)


(Explanation) A value higher than the maximum motor speed
($PARAM_GROUP.$MOT_SPD_LIM) was
specified. The actual motor speed is clamped to the
maximum speed.
(19) SRVO–027 WARN Robot not mastered (Group : i)
(Explanation) An attempt was made to calibrate the robot, but the
necessary adjustment had not been completed.
(Action) Make the adjustment on the positioning menu [6
System.positioning].
(20) SRVO–030 SVAL1 Brake on hold (Group : i)
(Explanation) This alarm occurs when the robot pauses, if the brake
on hold function has been enabled ($SCR.
$BRKHOLD _ ENB = 1). Disable the function if it is
not necessary.
(Action) Disable [Servo–off during pause] on the general
setting menu [6 Setting.general].
(21) SRVO–031 SVAL1 User servo alarm (Group : i)
(Explanation) A user servo alarm occurred.
(22) SRVO–033 WARN Robot not calibrated (Group : i)
(Explanation) An attempt was made to set up a reference point for
simplified adjustment, but the robot had not been
calibrated.
(Action) Calibrate the robot.
1.Supply power.
2.Set up a simplified adjustment reference point
using [Positioning] on the positioning menu.
(23) SRVO–034 WARN Ref pos not set (Group : i)
(Explanation) An attempt was made to perform simplified
adjustment, but the reference point had not been set
up.
(Action) Set up a simplified adjustment reference point on the
positioning menu.
(24) SRVO–035 WARN2 Joint speed limit (Group : i Axis : j)
(Explanation) A value higher than the maximum axis speed
($PARAM_GROUP.$JNTVELLIM) was specified.
Each actual axis speed is clamped to the maximum
speed.
(25) SRVO–036 SVAL1 Inpos time over (Group : i Axis : j)
(Explanation) The robot did not get to the effective area ($PARAM _
GROUP.$ STOPTOL) even after the position check
monitoring time ($PARAM _ GROUP. $INPOS _
TIME) elapsed.
(Action) Take the same actions as for SRVO–23 (large position
error at a stop).
(26) SRVO–037 SVAL1 Imstp input (Group : i j)
(Explanation) The *IMSTP signal for a peripheral device interface
was input.
(Action) Turn on the *IMSTP signal.

75
3. TROUBLESHOOTING MAINTENANCE B–80525E/04

(27) SRVO–038 SVAL2 Pulse mismatch (Group : i Axis : j)


(Explanation) The pulse count obtained when power is turned off
does not match the pulse count obtained when power
is applied.
(Action) Perform APC reset and remaster robot (RES–PCA)
1. Press MENUS.
2. Select SYSTEM.
3. Press F1 [TYPE].
4. Select system variables.
5. Move the cursor to $MCR.
6. Press ENTER.
7. Move the cursor to $SPC_RESET.
8. Press F4, TRUE. The display will reset to false.
This is normal.
9. Press RESET.
The fault condition should reset. If the controller
is still faulted with additional servo–related errors,
cold start the controller.
It might be recessary to remaster the robot.
(28) SRVO–039 SVAL1 Motor speed excess (Group : i Axis : j)
(Explanation) The motor speed was too high to be used in vector
acceleration/deceleration control.
(Action) Specify a lower speed with the teach pendant.
(29) SRVO–041 SVAL2 MOFAL alarm (Group : i Axis : j)
(Explanation) The command value was too high.
(Action 1) Exchange axis module.
(Action 2) Exchange Main CPU.
(30) SRVO–042 MCAL alarm (Group : i Axis : j)
(Explanation) This alarm indicates that a deposit has been detected
in the magnetic contactor, which is built into the servo
amplifier. When an attempt was made to close the
contactor, a contact was already closed. A deposit can
be detected when an attempt is made to close a
contactor on which a deposit has been formed. ‘2’
(ARC Mate 100, ARC Mate 120, ARC Mate 100i,
ARC Mate 120i, S–6, S–12, M–6i, M–16i, S–420i,
S–500, S–700, M–400i, M–710i, A–520i) or ‘7’
(S–900) is displayed on the servo amplifier LED
display.
(Action 1) Check fuses F1, F2, and F3 of the line filter unit (or
transformer). If they have blown, replace them.
(When F1, F2, and F3 blow, alarms OHAL1, and
MCAL are displayed on the teach pendant when the
control unit is turned on.)
(Action 2) Check the cable between the servo amplifier and
Main CPU printed circuit board. If it is defective,
replace it. (When the connection is broken, alarms
OHAL1 and MCAL are displayed on the teach
pendant at the same time.)
(Action 3) Replace the servo amplifier.
(Action 4) Replace the Main CPU printed circuit board.

76
B–80525E/04 MAINTENANCE 3. TROUBLESHOOTING

Servo amplifier

i–Cabinet

Servo amplifier

B–Cabinet

(ARC Mate 100, ARC Mate 120, ARC Mate 100i, ARC Mate 120i, S–6, S–12, M–6i, M–16i, S–420i, S–500, S–700, M–400i, M–710i, A–520i)

77
3. TROUBLESHOOTING MAINTENANCE B–80525E/04

Servo amplifier 4
Servo amplifier 3

Servo amplifier 2
Servo amplifier 1

Servo amplifier 6
Servo amplifier 5

(Additional cabinet interior)

B–Cabinet/S–900

78
B–80525E/04 MAINTENANCE 3. TROUBLESHOOTING

(31) SRVO–043 SVAL1 DCAL alarm (Group : i Axis : j)


(Explanation) The regenerative discharge energy was too high to be
dissipated as heat. (To run the robot, the servo amplifier
supplies energy to the robot. When going down the
vertical axis, the robot operates from the potential
energy. If a reduction in the potential energy is higher
than the energy needed for acceleration, the servo
amplifier receives energy from the motor. A similar
phenomenon occurs even when no gravity is applied,
for example, at deceleration on a horizontal axis. The
energy that the servo amplifier receives from the motor
is called the regenerative energy. The servo amplifier
dissipates this energy as heat. If the regenerative energy
is higher than the energy dissipated as heat, the
difference is stored in the servo amplifier, causing an
alarm.) In case of ARC Mate 100, ARC Mate 120,
ARC Mate 100i, ARC Mate 120i, S–6, S–12, M–6i,
M–16i, S–420i, S–500, S–700, M–400i, M–710i and
A520i.
(Action) If the servo amplifier LED indicates ”8” (DCOH
alarm): (This alarm occurs when a thermostat detects
that the regenerative resistor is overheated.)
–This alarm is likely to occur when the regenerative
discharge energy is high because of frequent
acceleration /deceleration or a vertical axis being used.
In this case, ease the conditions under which the robot
is used.
–Disconnect the cable from connector CN8A of the
servo amplifier, then check the continuity between
pins 1 and 2 of the cable, If a non–contimity is
detected, replace the regenerative resistor.
–Disconnect the cable from terminals R1 and R2 of
the servo amplifier, then measure the resistance of
the cable. If it is other than 4W, replace the
regenerative resistor.
–Replace the servo amplifier.
For S–800, S–900 and M–500
(Action1) When number 4 (DCSW alarm) is displayed on the
servo amplifier display (the DCSW alarm is issued
when the regenerative transistor holds the on state for
one second or more),
–Replace the servo amplifier.
–The short–period (about one second) regenerative
energy may be excessive due to a large load being
applied to the robot. Reduce the load so that it does
not exceed the rated value.
(Action2) When number 5 (DCOH alarm) is displayed on the
servo amplifier display (the DCOH alarm is issued
when the thermostat detects overheating of the
regenerative resistor),

79
3. TROUBLESHOOTING MAINTENANCE B–80525E/04

–Frequent acceleration/deceleration or large


regenerative energy at the gravity axis may cause
this alarm to be issued. Ease the use conditions.
–When a transformer is not being used, check that
TH1 and TH2 of the servo amplifier are
short–circuited.
–When a transformer is being used, check the wiring
of the thermostat.
–Replace the servo amplifier.
–A phase of the power supplied to the servo amplifier
may be missed. Check the wiring.

Servo amplifier

Regenerative registance

i cabinet (ARC Mate 100, ARC Mate 120,


ARC Mate 100i, ARC Mate 120i, S–6, S–12,
M–6i, M–16i, S–420i, S–500, S–700,
M–400i, M–710i, A–520i)

80
B–80525E/04 MAINTENANCE 3. TROUBLESHOOTING

Servo amplifier

Regenerative
registance

B–Cabinet
(ARC Mate 100, ARC Mate 120, ARC Mate 100i, ARC Mate 120i, S–6, S–12, M–6i, M–16i, S–420i, S–500, S–700, M–400i, M–710i,
A–520i)

81
3. TROUBLESHOOTING MAINTENANCE B–80525E/04

Servo amplifier 5

Servo amplifier 4

Servo amplifier 3
Servo amplifier 2
Servo amplifier 1

S–800
Regenerative discharge unit

Servo amplifier 2

Servo amplifier 1

Servo amplifier 4

Servo amplifier 3
M–500

82
B–80525E/04 MAINTENANCE 3. TROUBLESHOOTING

Regenerative discharge unit

Servo amplifier 4
Servo amplifier 3

Servo amplifier 2
Servo amplifier 1

Servo amplifier 6
Servo amplifier 5

(Additional cabinet interior)

B–Cabinet/S–900

83
3. TROUBLESHOOTING MAINTENANCE B–80525E/04

(32) SRVO–044 SVAL1 HVAL alarm (Group : i Axis : j)


SRVO–154 SVAL1 HVAL alarm (Group : i Axis : j)
(Explanation) The DC voltage (DC link voltage) of the main circuit
power supply is abnormally high. The servo amplifier
LED indicates ”7”. (ARC Mate 100, ARC Mate 120,
ARC Mate 100i, ARC Mate 120i, S–6, S–12, M–6i,
M–16i, S–420i, S–450, S–500, S–700, M–410i,
M–400i, M–710i) or ‘1’(S–800, S–900 and M–500).
(Action 1) Check the three–phase input voltage at the servo
amplifier. If it is 253 VAC or higher, check the line
voltage. (If the three–phase input voltage is higher than
253 VAC, high acceleration/deceleration can result in
this alarm.)
(Action 2) Check that the load weight is within the rating. If it
is higher than the rating, reduce it to within the rating.
(If the machine load is higher than the rating, the
accumulation of regenerative energy may result in the
HVAL alarm even when the three–phase input
voltage is within the rating.
(Action 3) Replace the servo amplifier.

Servo amplifier

i–Cabinet

84
B–80525E/04 MAINTENANCE 3. TROUBLESHOOTING

Servo amplifier

B–Cabinet
(ARC Mate 100, ARC Mate 120, ARC Mate 100i, ARC Mate 120i, S–6, S–12, M–6i, M–16i, S–420i, S–500, S–700, M–400i, M–710i,
A–520i)

85
3. TROUBLESHOOTING MAINTENANCE B–80525E/04

Servo amplifier 5

Servo amplifier 4

Servo amplifier 3
Servo amplifier 2
Servo amplifier 1
S–800

Servo amplifier 2

Servo amplifier 1

Servo amplifier 4

Servo amplifier 3
M–500

86
B–80525E/04 MAINTENANCE 3. TROUBLESHOOTING

Regenerafive discharge unit


Servo amplifier 4
Servo amplifier 3

Servo amplifier 2
Servo amplifier 1

Servo amplifier 6
Servo amplifier 5

(Additional cabinet interior)

B–Cabinet/S–900

87
3. TROUBLESHOOTING MAINTENANCE B–80525E/04

Servo module 4

Servo module 3

Servo module 2

Servo module 1
Power supply module

Cabinet for M–410i

88
B–80525E/04 MAINTENANCE 3. TROUBLESHOOTING

Servo module 3

Servo module 2

Servo module 1

Power supply module Servo module 4

M–410i (B–Cabinet)

89
3. TROUBLESHOOTING MAINTENANCE B–80525E/04

Servo module 4
Servo module 3

Servo module 2

Servo module 1

Power supply module

S–450

90
B–80525E/04 MAINTENANCE 3. TROUBLESHOOTING

(33) SRVO–045 SVAL1 HCAL alarm (Group : i Axis : j)


SRVO–149 SVAL1 HCAL alarm (Group : i Axis : j)
SRVO–152 SVAL1 IPMAL alarm (Group : i Axis : j)
(Explanation) Abnormally high current flowed in the main circuit of
the servo amplifier. The servo amplifier 7–segment
LED indicates ”–”. At the same time, a red LED
(HC1 to HC6) corresponding to the HCAL alarm
above the 7–segment LED (For ARC Mate 100, ARC
Mate 120, ARC Mate 100i, ARC Mate 120i, S–6,
S–12, M–6i, M–16i, S–420i, S–500, S–700, A–520i)
or Servo amplifier one of ‘1’ ‘8’ ‘9’ ‘6’ of LED (For
S–800, S–900, M–410i, M–500, M–400i, M–710i)
lights.
(Action 1) Disconnect the motor power lines from the servo
amplifier terminals, supply power, and see if the
alarm occurs again. If the alarm occurs, replace the
servo amplifier.
(Action 2) Disconnect the motor power lines from the servo
amplifier terminals, and check the insulation of each
motor power line (U, V, or W) and the GND line. If
there is a short–circuit, the motor, robot
interconnection cable, or intra–robot cable is
defective. Check them and replace them if necessary.
(Action 3) Disconnect the motor power lines from the servo
amplifier terminals, and measure the resistance
between the U and V, V and W, and W and U with a
ohmmeter with a very low resistance range. If the
resistances at these three places are different from
each other, the motor, robot interconnection cable, or
intra–robot cable is defective. Check each item in
detail and replace it if necessary.
(Action 4) Replace the main CPU PC board.

Servo amplifier

i–Cabinet

91
3. TROUBLESHOOTING MAINTENANCE B–80525E/04

Servo amplifier

B–Cabinet

(ARC Mate 100, ARC Mate 120, ARC Mate 100i, ARC Mate 120i, S–6, S–12, M–6i, M–16i, S–420i, S–500, S–700, M–400i,
M–710i, A–520i)

92
B–80525E/04 MAINTENANCE 3. TROUBLESHOOTING

Servo amplifier 5

Servo amplifier 4

Servo amplifier 3
Servo amplifier 2
Servo amplifier 1

S–800

Servo amplifier 2

Servo amplifier 1

Servo amplifier 4

Servo amplifier 3
M–500

93
3. TROUBLESHOOTING MAINTENANCE B–80525E/04

Servo amplifier 4
Servo amplifier 3

Servo amplifier 2
Servo amplifier 1

Servo amplifier 6
Servo amplifier 5

(Additional cabinet interior)

B–Cabinet/S–900

94
B–80525E/04 MAINTENANCE 3. TROUBLESHOOTING

Servo module 4

Servo module 3

Servo module 2

Servo module 1
Power supply module

Cabinet for M–410i

95
3. TROUBLESHOOTING MAINTENANCE B–80525E/04

Servo module 3

Servo module 2

Servo module 1

Power supply module Servo module 4

M–410i (B–Cabinet)

96
B–80525E/04 MAINTENANCE 3. TROUBLESHOOTING

Servo module 4
Servo module 3

Servo module 2

Servo module 1

Power supply module

S–450

97
3. TROUBLESHOOTING MAINTENANCE B–80525E/04

(34) SRVO–046 SVAL2 OVC alarm (Group : i Axis : j)


(Explanation) This alarm is issued to prevent the motor from
thermal damage that may occur when the root meant
square current calculated within the servo system is
out of the allowable range.
(Action 1) Check the operating conditions for the robot. If the
technical data of the robot such as duty cycle or load
weight is higher than the rating, reduce it to within the
rating.
(Action 2) Check each phase voltage of the three–phase input
power (200 VAC for the servo amplifier. If it is 170
VAC or lower, check the line voltage.
(Action 3) Replace the main CPU PC board.
(Action 4) Replace the servo amplifier.
(Action 5) Replace the motor.

Servo amplifier Main CPU

i–Cabinet

98
B–80525E/04 MAINTENANCE 3. TROUBLESHOOTING

Servo amplifier
Main CPU

B–Cabinet

(ARC Mate 100, ARC Mate 120, ARC Mate 100i, ARC Mate 120i, S–6, S–12, M–6i, M–16i, S–420i, S–500, S–700,
M–400i, M–710i, A–520i)

99
3. TROUBLESHOOTING MAINTENANCE B–80525E/04

Servo amplifier 5

Servo amplifier 4

Servo amplifier 3
Servo amplifier 2
Servo amplifier 1
S–800

Servo amplifier 2

Servo amplifier 1

Servo amplifier 4

Servo amplifier 3
M–500

100
B–80525E/04 MAINTENANCE 3. TROUBLESHOOTING

Servo amplifier 4
Servo amplifier 3

Servo amplifier 2
Servo amplifier 1

Servo amplifier 6
Servo amplifier 5

(Additional cabinet interior)

B–Cabinet/S–900

101
3. TROUBLESHOOTING MAINTENANCE B–80525E/04

Servo module 4

Servo module 3

Servo module 2

Servo module 1
Power supply module

Cabinet for M–410i

102
B–80525E/04 MAINTENANCE 3. TROUBLESHOOTING

Servo module 3

Servo module 2

Servo module 1

Power supply module Servo module 4

M–410i (B–Cabinet)

103
3. TROUBLESHOOTING MAINTENANCE B–80525E/04

Servo module 4
Servo module 3

Servo module 2

Servo module 1

Power supply module

S–450

104
B–80525E/04 MAINTENANCE 3. TROUBLESHOOTING

Reference Relationships among the OVC, OVL, and HC alarms


Overview
This section points out the differences among the OVC, OVL, and HC
alarms and describes the purpose of each alarm.
Alarm detection section
Abbreviation Designation Detection section
OVC Overcurrent alarm Servo software
OVL Overload alarm Thermal relay in the motor OHAL2
Thermal relay in the servo amplifier OHAL1
Thermal relay in the separate regenerative dis-
charge unit DCAL
HCAL High current alarm Servo amplifier

Purpose of each alarm


1) HC alarm (high current alarm)
If high current flow in a power transistor momentarily due to
abnormality or noise in the control circuit, the power transistor and
rectifier diodes may be damaged, or the magnet of the motor may be
degaussed. The HC alarm is intended to prevent such failures.
2) OVC and OVL alarms (overcurrent and overload alarms)
The OVC and OVL alarms are intended to prevent overheat that may
lead to the burnout of the motor winding, the breakdown of the servo
amplifier transistor, and the separate regenerative resistor.
The OVL alarm occurs when each built–in thermal relay detects a
temperature higher than the rated value. However, this method is not
necessarily perfect to prevent these failures. For example, if the motor
frequently repeats to start and stop, the thermal time constant of the
motor, which has a large mass, becomes higher than the time constant
of the thermal relay, because these two components are different in
material, structure, and dimension. Therefore, if the motor repeats to
start and stop within a short time as shown in Fig. 1, the temperature rise
in the motor is steeper than that in the thermal relay, thus causing the
motor to burn before the thermal relay detects an abnormally high
temperature.

Temperature

Start Stop Start Stop Start

Thermal time constant


Temperature at of the motor is high.
which the winding
starts to burn
Thermal time constant
of the thermal relay is
low.

Time

Fig.1 Relationship between the temperatures of the motor and thermal relay on start/stop cycles

105
3. TROUBLESHOOTING MAINTENANCE B–80525E/04

To prevent the above defects, software is used to monitor the current


in the motor constantly in order to estimate the temperature of the
motor. The OVC alarm is issued based on this estimated temperature.
This method estimates the motor temperature with substantial
accuracy, so it can prevent the failures described above.
To sum up, a double protection method is used; the OVC alarm is used
for protection from a short–time overcurrent, and the OVL alarm is
used for protection from long–term overload. The relationship
between the OVC and OVL alarms is shown in Fig 2.

Current
Protection area for
the motor and
servo amplifier
Protection by the OVL
Limit current

Protection by
the OVC

Rated continuous current

Time

Fig.2 Relationship between the OVC and OVL alarms

NOTE
The relationship shown in Fig. 2 is taken into consideration
for the OVC alarm. The motor may not be hot even if the
OVC alarm has occurred. In this case, do not change the
parameters to relax protection.

106
B–80525E/04 MAINTENANCE 3. TROUBLESHOOTING

(35) SRVO–047 SVAL1 LVAL alarm (Group : i Axis : j)


SRVO–144 SVAL1 LVAL alarm (Group : i Axis : j)
(Explanation) When the external magnetic contactor for the servo
amplifier is turned on, the DC voltage (DC link
voltage) of the main power supply is abnormally low,
or the control power supply voltage (+5 V, etc.) is
abnormally low.
(Action 1) If the servo amplifier LED indicates ”6” (For ARC
Mate 100, ARC Mate 120, ARC Mate 100i, ARC
Mate 120i, S–6, S–12, M–6i, M–16i, S–420i, S–500,
S–700, M–400i, M–710i, A–520i) or indicates ”2”
(For S–450, S–800, S–900, M–410i, M–500) :
(This alarm occurs if the control power supply
voltage (+5 V etc.) is abnormally low.)
–Check the phase voltage of the three–phase input
power (200 VAC) to the servo amplifier. If it is 170
VAC or lower, check the line voltage.
–Replace the servo amplifier.
(Action 2) If the servo amplifier LED indicates ”3” (For S–900)
(This alarm occurs when the DC voltage (DC link
voltage) of the main circuit power supply is
abnormally low.)
–Check the phase voltage of the three–phase input
power (200 VAC) to the servo amplifier. If it is 170
VAC or lower, check the line voltage.
–Replace the servo amplifier.
(Action 3) If the servo amplifier LED indicates ”7” (For S–900)
–This alarm indicates that a deposit has been detected
in the magnetic contactor.
See (30)SRVO–042 MCAL alarm.

Servo amplifier

i–Cabinet

107
3. TROUBLESHOOTING MAINTENANCE B–80525E/04

Servo amplifier

B–Cabinet

(ARC Mate 100, ARC Mate 120, ARC Mate 100i, ARC Mate 120i, S–6, S–12, M–6i, M–16i, S–420i, S–500, S–700,
M–400i, M–710i, A–520i)

108
B–80525E/04 MAINTENANCE 3. TROUBLESHOOTING

Servo amplifier 5

Servo amplifier 4

Servo amplifier 3
Servo amplifier 2
Servo amplifier 1

S–800

Servo amplifier 2

Servo amplifier 1

Servo amplifier 4

Servo amplifier 3
M–500

109
3. TROUBLESHOOTING MAINTENANCE B–80525E/04

Servo amplifier 4
Servo amplifier 3

Servo amplifier 2
Servo amplifier 1

Servo amplifier 6
Servo amplifier 5

(Additional cabinet interior)

B–Cabinet/S–900

110
B–80525E/04 MAINTENANCE 3. TROUBLESHOOTING

Servo module 4

Servo module 3

Servo module 2

Servo module 1
Power supply module

Cabinet for M–410i

111
3. TROUBLESHOOTING MAINTENANCE B–80525E/04

Servo module 3

Servo module 2

Servo module 1

Power supply module Servo module 4

M–410i (B–Cabinet)

112
B–80525E/04 MAINTENANCE 3. TROUBLESHOOTING

Servo module 4
Servo module 3

Servo module 2

Servo module 1

Power supply module

S–450

113
3. TROUBLESHOOTING MAINTENANCE B–80525E/04

(36) SRVO–049 SVAL1 OHAL1 alarm (Group : i Axis : j)


SRVO–141 SVAL1 OHAL1 alarm (Group : i Axis : j)
(Explanation) The thermostat in the servo amplifier or transformer
worked. Alternatively, fuse F1 or F2 in the servo
amplifier has blown (ARC Mate 100, ARC Mate 120,
ARC Mate 100i, ARC Mate 120i, S–6, S–12, M–6i,
M–16i, S–420i, S–450, S–500, S–700, M–400i,
M–710i and A–520i). The servo amplifier LED
indicates ”3”.(For ARC Mate 100, ARC Mate 120,
ARC Mate 100i, ARC Mate 120i, S–6, S–12, M–6i,
M–16i, S–420i, S–450, S–500, S–700, M–410i,
M–400i, M–710i, A–520i) or indicates ”6” (For
S–900) :
(Action 1) Check the operating conditions for the robot. If the
technical data of the robot such as duty cycle or load
weight is higher than the rating, reduce it to within the
rating.
(Action 2) Clean fans, louver (i–cabinet) or filter (B–cabinet).
(Action 3) When fuses F1, F2, and F3 of the line filter unit (or
transformer) have blown (for the B cabinet), replace
them. (When they blow, alarms OH AL1, and MCAL
are displayed on the teach pendant when the control
unit is turned on.)
(Action 4) Investigate the cable connected to the threephase
input of the servo anplifier. If an error is found,
eliminate the causa, then replace fuses F1 and F2 of
the servo amplifier.
(Action 5) Replace the servo amplifier.
(Action 6) Replace the trans former.

Servo amplifier

i–Cabinet

114
B–80525E/04 MAINTENANCE 3. TROUBLESHOOTING

Servo amplifier

B–Cabinet

(ARC Mate 100, ARC Mate 120, ARC Mate 100i, ARC Mate 120i, S–6, S–12, M–6i, M–16i, S–420i, S–500, S–700,
M–400i, M–710i, A–520i)

115
3. TROUBLESHOOTING MAINTENANCE B–80525E/04

Servo amplifier 4
Servo amplifier 3

Servo amplifier 2
Servo amplifier 1

Servo amplifier 6
Servo amplifier 5

(Additional cabinet interior)

B–Cabinet/S–900

116
B–80525E/04 MAINTENANCE 3. TROUBLESHOOTING

Servo module 4

Servo module 3

Servo module 2

Servo module 1
Power supply module

Cabinet for M–410i

117
3. TROUBLESHOOTING MAINTENANCE B–80525E/04

Servo module 3

Servo module 2

Servo module 1

Power supply module Servo module 4

M–410i (B–Cabinet)

118
B–80525E/04 MAINTENANCE 3. TROUBLESHOOTING

Servo module 4
Servo module 3

Servo module 2

Servo module 1

Power supply module

S–450

119
3. TROUBLESHOOTING MAINTENANCE B–80525E/04

(37) SRVO–050 SVAL1 CLALM alarm (Group : i Axis : j)


(Explanation) The disturbance torque estimated by the servo software
is abnormally high. (A collision has been detected.)
(Action 1) Check that the robot has collided with anything. If it
has, reset the robot and jog–feed it to recover from the
collision.
(Action 2) Check that the load weight is within the rating. If it
is higher than the rating, reduce it to within the rating.
(If the robot is used out of its usable range, the
estimated disturbance torque becomes abnormally
high, possibly resulting in this alarm being detected.)
(Action 3) Check the phase voltage of the three–phase input
power (200 VAC) to the servo amplifier. If it is 170
VAC or lower, check the line voltage.
(Action 4) Check motor power cables, replace if necessary.
(Action 5) Replace the servo amplifier.

Servo amplifier

i–Cabinet

120
B–80525E/04 MAINTENANCE 3. TROUBLESHOOTING

Servo amplifier

B–Cabinet

(ARC Mate 100, ARC Mate 120, ARC Mate 100i, ARC Mate 120i, S–6, S–12, M–6i, M–16i, S–420i, S–500, S–700,
M–400i, M–710i, A–520i)

121
3. TROUBLESHOOTING MAINTENANCE B–80525E/04

Servo amplifier 5

Servo amplifier 4

Servo amplifier 3
Servo amplifier 2
Servo amplifier 1
S–800

Servo amplifier 2

Servo amplifier 1

Servo amplifier 4
M–500 Servo amplifier 3

122
B–80525E/04 MAINTENANCE 3. TROUBLESHOOTING

Servo amplifier 4
Servo amplifier 3

Servo amplifier 2
Servo amplifier 1

Servo amplifier 6
Servo amplifier 5

(Additional cabinet interior)

B–Cabinet/S–900

123
3. TROUBLESHOOTING MAINTENANCE B–80525E/04

Servo module 4
Servo module 3
Servo module 2
Servo module 1
Power supply module

Cabinet for M–410i

124
B–80525E/04 MAINTENANCE 3. TROUBLESHOOTING

Servo module 3

Servo module 2

Servo module 1

Power supply module Servo module 4

M–410i (B–Cabinet)

125
3. TROUBLESHOOTING MAINTENANCE B–80525E/04

Servo module 4
Servo module 3

Servo module 2

Servo module 1

Power supply module

S–450

(38) SRVO–051 SVAL2 CUER alarm (Group : i Axis : j)


(Explanation) The offset of the current feedback value is abnormally
high.
(Action 1) Replace the main CPU PC board.
(Action 2) Replace the servo amplifier.

126
B–80525E/04 MAINTENANCE 3. TROUBLESHOOTING

Servo amplifier
Main CPU

i–Cabinet

Servo amplifier Main CPU

B–Cabinet

(ARC Mate 100, ARC Mate 120, ARC Mate 100i, ARC Mate 120i, S–6, S–12, M–6i, M–16i, S–420i, S–500, S–700,
M–400i, M–710i, A–520i)

127
3. TROUBLESHOOTING MAINTENANCE B–80525E/04

Servo amplifier 5

Servo amplifier 4
Main CPU

Servo amplifier 3
Servo amplifier 2
Servo amplifier 1

S–800

Servo amplifier 2

Servo amplifier 1

Main CPU

Servo amplifier 4

Servo amplifier 3
M–500

128
B–80525E/04 MAINTENANCE 3. TROUBLESHOOTING

Servo amplifier 4
Servo amplifier 3

Main CPU printed board

Servo amplifier 2
Servo amplifier 1

Servo amplifier 6
Servo amplifier 5

(Additional cabinet interior)

B–Cabinet/S–900

129
3. TROUBLESHOOTING MAINTENANCE B–80525E/04

Servo module 4
Servo module 3
Servo module 2
Servo module 1
Power supply module

Main CPU printed board

Cabinet for M–410i

130
B–80525E/04 MAINTENANCE 3. TROUBLESHOOTING

Servo module 3
Main CPU printed board
Servo module 2

Servo module 1

Power supply module Servo module 4

M–410i (B–Cabinet)

131
3. TROUBLESHOOTING MAINTENANCE B–80525E/04

Servo module 4
Servo module 3
Main CPU printed board

Servo module 2

Servo module 1

Power supply module

S–450

(39) SRVO–053 ER_WARN Disturbance Excess


(Explanation) The estimated external disturbance exceed the
maximum allowable value.
This error may occur if acute
acceleration/deceleration is applied while
acceleration override is specified, or if an excessive
load is applied.
If the high–sensitivity collision detection option or
smart and easy package option is being used, this
error indicates that the load setting may be invalid.
(Action) Check that an excessive load is not being applied, and
that the load setting is correct.
If a lower detection sensitivity load is acceptable
when acceleration override is being used, increase the
setting for the maximum allowable value on the
status/disturbance display.

132
B–80525E/04 MAINTENANCE 3. TROUBLESHOOTING

(40) SRVO–054 DSM Memory Error


(Explanation) An access to the servo module memory fails.
(Action) Replace the servo module.
(41) SRVO–062 SVAL2 BZAL alarm (Group : i Axis : j)
(Explanation) This alarm occurs if no battery for pulse coder
absolute-position backup is connected.
A probable cause is a broken battery cable in the robot.
(Action) Remove the cause of the alarm, and set the system
variable $MCR.$SPC_RESET to TRUE, then supply
power again. After this, adjustment is required.
(42) SRVO–064 SVAL2 PHAL alarm (Group : i Axis : j)
(Explanation) This alarm occurs if the phase of the pulses generated
in the pulse coder is abnormal.
(Action) Replace the pulse coder.
Note) The DTERR, CRCERR, or STBERR alarm
may trigger the PHAL alarm. In this case, there is no
actual cause for the PHAL alarm.
(43) SRVO–065 WARN BLAL alarm (Group : i Axis : j)
(Explanation) The battery voltage for the pulse coder is lower than
the rating.
(Action) Replace the battery.
(If this alarm occurs, turn on the AC power and
replace the battery as soon as possible. A delay in
battery replacement may result in the BZAL alarm
being detected. In this case, the position data will be
lost. Once the position data is lost, mastering will
become necessary.
(44) SRVO–067 SVAL2 OHAL2 alarm (Group : i Axis : j)
(Explanation) The temperature inside the pulse coder or motor is
abnormally high, and the built–in thermostat has
operated.
(Action 1) Check the operating conditions for the robot. If the
technical data of the robot such as duty cycle or load
weight is higher than the rating, reduce it to within the
rating.
(Action 2) When power is supplied to the motor after it has
become sufficiently cool, if the alarm still occurs,
replace the motor.
(45) SRVO–068 SVAL2 DTERR alarm (Group : i Axis : j)
(Explanation) The serial pulse coder does not return serial data in
response to a request signal.
–See actions on SRVO–070
(46) SRVO–069 SVAL2 CRCERR alarm (Group : i Axis : j)
(Explanation) The serial data has changed during communication.
–See actions on SRVO–070

133
3. TROUBLESHOOTING MAINTENANCE B–80525E/04

(47) SRVO–070 SVAL2 STBERR alarm (Group : i Axis : j)


(Explanation) The start and stop bits of the serial data are abnormal.
(Action 1) Check that the shielding of the robot interconnection
cable (for the pulse coder) and the peripheral equipment
cable is connected securely to the grounding plate.
(Action 2) Check that each unit is grounded securely.
(Action 3) Replace the emergency stop control PC board.
(Action 4) Replace the cable between the emergency stop
control PC board and main CPU.
(Action 5) Replace the main CPU PC board.
(Action 6) Replace the pulse coder.
(Action 7) Replace the robot interconnection cable (for the pulse
coder).

Servo amplifier Main CPU

Printed circuit board for


emergency stop control

134
B–80525E/04 MAINTENANCE 3. TROUBLESHOOTING

Emergency stop control Main CPU


printed board

Servo amplifier

B–Cabinet
(ARC Mate 100, ARC Mate 120, ARC Mate 100i, ARC Mate 120i, S–6, S–12, M–6i, M–16i, S–420i, S–500, S–700,
M–400i, M–710i, A–520i)

135
3. TROUBLESHOOTING MAINTENANCE B–80525E/04

Servo amplifier 5

Servo amplifier 4

Servo amplifier 3
Servo amplifier 2
Servo amplifier 1
S–800

Servo amplifier 2

Servo amplifier 1

Servo amplifier 4

Servo amplifier 3
M–500

136
B–80525E/04 MAINTENANCE 3. TROUBLESHOOTING

Servo amplifier 4
Servo amplifier 3

Main CPU printed board

Emergency stop control


printed board

Servo amplifier 2
Servo amplifier 1

Servo amplifier 6
Servo amplifier 5

(Additional cabinet interior)

B–Cabinet/S–900

137
3. TROUBLESHOOTING MAINTENANCE B–80525E/04

Servo module 4
Servo module 3
Servo module 2
Servo module 1
Power supply module

Main CPU printed board


Emergency stop control printed board

Cabinet for M–410i

138
B–80525E/04 MAINTENANCE 3. TROUBLESHOOTING

Servo module 3
Emergency control printed board

Servo module 2 Main CPU printed board

Servo module 1

Power supply module Servo module 4

M–410i (B–Cabinet)

139
3. TROUBLESHOOTING MAINTENANCE B–80525E/04

Servo module 4
Servo module 3 Emergency stop control printed board

Servo module 2
Main CPU printed board

Servo module 1

Power supply module

S–450

(48) SRVO–071 SVAL2 SPHAL alarm (Group : i Axis : j)


(Explanation) The feedback speed is abnormally high (3750 rpm or
higher ).
(Action 1) If this alarm occurs together with the PHAL alarm
(No. 064), this alarm does not correspond to the major
cause of the failure.
(Action 2) If the load weight of the robot is higher than the rating,
reduce it to within the working range. (The torque
command may have encountered saturation in an area
where the maximum speed is higher than 3200 rpm.)
(Action 3) Replace the pulse coder.
(49) SRVO–072 SVAL2 PMAL alarm (Group : i Axis : j)
(Explanation) It is likely that the pulse coder is abnormal.
(Action) Replace the pulse coder and remaster.
(50) SRVO–073 SVAL2 CMAL alarm (Group : i Axis : j)
(Explanation) It is likely that the pulse coder is abnormal or the pulse
coder has malfunctioned due to noise.

140
B–80525E/04 MAINTENANCE 3. TROUBLESHOOTING

(Action) Make a simplified adjustment and enhance the


shielding.
(51) SRVO–074 SVAL2 LDAL alarm (Group : i Axis : j)
(Explanation) The LED in the pulse coder is broken.
(Action) Replace the pulse coder, and make the remaster.
(52) SRVO–075 WARN Pulse not established (Group : i Axis : j)
(Explanation) The absolute position of the pulse coder cannot be
established.
(Action) Reset the alarm, and jog–feed the robot along the axis
on which the alarm has occurred until the same alarm
will not occur again. (Jog one motor revolution)
(53) SRVO–081 WARN EROFL alarm (Track enc : i)
(Explanation) The pulse counter for line tracking has overflowed.
(Action) Contact the FANUC service center.
(54) SRVO–084 WARN BZAL alarm (Track enc : i)
(Explanation) This alarm occurs if the backup battery for the absolute
position of the pulse coder has not been connected. See
the description about the BZAL alarm (SRVO–062).
(55) SRVO–086 WARN PHAL alarm (Track enc : i)
(Explanation) This alarm occurs if the phase of pulses generated in
the pulse coder is abnormal. See the description
about the PHAL alarm (SRVO–064).
(56) SRVO–087 WARN BLAL alarm (Track enc : i)
(Explanation) This alarm occurs if the voltage of the backup battery
for the absolute position of the pulse coder is low. See
the description about the BLAL alarm (SRVO–065).
(57) SRVO–089 WARN OHAL2 alarm (Track enc : i)
(Explanation) The motor has overheated. See the description about
the OHAL2 alarm (SRVO–067).
(58) SRVO–090 WARN DTERR alarm (Track enc : i)
(Explanation) Communication between the pulse coder and main
CPU PC board is abnormal. See the description about
the DTERR alarm (SRVO–068).
(59) SRVO–091 WARN CRCERR alarm (Track enc : i)
(Explanation) Communication between the pulse coder and main
CPU PC board is abnormal. See the description about
the CRCERR alarm (SRVO–069).
(60) SRVO–092 WARN STBERR alarm (Track enc : i)
(Explanation) Communication between the pulse coder and main
CPU PC board is abnormal. See the description about
the STBERR alarm (SRVO–070).
(61) SRVO–093 WARN SPMAL alarm (Track enc : i)
(Explanation) This alarm occurs if the current position data from the
pulse coder is higher than the previous position data.
See the description about the SPHAL alarm
(SRVO–071).
(62) SRVO–094 WARN PMAL alarm (Track enc : i)
(Explanation) It is likely that the pulse coder is abnormal. See the
description about the PMAL alarm (SRVO–072).
(63) SRVO–095 WARN CMAL alarm (Track enc : i)

141
3. TROUBLESHOOTING MAINTENANCE B–80525E/04

(Explanation) It is likely that the pulse coder is abnormal or the pulse


coder has malfunctioned due to noise. See the
description about the CMAL alarm (SRVO–073).
(64) SRVO–096 WARN LDAL alarm (Track enc : i)
(Explanation) The LED in the pulse coder is broken. See the
description about the LDAL alarm (SRVO–074).
(65) SRVO–097 WARN Palse not established (enc : i)
(Explanation) The absolute position of the pulse coder cannot be
established. See the description about (SRVO–075).
Pulse not established.
(66) SRVO–145 SVAL1 LVAL alarm (Group : i Axis : j)
SRVO–146 SVAL1 LVAL alarm (Group : i Axis : j)
SRVO–147 SVAL1 LVAL alarm (Group : i Axis : j)
(Explanation) When the external magnetic contactor for the servo
amplifier is turned on, the DC current (DC link
voltage) of the main power supply is abnormally low.
(Action) If the servo amplifier LED indicates ”4” or ”5” (For
ARC Mate100, ARC Mate120, ARC Mate 100i,
ARC Mate 120i, S–6, S–12, M–6i, M–16i, S–420i,
S–450, S–500, S–700, M–410i, M–400i, M–710i,
A–520i), ”2” or ”3” (For M–500) (This alarm occurs
when the DC current (DC link voltage) of the main
circuit power supply is abnormally low.)
–Check the phase voltage of the three–phase input
power (200 VAC) to the servo amplifier. If it is 170
VAC or lower, check the line voltage.
–Replace the servo amplifier.

Servo amplifier

i–Cabinet

142
B–80525E/04 MAINTENANCE 3. TROUBLESHOOTING

Servo amplifier

B–Cabinet
(ARC Mate 100, ARC Mate 120, ARC Mate 100i, ARC Mate 120i, S–6, S–12, M–6i, M–16i, S–420i, S–500, S–700,
M–400i, M–710i, A–520i)

143
3. TROUBLESHOOTING MAINTENANCE B–80525E/04

(67) SRVO–150 SVAL1 FSAL alarm (Group : i Axis : j)


(Explanation) The cooling fan of power supply module stopped
rotating. Number ‘2’ is displayed on the LED display.
(Action) Replace the power supply module.

Servo module 4
Servo module 3
Servo module 2
Servo module 1
Power supply module

Cabinet for M–410i

144
B–80525E/04 MAINTENANCE 3. TROUBLESHOOTING

Servo module 3

Servo module 2

Servo module 1

Power supply module Servo module 4

M–410i (B–Cabinet)

145
3. TROUBLESHOOTING MAINTENANCE B–80525E/04

Servo module 4
Servo module 3

Servo module 2

Servo module 1

Power supply module

S–450

146
B–80525E/04 MAINTENANCE 3. TROUBLESHOOTING

(68) SRVO–152 SVAL1 IPMAL alarm (Group : i Axis : j)


(Explanation) An error was detected in the IPM of a servo amplifier.
Servo amplifier LED indicates one of ’8.’, ’9.’, ’b.’.
(Action) Replace the servo amplifier.

Servo module 4

Servo module 3

Servo module 2

Servo module 1

M–410i

147
3. TROUBLESHOOTING MAINTENANCE B–80525E/04

Servo amplifier 5

Servo amplifier 4

Servo amplifier 3
Servo amplifier 2
Servo amplifier 1

S–800

Servo amplifier 2

Servo amplifier 1

Servo amplifier 4

Servo amplifier 3
M–500

148
B–80525E/04 MAINTENANCE 3. TROUBLESHOOTING

(69) SRVO–153 SVAL1 CHGAL alarm (Group : i Axis : j)


(Explanation) The main circuit of the power supply module could
not be charged within the specified time. Number ‘5’
is displayed on the LED display.
(Action) Replace the power supply module.
(70) SRVO–164, –166, –167
(Explanation) A digital servo module (DSM) which does not match
the currently loaded servo parameters is mounted.
(Action) Replace the axis module, or initialize the robot by
means of control start.
Initializing the robot will load the appropriate servo
parameters for the DSM. Note, however, that the new
parameters may cause the robot’s performance or
paths to differ from those obtained with the previous
parameters.
(71) SRVO–165 Panel (SVON Abnormal) E–stop
(Explanation) An invalid +24V is connected to SVON or EXGEX
in the operator’s panel.
(Action) Turn off the power, then correct the wiring of SVON
or EXGEM in the operator’s panel.

Servo module 4
Servo module 3
Servo module 2
Servo module 1
Power supply module

Cabinet for M–410i

149
3. TROUBLESHOOTING MAINTENANCE B–80525E/04

Servo module 3

Servo module 2

Servo module 1

Power supply module Servo module 4

M–410i (B–Cabinet)

150
B–80525E/04 MAINTENANCE 3. TROUBLESHOOTING

Servo module 4
Servo module 3

Servo module 2

Servo module 1

Power supply module

S–450

151
3. TROUBLESHOOTING MAINTENANCE B–80525E/04

Fused–based troubleshooting
The alarms issued and symptoms observed when the fuses mounted on
printed circuit boards and units have blown are described below together
with corrective actions required.
(1) When the fuses of the power supply unit have blown
F1: Fuse for AC input
F3: Fuse for +24 V
F4: Fuse for +24 E
Name Symptom observed when fuse has blown Action
F1 The LED (PIL: Green) of the power supply unit does not 1 Check the units (fans) and cables connected to the
light, and the power cannot be turned on. CP2 and CP3 connectors of the power supply unit to
see if there is any short circuit.
2 Replace the power supply unit.

F3 The power, when turned on, is immediately turned off. 1 Check the printed circuit boards, units, and cables
At this time, the LED (ALM: Red) lights. using +24 V according to the power supply system
diagram. Replace a faulty printed circuit board, unit,
or cable if any. The LED of ALM is turned off by
pressing the OFF button once.
2 Replace the power supply unit.

F4 An alarm such as for overtravel, hand breakage, IMSTP 1 Check the printed circuit boards, units, and cables
input (depending on the peripheral equipment interface using +24 E according to the power supply system
state) is output on the teach pendant. diagram. Replace a faulty printed circuit board, unit,
or cable if any.
2 Replace the power supply unit.

152
B–80525E/04 MAINTENANCE 3. TROUBLESHOOTING

F1
7.5A
Fuse for
AC Input

Power supply unit

LED : PIL

LED : ALM

F3 5AS
(Slow blow)
Fuse for +24V

F4 5A
Fuse for +24E

153
3. TROUBLESHOOTING MAINTENANCE B–80525E/04

(2) Servo amplifier fuse (ARC Mate 100, ARC Mate 120, ARC Mate
100i, ARC Mate 120i, S–6, S–12, M–6i, M–16i, S–420i, S–500,
S–700, M–400i, M–710i, A–520i)
FUSE1: For transformer and regenerative resistance thermostat
detection
F1, F2 :For protection of servo amplifier internal circuit
Name Symptom observed when fuse has blown Action
FUSE1 The OHAL1 alarm is output on the teach pendant, and 1 Check if the cables connected to the CN7B, CN8A,
the seven–segment LED on the servo amplifier indi- and CN8B connectors of the servo amplifier are con-
cates 3. nected to the ground.
2 Replace the regenerative resistance.
3 Replace the transformer.
4 Replace the servo amplifier.

F1 The OHAL1 alarm is output on the teach pendant, and 1 Check if the cables connected to three phase input
F2 the seven–segment LED on the servo amplifier indicate of servo amplifier is defective.
3. 2 Replace the servo amplifier.

FUSE 1

Servo amplifier

FUSE
F1, F2
i–Cabinet

154
B–80525E/04 MAINTENANCE 3. TROUBLESHOOTING

FUSE 1

Servo amplifier

FUSE
F1, F2

B–Cabinet

155
3. TROUBLESHOOTING MAINTENANCE B–80525E/04

FUSE1

FUSE FUSE
F1 F2

156
B–80525E/04 MAINTENANCE 3. TROUBLESHOOTING

(3) Servo amplifier fuses (S–450, S–800, S–900, M–410i, M–500)


F1: Fuse for power supply module control (S–450, M–410i)
F2: Fuse for servo module control (S–450, M–410i)
FUSE: Fuse for servo amplifier control (S–900, S–800, M–500)
Name Symptom observed when fuse has blown Action
F1 The seven–segment LED does not light. 1 Replace the power supply module, servo module, or
F2 servo amplifier.
FUSE1

Servo module 4
Servo module 3
Servo module 2
Servo module 1
Power supply module

Cabinet for M–410i

157
3. TROUBLESHOOTING MAINTENANCE B–80525E/04

Servo amplifier 4
Servo amplifier 3

Servo amplifier 2
Servo amplifier 1

Servo amplifier 6
Servo amplifier 5

(Additional cabinet interior)

S–900

158
B–80525E/04 MAINTENANCE 3. TROUBLESHOOTING

Servo amplifier 5

Servo amplifier 4

Servo amplifier 3
Servo amplifier 2
Servo amplifier 1
S–800

Servo amplifier 2

Servo amplifier 1

Servo amplifier 4
M–500 Servo amplifier 3

159
3. TROUBLESHOOTING MAINTENANCE B–80525E/04

Servo module 3

Servo module 2

Servo module 1

Power supply module Servo module 4

M–410i (B–Cabinet)

160
B–80525E/04 MAINTENANCE 3. TROUBLESHOOTING

Servo module 4
Servo module 3

Servo module 2

Servo module 1

Power supply module

S–450

161
3. TROUBLESHOOTING MAINTENANCE B–80525E/04

LED

Fuse
F2

Fuse

Note See 7.12.1


for the location of fuse.

Power supply module Servo module Servo amplifier

162
B–80525E/04 MAINTENANCE 3. TROUBLESHOOTING

(4) Fuses on the emergency stop control printed circuit board (B–cabinet)
F1: Fuse for brake control
F2: Fuse for +24 E
Name Symptom observed when fuse has blown Action
F1 The LED (red) on the emergency stop control printed 1 Check if the robot connection cable (RM1) and
circuit board lights.(*1) cables internal to the mechanical section are con-
nected to the ground or are short–circuited.
2 Replace the emergency stop control printed circuit
board.

F2 The LED (red) on the emergency stop control printed 1 Check if the robot connection cable (RP1) and
circuit board lights, and the overtravel alarm is output on cables internal to the mechanical section are con-
the teach pendant. nected to the ground or are short–circuited.
2 Replace the emergency stop control printed circuit
board.

*1 If no additional axis is used with the ARC mate 100, ARC Mate 120, ARC Mate 100i, ARC Mate 120i, S–6, S–12, M–6i, M–16i, S–420i,
S–500, S–700, M–400i, M–710i or A–520i the brake control circuit on the emergency stop control printed circuit board is not used: the F1
fuse does not blow.

Emergency stop control


printed board

B–Cabinet
(ARC Mate 100, ARC Mate 120, ARC Mate 100i, ARC Mate 120i, S–6, S–12, M–6i, M–16i, S–420i, S–500, S–700,
M–400i, M–710i, A–520i)

163
3. TROUBLESHOOTING MAINTENANCE B–80525E/04

Emergency stop control


printed board

S–800

Emergency stop control


printed board

M–500

164
B–80525E/04 MAINTENANCE 3. TROUBLESHOOTING

Emergency stop control


printed board

Cabinet for M–410i

165
3. TROUBLESHOOTING MAINTENANCE B–80525E/04

Servo module 3

Servo module 2

Servo module 1

Power supply module Servo module 4

M–410i (B–Cabinet)

166
B–80525E/04 MAINTENANCE 3. TROUBLESHOOTING

Servo module 4
Servo module 3

Servo module 2

Servo module 1

Power supply module

S–450

167
3. TROUBLESHOOTING MAINTENANCE B–80525E/04

FUSE
F2

ALARM LED

100 VAC for


FUSE
BRAKE
F1

Emergercy stop control printed board

168
B–80525E/04 MAINTENANCE 3. TROUBLESHOOTING

(5) Fuse on the process I/O printed circuit board


FUSE1: Fuse for +24 E
Name Symptom observed when fuse has blown Action
FUSE The LED (ALM–2 or FALM) on the process I/O printed 1 Check if the cables and peripheral equipment con-
circuit board lights, and an alarm such as IMSTP input nected to the process I/O printed circuit board are
is output on the teach pendant. (The display data de- normal.
pends on state of peripheral equipment connection.) 2 Replace the process I/O printed circuit board.

LED : ALM–2

CA
DA

CB

169
3. TROUBLESHOOTING MAINTENANCE B–80525E/04

Process I/O EA LED : FALM


FUSE1

(6) Fuse on the conversion printed circuit board (S–900)


FUSE: Fuse for brake control
Name Symptom observed when fuse has blown Action
FUSE The LED (red) on the emergency stop control printed 1 Check if the robot connection cable (RM1) and
circuit board lights. cables internal to the mechanical section are con-
nected to the ground or are short–circuited.
2 Replace the emergency stop control printed circuit
board.

Conversion PCB

170
B–80525E/04 MAINTENANCE 3. TROUBLESHOOTING

FUSE
Conversion printed board

(7) Transformer/line filter fuses


F1, F2, F3: Fuses for servo three–phase input voltage
F4, F5: Fuses for 100 VAC

171
3. TROUBLESHOOTING MAINTENANCE B–80525E/04

Name Symptom observed when fuse has blown Action


F1 or The LVAL (DCLK) alarm is output on the teach pendant, 1 Check if the cables and units connected to the three–
F3 and the seven–segment LED on the servo amplifier in- phase input voltage source are normal.
dicates 4.

F2 only The DCAL alarm is output on the teach pendant, and 1 Check if the cables and units connected to the three–
the seven–segment LED on the servo amplifier indi- phase input voltage source are normal.
cates 8.

F1, F2 The LVAL (DCLK) alarm is output on the teach pendant, 1 Check if the cables and units connected to the three–
F1, F3 and the seven–segment LED on the servo amplifier in- phase input voltage source are normal.
F2, F3 dicates 4.
F1F3

F4 or The LED (green) on the emergency stop control printed 1 Check if the transformer/line filter, emergency stop
F5 circuit board does not light, and the motor brake cannot control printed circuit board, and connection cables
be released.(*1) are normal.

NOTE
If no additional axis is used with models such as ARC Mate 100, ARC Mate 120, ARC Mate 100i,
ARC Mate 120i, S–6, S–12, M–6i, M–16i, S–420i, S–500, S–700, M–400i, M–710i or A–520i
which do not use a sixth–axis servo amplifier, the brake control circuit on the emergency stop
control printed circuit board is not used. This means that even if the F4 or F5 fuse blows, the
robot operates normally.

172
B–80525E/04 MAINTENANCE 3. TROUBLESHOOTING

(B cabinet for ARC Mate 100, ARC Mate 120, ARC Mate 100i, ARC Mate 120i, S–6, S–12, M–6i, M–16i, S–420i, S–500, S–700,
S–800, S–900, M–400i, M–710i, A–520i)
Fuses Fuses Fuses

Fuses

Transformer Line filter

(B cabinet for S–450, M–410i)

Fuses Fuses Fuses Fuses

Transformer AC reactor

NOTE
Check that the PIL lamp on the power unit is not lit. Then,
replace the blown fuse.

173
3. TROUBLESHOOTING MAINTENANCE B–80525E/04

TROUBLESHOOTING The printed circuit boards and servo amplifier are provided with alarm
BASED ON LED INDICATIONS LEDs and status LEDs. The LED statuses and corresponding
troubleshooting procedures are described below.

Main CPU printed circuit board

Power supply unit

Process I/O printed circuit


board CA/CB/DA

Servo amplifier

i–Cabinet

Servo amplifier

Main CPU printed board

Power supply unit

Rocess I/O printed


board CA/CB/DA

B–Cabinet

174
B–80525E/04 MAINTENANCE 3. TROUBLESHOOTING

Servo module 3 Emergency stop control printed board

Servo module 2 Main CPU printed board

Servo module 1
Power supply unit
Process I/O printed board
CA/CB/DA

Power supply module

Servo module 4

M–410i ( B–Cabinet)

Servo module 4
Servo module 3
Servo module 2
Servo module 1
Power supply module

Emergency stop control


printed board

Rocess I/O printed board CA/CB/DA


Power supply unit
Main CPU printed board

Cabinet for M–410i

175
3. TROUBLESHOOTING MAINTENANCE B–80525E/04

Servo amplifier 4
Servo amplifier 3
Additional cabinet

Main CPU printed board


Power supply unit
Conversion printed board
Process I/O printed board
CA/CB/DA

Servo amplifier 2
Servo amplifier 1

Servo amplifier 6
Servo amplifier 5

(Additional cabinet interior)

B–Cabinet/S–900

176
B–80525E/04 MAINTENANCE 3. TROUBLESHOOTING

Emergency stop control printed board

Servo module 4
Main CPU printed board
Servo module 3

Power supply unit


Servo module 2

Servo module 1

Process I/O printed


board CA/CB/DA

Power supply module

S–450

Process I/O printed board EA

Operator’s box

177
3. TROUBLESHOOTING MAINTENANCE B–80525E/04

(1) TROUBLESHOOTING USING THE LEDS ON THE MAIN CPU


PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARD
To troubleshoot an alarm that arises before the teach pendant is ready
to display, check the status LEDs (green) on the main CPU PC board
at power–on. If the robot’s status is normal, all the status LEDs will
be lit.
After power–on, the LEDs light as described in steps 1 to 11, in the
order described. If an alarm is detected, the step in which the alarm
occurred can be determined from which LEDs are lit.
Step LED Action to be taken
1: After power–on, all * [Action1]Replace the flash ROM module.
LEDs are lit. * [Action2]Replace the SRAM module.
[Action3]Replace the corresponding axis module.
[Action4]Replace the main CPU PC board.

2: Each printed circuit * [Action]Replace the main CPU PC board.


board is initialized.

3: The timer is initialized. * [Action]Replace the main CPU PC board.

4: The communication * [Action1]Replace the main CPU PC board.


port is initialized.

5: The software is initial- * [Action1]Replace the main CPU PC board.


ized. * [Action2]Replace the flash ROM module.

* If the main CPU PC board or SRAM module is replaced, the contents of memory (parameters, specified data,
etc.) will be lost. Prior toreplacing the unit, therefore, make a backup copy of the data. Similarly, make a
backup copy of the current data when replacing the flash ROM module with one of a later software edition.

178
B–80525E/04 MAINTENANCE 3. TROUBLESHOOTING

SRAM module
Flash ROM module DRAM module
Axis module (J1, J2)
Axis module (J3, J4)

Axis module (J5, J6)

Main CPU printed circuit board

Step LED Action to be taken


6: The software is initial- * [Action1]Replace the SRAM module.
ized. * [Action2]Replace the main CPU PC board.

7: The software is initial- * [Action1]Replace the SRAM module.


ized. * [Action2]Replace the main CPU PC board.
* [Action3]Replace the flash ROM module.

8: The software is initial- [Action]Replace the flash ROM module.


ized.

9: The software is initial- [Action]Replace the axis module.


ized.

10: The software is initial- * [Action1]Replace the SRAM module.


ized. * [Action2]Replace the main CPU PC board.

11: Communication with the [Action1]Replace the teach pendant.


teach pendant is [Action2]Replace the cable of the teach pendant.
executed. * [Action3]Replace the main CPU PC board.

* If the main CPU PC board or SRAM module is replaced, the contents of memory (parameters, specified data,
etc.) will be lost. Prior to replacing the unit, therefore, make a backup copy of the data. Similarly, make a
backup copy of the current data when replacing the flash ROM module with one of a later software edition.

179
3. TROUBLESHOOTING MAINTENANCE B–80525E/04

SRAM module
Flash ROM module DRAM module
Axis module (J1, J2)
Axis module (J3, J4)

Axis module (J5, J6)

Main CPU printed circuit board

180
B–80525E/04 MAINTENANCE 3. TROUBLESHOOTING

LED Color Description


[Description] A parity alarm occurred in the RAM of the main CPU PC board.
[Action1] Replace the DRAM module.
Red
* [Action2] Replace the SRAM module.
* [Action3] Replace the main CPU PC board.
[Description] An NMI occurred in the LSI chip (ABC) on the main CPU PC board.
[Action1] Replace the axis module.
Red * [Action2] Replace the main CPU PC board.

[Description] A servo alarm occurred on the main CPU PC board.


[Action1] Replace the corresponding axis module.
Red
* [Action2] Replace the main CPU PC board.

[Description] An NMI occurred in the LSI chip (SLC2) of the main CPU PC board.
* [Action] Replace the main CPU PC board.
Red

[Description] A SYSFAIL occurred.


[Action1] Replace the corresponding axis module.
Red
* [Action2] Replace the main CPU PC board.

[Description] The battery voltage has fallen to below the prescribed level.
* [Action] Replace the battery on the power supply unit.
Red
Note) To prevent data loss, before replacing the battery, turn the control
unit on.

* If the main CPU PC board or SRAM module is replaced, the contents of memory (parameters, specified data,
etc.) will be lost. Prior to replacing the unit, therefore, make a backup copy of the data. Similarly, make a
backup copy of the current data when replacing the flash ROM module with one of a later software edition.

SRAM module
Flash ROM module DRAM module
Axis module (J1, J2)
Axis module (J3, J4)

Axis module (J5, J6)

Main CPU printed circuit board

Battery

Battery cover

[Battery replacement]
(1) Turn on the control unit.
(2) Remove the battery cover from the power supply unit, by
grasping both the top and bottom of the battery cover.
(3) Disconnect the cable and remove the battery.
(4) Connect a new battery and replace the battery cover.
(5) Turn the control unit off.
Battery

181
3. TROUBLESHOOTING MAINTENANCE B–80525E/04

* LEDs on power supply unit


LED Description and action to be taken
[Description] A power supply alarm occurred.
[Action1] Check whether fuse F3 (+24 V) or F4 (+24 E) on the power supply unit
has blown.
Replace if necessary.
[Action2] Check the printed circuit boards, units, and cables using the DC power
supply (+5 V, ±15 V, +24 V, +24 E). Replace any failed components.
* [Action3] Replace the power supply unit.

[Description] If the LED is not lit, the power supply unit is not connected to the 200
VAC supply.
[Action1] Check whether fuse F1 on the power supply unit has blown. Replace if
necessary.
* [Action2] Replace the power supply unit.

* Power supply replacement must be completed within 30 minutes. (The power supply unit contains the backup
battery for the SRAM module of the main CPU PC board.)

182
B–80525E/04 MAINTENANCE 3. TROUBLESHOOTING

LEDs on the emergency–stop PCB


LED indication Phenomena and countermeasures
[Description] The brake fuse (F1) or +24 V fuse (F2) has blown, or the brake
over–current alarm has been issued.
[Action1] Check whether fuse F1 or F2 on the emergency–stop PCB has blown.
If it has blown, replace it.
[Action2] Check whether the robot cable and mechanical unit cable are
short–circuited to ground or any metal object.
[Action3] Replace the emergency–stop PCB.

[Description] If the LED does not light, 100 VAC power is probably not being supplied
to the brake.
[Action1] If the system is in the emergency–stop state, release it.
[Action2] Check that 100 VAC is being output to the terminal box of the transformer or
line filter.
[Action3] Replace the emergency–stop PCB.

[Description] If the LED does not light, the brake has not yet been released.
[Action1] Replace the emergency–stop PCB.
[Action2] Replace the main CPU PCB.

183
3. TROUBLESHOOTING MAINTENANCE B–80525E/04

LEDs on the conversion PCB


LED indication Phenomena and countermeasures
[Description] The brake fuse has blown, or the brake over–current alarm has been
issued.
[Action1] Check whether the fuse on the conversion PCB has blown. If it has blown,
replace it.
[Action2] Check whether the robot cable and mechanical unit cable are
short–circuited to ground or any metal object.
[Action3] Replace the conversion PCB.

[Description] If the LED does not light, 100 VAC power is probably not being supplied
to the brake.
[Action1] If the system is in the emergency–stop state, release it.
[Action2] Check that 100 VAC is being output to the terminal box for the transformer
or line filter.
[Action3] Replace the conversion PCB.

[Description] If the LED does not light, the brake has not yet been released.
[Action1] Replace the conversion PCB.
[Action2] Replace the main CPU PCB.

FUSE

184
B–80525E/04 MAINTENANCE 3. TROUBLESHOOTING

(2) ALARM LEDS ON THE PROCESS I/O PRINTED CIRCUIT


BOARD
Alarm LED Description and action to be taken
Process I/O CA/CB/DA Process I/O EA [Description] A communication alarm occurred between the main CPU PC
board and
process I/O PC board.
[Action1] Replace the process I/O PC board.
* [Action2] Replace the main CPU PC board.
[Action3] Replace the I/O link connection cable.
ALMO

FALM

Process I/O CA/CB/DA Process I/O EA [Description] A fuse on the process I/O PC board is blown.
[Action1] Replace the blown fuse on the process I/O PC board.
[Action2] Examine the cables and peripheral devices connected to the process
I/O PC board.
Replace any failed components.
[Action3] Replace the process I/O PC board.
ALMO

FALM

Fuse

Fuse

For process I/O printed circuit board CA/CB/DA


Specificalion : A60l–0001–0046#2.0

Process input/output PC board EA

185
3. TROUBLESHOOTING MAINTENANCE B–80525E/04

* LEDs on servo amplifier (For ARC Mate 100, ARC Mate 120, ARC
Mate 100i, ARC Mate 120i, S–6, S–12, M–6i, M–16i, S–420i, S–500,
S–700, M–400i, M–710i, A–520i)
The servo amplifier has alarm LEDs and a seven–segment LED.
Troubleshoot the alarm indicated by the LEDs, referring also to the
alarm indication on the teach pendant.

Name LED Description


Brake failure The brake control circuit in the servo amplifier is defective.

Corresponding alarm
Servo–018 Brake failure

Electromagnetic contactor This alarm is issued when a contact of the electromagnetic contactor
melt alarm melts.

The corresponding alarm is:


Servo–042 MCAL Alarm

Servo amplifier overheat The thermostat in the servo amplifier or transformer tripped or the
fuses F1, F2 in the servo amplifier blow.

Corresponding alarm
Servo–049 OHAL1 Alarm

Insufficient DC link voltage The DC voltage being supplied to the main circuit is too low.

Corresponding alarm
Servo–047 LVAL Alarm

Insufficient control supply The voltage being supplied to the control circuit (+5 V) is too low.
voltage
Corresponding alarm
Servo–047 LVAL Alarm

186
B–80525E/04 MAINTENANCE 3. TROUBLESHOOTING

Name LED Description


Excessive voltage The DC voltage being supplied to the main circuit is too high.

Corresponding alarm
Servo–044 HVAL Alarm

Excessive regenerative dis- The regenerative discharge energy is too high.


charge
Corresponding alarm
Servo–043 DCAL Alarm

Servo amplifier not ready The electromagnetic contactor for the main power supply is open. The
amplifier is not ready to drive the motor.

Servo amplifier ready The electromagnetic contactor for the main power supply is closed.
The amplifier is ready to drive the motor. (Normal operating status.)

HC1 to HC6
[Description] An excessive current was detected in the main circuit
of the servo amplifier.
The 7–segment LED on the servo amplifier displays
a hyphen (–). Of LEDs HC1 to HC6, above the
7–segment LED, the LED corresponding to the axis
on which HCAL occurred lights (red).
WD (LED8)
[Description] A watch–dog alarm occurred on the servo amplifier
control PC board.
The WD LED (LED8) on the servo amplifier is lit.

187
3. TROUBLESHOOTING MAINTENANCE B–80525E/04

* LED on power supply included (PSM) (M410i)

LED

Weight 10.7Kg

188
B–80525E/04 MAINTENANCE 3. TROUBLESHOOTING

When an alarm is issued, the red LED lights, and the corresponding alarm
number is displayed on the seven–segment LED display on the front panel
of the power supply module.
Name LED Description
Input overcurrent An over–current was detected in the input circuit.

SRVO–148 HCAL alarm

Fan alarm The cooling fan, built into the power supply module, is defective.

SRVO–150 FSAL alarm

Overload alarm The temperature of the semiconductor heat sink is too high.

SRVO–141 OHAL alarm

Low voltage alarm for DC link The DC voltage of the main circuit is too low.

SRVO–145 LVAL alarm

In sufficieat charge alarm for The DC voltage of the main circuit has not reached the required level (insufficient
DC link pre–charge).

SRVO–153 CHGAL alarm

Input power missing phase A phase of the input power is missing.


alarm
SRVO–143 PSFLAL alarm

Overvoltage alarm for DC link The DC voltage of the main circuit is too high.

SRVO–154 HVAL alarm

Hardware error alarm The control circuit is defective.

The following messages do not indicate alarm states. They indicate


normal operation modes.
Name LED Description
NOT READY The motor is not ready to operate.

READY The required DC voltage has been reached. The motor is ready to run.

189
3. TROUBLESHOOTING MAINTENANCE B–80525E/04

* LED on servo amplifier module (SVM)

LED

190
B–80525E/04 MAINTENANCE 3. TROUBLESHOOTING

An alarm is indicated at the seven–segment LED display on the front


panel of the servo amplifier module.
Name LED Description
Low voltage alarm for control The control–power voltage (+5 V) is too low. Alternatively, the clock is erro-
power neous.
(LV5V)
SRVO–144 LVAL alarm

Low voltage alarm for DC link The DC voltage of the main–circuit power supply is too low.
(LCDC)
SRVO–146 LVAL alarm

Overcarrent alarm An excessive over–current was detected in the motor of the one–axis amplifier
(HCL) or in the L–axis motor of the two–axis amplifier.

SRVO–149 HLAL alarm

Overcarrent alarm An excessive over–current was detected in the M–axis motor of the two–axis
(HCM) amplifier.

SRVO–149 HCAL alarm

Overcarrent alarm An excessive over–current was detected in the L– and M–axis motors of the
(HCLM) two–axis motor.

SRVO–149 HCAL alarm

IPM alarm An error was detected in the IPM of a 1–axis amplifier or the L–axis IPM of a
(HCL) 2–axis or 3–axis amplifier.

SRVO–152 IPMAL alarm

IPM alarm An error was detected in the M–axis IPM of a 2–axis or 3–axis amplifier.
(HCM)
SRVO–152 IPMAL alarm

IPM alarm An error was detected in the L–axis and M–axis IPMs of a 2–axis or 3–axis am-
(HCLM) plifier.

SRVO–152 IPMAL alarm

The following messages do not indicate alarm states. They indicate


normal operation modes.
Name LED Description
Amp The motor is not ready to operate.
NOT READY

Amp The required DC voltage has been reached. The motor is ready to run.
READY

191
3. TROUBLESHOOTING MAINTENANCE B–80525E/04

* LED on servo amplifier unit (S–800, S–900 and M–500)


The servo amplifier has a seven–segment LED display. If an alarm
is issued, take appropriate action according to the message displayed
on the teach pendant.

LED

Name LED Description


Overvoltage alarm The DC voltage of the main–circuit power supply is too high.
(HV)
Alarm message: Servo – 044 HVAL alarm

Low voltage alarm for control The power voltage (+5 V) supplied to the control circuit is too low.
power
(LCDC) Alarm message: Servo – 047 LVAL alarm

Low voltage alarm for DC link The DC voltage of the main–circuit power supply is too low.
(LVDC)
Alarm message: Servo – 047 LVAL alarm

Regenerative control circuit The short–period regenerative discharge energy is high.


alarm
(DCSW) Alarm message: Servo – 043 DCAL alarm

Over regenerative discharge The average regenerative discharge energy is high.


alarm
(DCOH) Alarm message: Servo – 043 DCAL alarm

Amplifier over heating The thermostat in the servo amplifier unit tripped.
(OH)
Alarm message: Servo – 049 OHALI alarm

192
B–80525E/04 MAINTENANCE 3. TROUBLESHOOTING

Name LED Description


Deposition of magnetic contac- A deposit was detected on the contact of the magnetic contactor. Any deposit on
tor the contact is detected immediately after the magnetic contactor activation com-
(MCC) mand is specified.
Alarm message: Servo – 042 MCAL alarm
Overcarrent alarm An excessively high current was detected in the main circuit of the one–axis
(HCL) amplifier or the L–axis main circuit of the two–axis amplifier.

Alarm message: Servo – 045 HCAL alarm

Overcarrent alarm An excessively high current was detected in the M–axis main circuit of the two–
(HCM) axis amplifier.

Alarm message: Servo – 045 HCAL alarm

Overcarrent alarm An excessively high current was detected in the L– and M–axis main circuits of
(HCLM) the two–axis amplifier.

Alarm message: Servo – 045 HCAL alarm

Amplifier NOT READY The magnetic contactor in the servo amplifier unit is open. The motor is not
ready to operate.

Amplifier READY The magnetic contactor in the servo amplifier unit is closed. The motor is ready
to run. (This state is the normal operation state.)

L–axis IPM alarm (IPML) This alarm is issued when the intelligent power module (IPM) of the L–axis de-
tects an alarm.

The corresponding alarm is: Servo – 152 IPMAL alarm

M–axis IPM alarm (IPMM) This alarm is issued when the intelligent power module (IPM) of the M–axis de-
tects an alarm.

The corresponding alarm is: Servo – 152 IPMAL alarm

L/M–axis IPM alarm (IPMLM) This alarm is issued when the intelligent power modules (IPMs) of the L–axis and
M–axis detect an alarm.

The corresponding alarm is: Servo – 152 IPMAL alarm

Circuit breaker The circuit breaker is When an abnormal current exceeding the operating current of the circuit breaker
set to off. flows, the circuit breaker trips.

NOTE
When the circuit breaker of the servo amplifier unit is set to off, the DC link
undervoltage alarm (LVDC) is issued.

193
3. TROUBLESHOOTING MAINTENANCE B–80525E/04

3.3
POSITION DEVIATION (Check 1) On the status screen, check the position deviation in the
FOUND IN RETURN stopped state. To display the position deviation, press the
screen selection key, and select STATUS from the menu.
TO THE REFERENCE
Press the TYPE (F1) key, select AXIS from the menu, then
POSITION press the PULSE (F4) key.
(POSITIONING) (Corrective action)
Correct the parameters related to return to the reference
position (positioning).
(Check 2) Check whether the motor axis can be positioned normally.
(Corrective action)
If the motor axis can be positioned normally, check the
mechanical unit.
(Check 3) Check the mechanical unit for backlash.
(Corrective action)
Replace a faulty key or other faulty parts.
(Check 4) If checks 1 to 3 show normal results
(Corrective action)
Replace the pulse coder and main CPU printed circuit board.

3.4
VIBRATION (Check 1) Check the settings of parameters such as the position loop
gain parameter.
OBSERVED DURING (Corrective action)
MOVEMENT Correct parameters.
(Check 2) Check the mechanical unit for backlash.
(Corrective action)
Replace a faulty key or other faulty parts.

3.5 The following explains checking and corrective action required if the
robot cannot be operated manually after the controller is turned on:
MANUAL
(1) Check and corrective action to be made if manual operation is
OPERATION impossible
IMPOSSIBLE
(Check 1) Check whether the teach pendant is on.
(Corrective action)
Turn on the teach pendant.
(Check 2) Check whether the teach pendant is handled correctly.
(Corrective action)
To move an axis by manual operation, press the axis
selection key and case shift key at the same time.
Set the override for manual feed to a position other than the
FINE and VFINE positions.
(Check 3) Check whether the ENBL signal of the peripheral device
control interface is set to 1.
(Corrective action)
Place the peripheral device control interface in the ENBL
status.

194
B–80525E/04 MAINTENANCE 3. TROUBLESHOOTING

(Check 4) Check whether the HOLD signal of the peripheral device


control interface or the HOLD switch on the operator’s panel
is on (hold status). (Check whether the hold lamp on the
teach pendant is on.)
(Corrective action)
Turn off the HOLD signal of the peripheral device control
interface or the HOLD switch on the operator’s panel.
(Check 5) Check whether the previous manual operation has been
completed.
(Corrective action)
If the robot cannot be placed in the effective area because of
the offset of the speed command voltage preventing the
previous operation from being completed, check the
position deviation on the status screen, and change the
setting.
(Check 6) Check whether the controller is in the alarm status.
(Corrective action)
Release the alarm.
(2) Check and corrective action to be taken if the program cannot be
executed
(Check 1) Check whether the ENBL signal for the peripheral-device
control interface is on.
(Corrective action)
Put the peripheral-device control interface in the ENBL
state.
(Check 2) Check whether the HOLD signal for the peripheral-device
control interface is on. Also check whether the HOLD
switch on the operator’s panel is on. (Check whether the
HOLD lamp on the teach pendant is on.)
(Corrective action)
If the HOLD signal is on, turn it off. If the HOLD switch
is on, turn it off.
(Check 3) Check whether the previous manual operation has been
completed.
(Corrective action)
If the robot cannot be placed in the effective area because of
the offset of the speed command voltage, which prevents the
previous operation from being completed, check the
position deviation on the status screen, then change the
setting.
(Check 4) Check whether the controller is in the alarm status.
(Corrective action)
Release the alarm.

195
4. PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS MAINTENANCE B–80525E/04

4 PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS

The printed circuit boards are factory-set for operation. Usually, the user
need not set or adjust them. This chapter describes the standard settings
and adjustment required if a defective printed circuit board is replaced.
It also describes the use of the test pins and meanings of the LED
indications.
Fig. 4 shows the printed circuit board of the control unit. The control unit
PC board consists of a main printed circuit board and some modules
installed perpendicular to the main PC board.
The control unit PC board has interface connectors, LED indicators, and
a plastic panel at the front. At the rear, there is a backplane connector.
The module is a small PC board in which components are
surface-mounted on both sides. On one edge, it has a connector electrode
which fits into a module socket on the main PC board of the control unit.
This connection enable the module to be replaced easily. Different
modules are available for different functions. The signal array of the
module connector depends on the function. The function of the module
determines the socket to which the module is installed on the main PC
board of the control unit. If the module is installed to the wrong socket,
it will not work. It may cause failure.

Ï LED indicator

Module
Ï
Ï
Ï Edge
connector Interface connector

Backplane connector

Main PC board of the control unit

Front panel

Fig.4 Configuration of the the Control Unit PC Board

196
B–80525E/04 MAINTENANCE 4. PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS

4.1
MAIN CPU PC
BOARDS
(A16B–3200–0040)
Total version

CMOS RAM module

Flash ROM module DRAM module

Axis module (J1, J2)

Axis module (J3, J4)

Axis module (J5, J6)

Fig.4.1 Main CPU printed circuit board

(1) Test pins


Name Use
GND
P5V
P15V
M15V For testing the printed circuit board
P24V
P24E
LOAD

(2) Set pin


Name Use
SP1 Only for testing the printed circuit board
Note) If the set pin is removed, the RAM on the PC board is
disconnected from the backup circuit. Because no
power is supplied, therefore, the data stored in RAM
may be lost. Always connect the set pin.

197
4. PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS MAINTENANCE B–80525E/04

(3) LEDs
Color Description

A parity alarm occurred in a CMOS RAM module or


Red
DRAM module on the main CPU board.

NMI occurred in the LSI(ABC) on the main CPU


Red
printed circuit board.

Servo alarm occurred on the main CPU printed


Red
circuit board.

NMI occurred in the LSI(SLC2) on the main CPU


Red
board.

Red SYSTEM FAIL occurred.

The battery voltage is insufficient.


Red
Replace the battery.

Green Indicates the operating status of the system.

(4) Relationship between driver chips and DO signals


Driver chip order code: A76L–0151–0062
Driver chip DO signal
DV1 RDO1, RDO2, RDO3, RDO4
DV2 RDO5, RDO6, RDO7, RDO8

198
B–80525E/04 MAINTENANCE 4. PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS

4.2 A20B–1006–0300
EMERGENCY STOP
CONTROL PC
BOARD

Fig.4.2 (a) Emergency stop control PC board

199
4. PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS MAINTENANCE B–80525E/04

A16B–1212–0930

Total version

Fig.4.2 (b) Emergency stop control PC board

200
B–80525E/04 MAINTENANCE 4. PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS

A16B–1212–0931

Total version

Fig.4.2 (c) Emergency stop control PC board

201
4. PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS MAINTENANCE B–80525E/04

(1) Settings
Symbol Standard Description
setting
COM A Common–voltage setting
A: +24 V
B: 0 V
HBK B *HBK signal enabled/disabled
A: Disabled
B: Enabled
SBK1 Open
SBK2 Brake–sensitivity adjustment
(note)

Notes

NOTE
Not provided for A20B–1006–0300.

(2) LED indication


LED Description

A brake fuse alarm or brake over–current alarm


Red has been issued.

Green 100 VAC power is supplied to the brake.

Brake state (when the brake is released, the


Green LED lights.)

202
B–80525E/04 MAINTENANCE 4. PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS

Conversion PCB (S–900) A16B–1212–0910

Total version

Fig.4.2 (d) Conversion PCB

(1) LED indication


LED Description

A brake fuse alarm or brake over–current alarm


Red has been issued.

Green 100 VAC power is supplied to the brake.

Brake state (when the brake is released, the


Green LED lights.)

203
4. PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS MAINTENANCE B–80525E/04

4.3 (A20B-2001-0670)
3 slot back plane
BACKPLANE PC A20B–2001–0670
Total version

BOARD

Fig.4.3 (a) Backplane PC Board


(A20B–2001–0860)
2 slot back plane Total version
A20B–2001–0860

Fig.4.3 (b) Backplane PC Board


(A20B–2001–0990)
5 slot back plane
Total version
A20B–2001–0990

Fig.4.3 (c) Backplane PC Board


204
B–80525E/04 MAINTENANCE 4. PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS

4.4
PROCESS
INPUT/OUTPUT PC
BOARD

4.4.1
Process Input/Output
PC Board CA
(A16B–2201–0470)

Fig.4.4.1 Process Input/Output PC Board CA

205
4. PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS MAINTENANCE B–80525E/04

(1) Test pins


Name Use
P24V +24V
P5V +5V
P15VC +15V
For measuring the DC supply voltage
M15VC –15V
GND1 GND
GND2 GND
For measuring the reference voltage of the
P10V +10V
digital/analog converter
P15VF +15V
M15VF –15V Power for the digital/analog converter
GNDF GND
AI1 Channel 1
AI2 Channel 2
AI3 Channel 3 For measuring the voltage of the analog input
AI4 Channel 4 signal (analog/digital)
AI5 Channel 5
AI6 Channel 6
AOUT1 Channel 1 For measuring the voltage of the analog output
AOUT2 Channel 2 signal (digital/analog)

(2) Settings
Name Standard Description
setting
UDI1 to UDI20
ICOM1
(Connector CRM2A)
The common voltage is
UDI21 to UDI40 adjusted to:
ICOM2 Side A
(Connector CRM2B) Side A : +24 V common
WDI01 to WDI08 Side B : 0 V common
ICOM3
(Connector CRW1)

SP1 Channel 1 The polarity of the output voltage


is switched to:
Open
Strapped : Negative (–)
SP2 Channel 2
Open : Positive (+)

206
B–80525E/04 MAINTENANCE 4. PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS

(3) Adjustment
VR1: Adjusts the gain of channel 1.
Execute a robot program and set AOUT[1] to 4095 on the teach
pendant. Connect a digital voltmeter to test pin AOUT1 and
rotate VR1 until the meter reads 12.0 V.
Connect the negative (–) lead of the digital voltmeter to test pin
GNDF.
VR2: Adjusts the gain of channel 2.
Execute a robot program and set AOUT[2] to 4095 on the teach
pendant. Connect the digital voltmeter to test pin AOUT2 and
rotate VR2 until the meter reads 12.0 V.
Connect the negative (–) lead of the digital voltmeter to test pin
GNDF. (The 0VF test pin is different from the common 0V test
pin.)
VR3: Adjusts the reference supply voltage of the digital/analog
converter.
Connect the digital voltmeter to test pin P10V and rotate VR3
until the meter reads 10.0 "0.1 V.
(4) LEDs
Color Description

A communication alarm occurred between


Red
the main CPU and process input/output.

A fuse (FUSE 1) in the process input/output


Red
blew.

207
4. PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS MAINTENANCE B–80525E/04

(5) Correspondence between driver chips and DO signals


Ordering code for the driver chips: A76L-0151-0062
Driver chip DO signal
DV1 CMDENBL, SYSRDY, PROGRUN, PAUSED
DV2 HELD, FALT, ATPERCH, TPENBL
DV3 BATALM, BUSY, ACK1/SNO1, ACK2/SNO2
DV4 ACK3/SNO3, ACK4/SNO4, ACK5/SNO5, ACK6/SNO6
DV5 ACK7/SNO7, ACK8/SNO8, SNACK, RESERVED
DV6 SDO01, SDO02, SDO03, SDO04
DV7 SDO05, SDO06, SDO07, SDO08
DV8 SDO09, SDO10, SDO11, SDO12
DV9 SDO13, SDO14, SDO15, SDO16
DV10 SDO17, SDO18, SDO19, SDO20
DV11 WDO01, WDO02, WDO03, WDO04
DV12 WDO05, WDO06, WDO07, WDO08
RESERVED For replacement

208
B–80525E/04 MAINTENANCE 4. PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS

4.4.2
Process Input/Output
PC Board CB
(A16B–2201–0472)

Fig.4.4.2 Process Input/Output PC Board CB

(1) Test pins


Name Use
P24V +24V
P5V +5V
P15VC +15V
For measuring the DC supply voltage
M15VC –15V
GND1 GND
GND2 GND

(2) Settings
Name Standard Description
setting
UDI1 to UDI20 The common voltage is
ICOM1
(Connector CRM2A) adjusted to:
Side A
UDI21 to UDI40 Side A : +24 V common
ICOM2 Side B : 0 V common
(Connector CRM2B)

209
4. PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS MAINTENANCE B–80525E/04

(3) LEDs
Color Description

A communication alarm occurred between


Red
the main CPU and process input/output.

A fuse (FUSE 1) in the process input/output


Red
blew.

(4) Correspondence between driver chips and DO signals


Ordering code for the driver chips: A76L-0151-0062
Driver chip DO signal
DV1 CMDENBL, SYSRDY, PROGRUN, PAUSED
DV2 HELD, FALT, ATPERCH, TPENBL
DV3 2BATALM, BUSY, ACK1/SNO1, ACK2/SNO
DV4 ACK3/SNO3, ACK4/SNO4, ACK5/SNO5, ACK6/SNO6
DV5 ACK7/SNO7, ACK8/SNO8, SNACK, RESERVED
DV6 SDO01, SDO02, SDO03, SDO04
DV7 SDO05, SDO06, SDO07, SDO08
DV8 SDO09, SDO10, SDO11, SDO12
DV9 SDO13, SDO14, SDO15, SDO16
DV10 SDO17, SDO18, SDO19, SDO20
RESERVED For replacement

210
B–80525E/04 MAINTENANCE 4. PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS

4.4.3
Process Input/Output
PC Board DA
(A16B–2201–0480)

Total version

Fig.4.4.3 Process I/O PC board DA

(1) Test pins


Name Description
P24V +24V
P5V +5V
For measuring the DC supply voltage
GND1 GND
GND2 GND

(2) Settings
Name Standard Description
setting
UDI01 to 20
ICOM1
(Connector CRM2A)
UDI21 to 40 The common voltage is
ICOM2
(Connector CRM2B) adjusted to:
Side A
UDI41 to 60 Side A : +24 V common
ICOM3 Side B : 0 V common
(Connector CRM2C)
UDI61 to 80
ICOM4
(Connector CRM2D)

211
4. PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS MAINTENANCE B–80525E/04

(3) LEDs
Color Description

A communication alarm occurred between


Red
the main CPU and process input/output.

A fuse (FUSE 1) in the process input/output


Red
below.

(4) Correspondence between driver chips and DO signals


Ordering code for the driver chips: A76L-0151-0062
Driver chip DO signal
DV1 CMDENBL, SYSRDY, PROGRUN, PAUSED
DV2 HELD, FALT, ATPERCH, TPENBL
DV3 BATALM, BUSY, ACK1/SNO1, ACK2/SNO2
DV4 ACK3/SNO3, ACK4/SNO4, ACK5/SNO5, ACK6/SNO6
DV5 ACK7/SNO7, ACK8/SNO8, SNACK, RESERVED
DV6 SDO01, SDO02, SDO03, SDO04
DV7 SDO05, SDO06, SDO07, SDO08
DV8 SDO09, SDO10, SDO11, SDO12
DV9 SDO13, SDO14, SDO15, SDO16
DV10 SDO17, SDO18, SDO19, SDO20
DV11 ADO21, SDO22, SDO23, SDO24
DV12 SDO25, SDO26, SDO27, SDO28
DV13 SDO29, SDO30, SDO31, SDO32
DV14 SDO33, SDO34, SDO35, SDO36
DV15 SDO37, SDO38, SDO39, SDO40
DV16 SDO41, SDO42, SDO43, SDO44
DV17 SDO45, SDO46, SDO47, SDO48
DV18 SDO49, SDO50, SDO51, SDO52
DV19 SDO53, SDO54, SDO55, SDO56
DV20 SDO57, SDO58, SDO59, SDO60
RESERVED For replacement

212
B–80525E/04 MAINTENANCE 4. PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS

4.4.4
Process I/O Printed
Board EA
(A16B–3200–0230)

213
4. PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS MAINTENANCE B–80525E/04

(1) Test pins


Name Use
P24V +24V
P5V +5V
P15VC +15V
For measuring the DC supply voltage
M15VC –15V
GND1 GND
GND2 GND
For measuring the reference voltage of the
P10V +10V
digital/analog converter
P15VF +15V
M15VF –15V Power for the digital/analog converter
GNDF GND
AI1 Channel 1
AI2 Channel 2
AI3 Channel 3 For measuring the voltage of the analog input
AI4 Channel 4 signal (analog/digital)
AI5 Channel 5
AI6 Channel 6
AOUT1 Channel 1 For measuring the voltage of the analog output
AOUT2 Channel 2 signal (digital/analog)

(2) Settings
Name Standard Description
setting
UDI1 to UDI20
ICOM1
(Connector CRM2A)
The common voltage is
UDI21 to UDI40 adjusted to:
ICOM2 Side A
(Connector CRM2B) Side A : +24 V common
WDI01 to WDI08 Side B : 0 V common
ICOM3
(Connector CRW1)

SP1 Channel 1 The polarity of the output voltage


is switched to:
Open
Strapped : Negative (–)
SP2 Channel 2
Open : Positive (+)

214
B–80525E/04 MAINTENANCE 4. PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS

(3) Adjustment
VR1: Adjusts the gain of channel 1.
Execute a robot program and set AOUT[1] to 4095 on the teach
pendant. Connect a digital voltmeter to test pin AOUT1 and
rotate VR1 until the meter reads 12.0 V.
Connect the negative (–) lead of the digital voltmeter to test pin
GNDF.
VR2: Adjusts the gain of channel 2.
Execute a robot program and set AOUT[2] to 4095 on the teach
pendant. Connect the digital voltmeter to test pin AOUT2 and
rotate VR2 until the meter reads 12.0 V.
Connect the negative (–) lead of the digital voltmeter to test pin
GNDF. (The 0VF test pin is different from the common 0V test
pin.)
VR3: Adjusts the reference supply voltage of the digital/analog
converter.
Connect the digital voltmeter to test pin P10V and rotate VR3
until the meter reads 10.0"0.1 V.
VR4, VR5: Internal power supply adjustment
These VRs are used to adjust the internal supply voltage for the
printed circuit board. They are set at the factory and need not
be adjusted by the user.
(4) LEDs
Color Description

ALMO A communication alarm occurred between


Red
the main CPU and process input/output.

FALM

ALMO A fuse (FUSE 1) in the process input/output


Red
blew.

FALM

215
4. PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS MAINTENANCE B–80525E/04

(5) Correspondence between driver chips and DO signals


Ordering code for the driver chips: A76L-0151-0062
Driver chip DO signal
DV1 CMDENBL, SYSRDY, PROGRUN, PAUSED
DV2 HELD, FALT, ATPERCH, TPENBL
DV3 BATALM, BUSY, ACK1/SNO1, ACK2/SNO2
DV4 ACK3/SNO3, ACK4/SNO4, ACK5/SNO5, ACK6/SNO6
DV5 ACK7/SNO7, ACK8/SNO8, SNACK, RESERVED
DV6 SDO01, SDO02, SDO03, SDO04
DV7 SDO05, SDO06, SDO07, SDO08
DV8 SDO09, SDO10, SDO11, SDO12
DV9 SDO13, SDO14, SDO15, SDO16
DV10 SDO17, SDO18, SDO19, SDO20
DV11 WDO01, WDO02, WDO03, WDO04
DV12 WDO05, WDO06, WDO07, WDO08

216
B–80525E/04 MAINTENANCE 4. PRINTED CIRCUIT BOARDS

4.4.5
Additional Axis Control
Printed Board
(A16B–2200–0820)

Total version

Axis module (Additional 1–, 2–axis)

Axis module (Additional 3–, 4–axis)

Axis module (Additional 5–, 6–axis)

Axis module (Additional 7–, 8–axis)

Axis module (Additional 9–, 10–axis)

Fig.4.4.5 Additional axis printed board

(1) Checking pins


Name Description
GND
P5V
P15V For checking the printed board
M15V
P24E

217
5. SERVO AMPLIFIERS MAINTENANCE B–80525E/04

5 SERVO AMPLIFIERS

The servo amplifiers are factory-set for operation. Usually, the user need
not set or adjust them.
This chapter describes the standard settings and adjustment required if a
defective servo amplifier is replaced. It also describes the use of test pins
and meanings of the LED indications.

218
B–80525E/04 MAINTENANCE 5. SERVO AMPLIFIERS

Robots and servo amplifier


J1 J2 J3 J4 J5 J6 J7
ARC Mate 100 A06B–6076–H005 (6–axis AMP) or A06B–6076–H105
ARC Mate 120 A06B–6076–H004 (6–axis AMP) or A06B–6076–H104
ARC Mate 120i
ARC Mate A06B–6076–H105 (6–axis amplifier)
100i/M–6i
S–6 A06B–6076–H005 (6–axis AMP) or A06B–6076–H105
S–12, M–16i A06B–6076–H004 (6–axis AMP) or A06B–6076–H104
S–420i A06B–6076–H001 (6–axis AMP) or A06B–6076–H101
S–450 A06B–6077–H111 (PSM)
AMP1/L AMP1/M AMP2/M AMP2/L AMP3/L AMP3/M AMP4
A06B A06B A06B A06B A06B A06B S–450S:
–6079 –6079 –6079 –6079 –6079 –6079 A06B–6079
–H206 –H206 –H207 –H207 –H206 –H206 –H104
S–450L:
A06B–6079
–H101
S–500 A06B–6076–H002 (6–axis AMP) or A06B–6076–H102
A–520i
M–400i
S–700 A06B–6076–H103 (6–axis AMP) or A06B–6076–H103
S–800 AMP1 AMP2 AMP3 AMP4/M AMP4/M AMP5
A06B A06B A06B A06B A06B A06B
–6089 –6089 –6089 –6089 –6089 –6089
–H105 –H105 –H105 –H208 –H208 –H105
S–900 AMP1 AMP3 AMP5 AMP2 AMP4 AMP6
A06B A06B A06B A06B A06B A06B
–6066 –6066 –6066 –6066 –6066 –6066
–H008 –H008 –H008 –H006 –H006 –H006
AMP1 AMP3 AMP5 AMP2 AMP4 AMP6
A06B A06B A06B A06B A06B A06B
–6089 –6089 –6089 –6089 –6089 –6089
–H106 –H106 –H106 –H105 –H105 –H105
M410i A06B–6087–H115 (PSM)
AMP1 AMP2 AMP3 AMP4
A06B A06B A06B A06B
–6079 –6079 –6079 –6079
–H106 –H106 –H106 –H103
M–500 AMP1 AMP3/M AMP2 AMP3/L AMP4
A06B A06B A06B A06B A06B
–6089 –6089 –6089 –6089 –6089
–H106 –H206 –H105 –H206 –H104
M–710i A06B–6076–H106 (6–axis amplifier)

219
5. SERVO AMPLIFIERS MAINTENANCE B–80525E/04

5.1
SERVO AMPLIFIER Machine Specification
ARC Mate100, S–6 A06B–6076–H005 or A06B–6076–H105
FOR (ARC Mate 100,
ARC Mate120, ARC Mate 120i,
ARC Mate 120, ARC S–12, M–16i
A06B–6076–H004 or A06B–6076–H104

Mate 100i, ARC Mate ARC Mate100i, M–6i A06B–6076–H105


S–420i A06B–6076–H001 or A06B–6076–H101
120i, S–6, S–12, M–6, S–500, A–520i, M–400i A06B–6076–H002 or A06B–6076–H102
M–16i, S–420i, S–500, S–700 A06B–6076–H003 or A06B–6076–H103
S–700, M–400i, M–710i A06B–6076–H106

M–710i, A–520i)

Fig.5.1 (a) Outline Drawings

220
B–80525E/04 MAINTENANCE 5. SERVO AMPLIFIERS

Fig. 5.1 (b) shows the terminal boards of servo amplifiers.

J5–axis
output

J6–axis
output

J3–axis
output

J4–axis
output

J1–axis
output

J2–axis
output

Regenerative
resistance
connection
terminal

GND terminal AC input


(200VAC to 230VAC)

Fig.5.1 (b) Terminal Boards of Servo Amplifiers

221
5. SERVO AMPLIFIERS MAINTENANCE B–80525E/04

The servo amplifier has alarm LEDs and a seven–segment LED.


Troubleshoot the alarm indicated by the LEDs, referring also to the alarm
indication on the teach pendant.

Name LED Description


Brake failure The brake control circuit in the servo amplifier is defective.

Electromagnetic contactor This alarm is issued when a contact of the electromagnetic contactor
melt alarm melts.
The corresponding alarm is: Servo 042 – MCAL alarm

Servo amplifier overheat The thermostat in the servo amplifier or transformer tripped or the
fuses F1, F2 in the servo amplifier blow.
Corresponding alarm
Servo–049 OHAL1 Alarm

Insufficient DC link voltage The DC voltage being supplied to the main circuit is too low.
(LVDC)
Corresponding alarm
Servo–047 LVAL Alarm

Insufficient control supply The voltage being supplied to the control circuit (+5 V) is too low.
voltage
(LV5V) Corresponding alarm
Servo–047 LVAL Alarm

222
B–80525E/04 MAINTENANCE 5. SERVO AMPLIFIERS

Name LED Description


Excessive voltage The DC voltage being supplied to the main circuit is too high.
(HV)
Corresponding alarm
Servo–044 HVAL Alarm

Excessive regenerative dis- The regenerative discharge energy is too high.


charge
Corresponding alarm
Servo–043 DCAL Alarm

Servo amplifier not ready The electromagnetic contactor for the main power supply is open. The amplifier
is not ready to drive the motor.

Servo amplifier ready The electromagnetic contactor for the main power supply is closed. The amplifi-
er is ready to drive the motor. (Normal operating status.)

HC1 to HC6
[Description] An excessive current was detected in the main circuit
of the servo amplifier.
The 7–segment LED on the servo amplifier displays
a hyphen (–). Of LEDs HC1 to HC6, above the
7–segment LED, the LED corresponding to the axis
on which HCAL occurred lights (red).
WD (LED8)
[Description] A watch–dog alarm occurred on the servo amplifier
control PC board.
The WD LED (LED8) on the servo amplifier is lit.

223
5. SERVO AMPLIFIERS MAINTENANCE B–80525E/04

5.2
POWER SUPPLY
IMODULE (PSM)
(A06B–6087–H115)

LED

Fig.(For M–410i)

224
B–80525E/04 MAINTENANCE 5. SERVO AMPLIFIERS

Positions of test points

IR
IS
+24V
+5V
0V

Fig. Test Points

Test point Description


IR L1 phase (R phase) current
IS L2 phase (S phase) current
+24V,
+5V, Control power
0V

225
5. SERVO AMPLIFIERS MAINTENANCE B–80525E/04

Position of the status LED display

Position of the STATUS LEDs

STATUS
PIL
ALM

Status indication
On ª
No. Off ª Description

A lit LED is indicated by –.


PIL, power–on indication, does not light.
1. PIL
Control power not turned on
ALM

PSM not ready.


PIL
Power is not being supplied to the main cir-
2. ALM
cuit.
Emergency stop state
PSM ready.
PIL
3. Power is being supplied to the main circuit.
ALM
The PSM is ready to operate.
Alarm.
PIL
The PSM is not ready to run.
ALM
4.
Alarm codes are indi-
cated with numbers
starting from 01.

226
B–80525E/04 MAINTENANCE 5. SERVO AMPLIFIERS

LED display indicating alarms


When an alarm is issued, the red LED lights, and the corresponding
alarm number is displayed by the seven–segment LED display on the
front panel of the power supply module.
Name LED Description
Input overcurrent An over–current was detected in the input circuit.

Fan alarm The cooling fan, built into the power supply module, is defective.

Overload alarm The temperature of the semiconductor heat sink is too high.

Low voltage alarm for DC link The DC voltage of the main circuit is too low.

In sufficieat charge alarm for The DC voltage of the main circuit has not reached the required level (insufficient
DC link pre–charge).

Input power missing phase A phase of the input power is missing.


alarm

Overvoltage alarm for DC link The DC voltage of the main circuit is too high.

Hardware error alarm The control circuit is defective.

The following messages do not indicate alarm states. They indicate


normal operation modes.
Name LED Description
NOT READY The motor is not ready to operate.

READY The required DC voltage has been reached. The motor is ready to run.

227
5. SERVO AMPLIFIERS MAINTENANCE B–80525E/04

5.3
SERVO AMPLIFIER Servo amplifier module (SVM) (A06B–6079–H103) for M–410i
(A06B–6079–H104) for S–450
MODULE (SVM)
(A06B–6079–H206) for S–450

228
B–80525E/04 MAINTENANCE 5. SERVO AMPLIFIERS

Servo amplifier module (SVM) (A06B–6079–H101)

229
5. SERVO AMPLIFIERS MAINTENANCE B–80525E/04

Servo amplifier module (SVM) (A06B–6079–H106)

230
B–80525E/04 MAINTENANCE 5. SERVO AMPLIFIERS

Servo amplifier module (SVM) (A06B–6079–H208, H207)

231
5. SERVO AMPLIFIERS MAINTENANCE B–80525E/04

(1) Setting

To make a setting, remove the jumper plug


using a tool such as a pair of long–nosed
pliers.

Name Setting Description


S1 Open These setting pin are used for internal circuit.
These setting pin must not be changed.
S2 Short

232
B–80525E/04 MAINTENANCE 5. SERVO AMPLIFIERS

An alarm is indicated at the seven–segment LED display on the front


panel of the servo amplifier module.
Name LED Description
Fan alarm The fan built into the servo amplifier module is defective.
(FAL)

Low voltage alarm for control The control–power voltage (+5 V) is too low. Alternatively, the clock is erro-
power neous.
(LV5V)

Low voltage alarm for DC link The DC voltage of the main–circuit power supply is too low.
(LCDC)

Overcarrent alarm An excessive over–current was detected in the motor of the one–axis amplifier
(HCL) or in the L–axis motor of the two–axis amplifier.

Overcarrent alarm An excessive over–current was detected in the M–axis motor of the two–axis
(HCM) amplifier.

Overcarrent alarm An excessive over–current was detected in the L– and M–axis motors of the
(HCLM) two–axis motor.

IPM alarm An error was detected in the IPM of a 1−axis amplifier or the L−axis IPM of a
(HCL) 2−axis amplifier.

IPM alarm An error was detected in the M−axis IPM of a 2−axis amplifier.
(HCM)

IPM alarm An error was detected in the L−axis and M−axis IPMs of a 2−axis amplifier.
(HCLM)

The following messages do not indicate alarm states. They indicate


normal operation modes.
Name LED Description
Amp The motor is not ready to operate.
NOT READY

Amp The required DC voltage has been reached. The motor is ready to run.
READY

233
5. SERVO AMPLIFIERS MAINTENANCE B–80525E/04

Interface of supply module and servo amplifier module terminal unit

234
B–80525E/04 MAINTENANCE 5. SERVO AMPLIFIERS

5.4
SERVO AMPLIFIER
(A06B–6066–H006)
Servo amplifier (A06B–6066–H006)

No fuse braker Terminal unit TI

235
5. SERVO AMPLIFIERS MAINTENANCE B–80525E/04

Servo amplifier (A06B–6066–H008)

No fuse braker
Terminal unit TI

236
B–80525E/04 MAINTENANCE 5. SERVO AMPLIFIERS

Interface of the Servo–Amplifier Terminal Block


The following figure shows the terminal box of the servo amplifier.

(A06B–6066–H006)

One–axis servo amplifier

Fig.5.2 Servo–Amplifier Terminal Block

237
5. SERVO AMPLIFIERS MAINTENANCE B–80525E/04

Interface of the Servo–Amplifier Terminal Block


The following table lists the interface signals of the terminal box of
the servo amplifier.
Terminal No. Symbol Description Remarks
1 PE (G) Amplifier ground
2 L1 (R) AC power input
(200 to 230 VAC)
3 L2 (S)
4 L3 (T)
5 100A Emergency–stop input
(100 VAC)
6 100B
7 MC1 Magnetic contactor break con- (Note 4)
firmation signal
8 MC2
9 U Outputs to an AC motor
10 V
11 W
12 G Motor ground
13 L1C Control power inputs L1 (R) and L1C, and L2 (S) and L2C are usually connected(note 1).
(200 to 230 VAC)
14 L2C
15 TH1 Thermostat input signals Usually connected(note 2).
16 TH2
17 RC For a regenerative resistor RC and RI are usually connected(note 3).
18 RI
19 RE
20 UL Output to an AC motor These terminals are not prepared for 1 axis servo amplifier unit.
21 VL
22 WL
23 GL Motor ground
24 FAN1 Power for the cooling fan in Provided only for A06B–6066–H008(note 5).
the separate regenerative dis-
25 FAN2 charge unit

NOTE
1. These terminals are used to input the power for controlling the servo amplifier. L2 (S) and L1C, as well
as L3 (T) and L2C are usually connected. To conform to the European standard, the European–version
R–J controller controls the control and power sections separately.
2. To use a transformer or a separate regenerative discharge unit, remove the jumper plate, then connect
the transformer or the overheat signal of the separate regenerative discharge unit between the TH1 and
TH2 terminals of the servo amplifier.
3. To use a separate regenerative discharge unit, connect it between the RC and RE terminals. For the
S–900, connect the regenerative discharge resistor of the regenerative discharge unit between the
terminals. Keep the RC and RI terminals connected.
4. These terminals output the state signal of the contact used for checking whether power is supplied to the
servo amplifier. The output signal is the contact–b signal of the magnetic contactor, which controls the
power supplied to the main circuit of the servo amplifier. When power is not supplied to the main circuit,
the on signal is output.
Rating: 24 VDC, current between 10 mA and 0.3 A inclusive.
5. To use a separate regenerative discharge unit, connect the power pins of the cooling fan of the unit to these
terminals.

238
B–80525E/04 MAINTENANCE 5. SERVO AMPLIFIERS

Alarm LED Display


An alarm is displayed on a seven–segment LED display.
Name LED Description
Overvoltage alarm The DC power voltage of the main circuit of the servo amplifier is too high.
(HV)
Alarm message: Error code – 044

Low voltage alarm for The control power voltage (+5 V) of the servo amplifier is too low.
control power
(LV5V) Alarm message: Error code – 047

Low voltage alarm for The DC power voltage of the main circuit of the servo amplifier is too low.
DC link
(LVDC) Alarm message: Error code – 047

Regenerafive control The short–period regenerative discharge energy is high. This occurs when the regenera-
circuit alarm tive discharge circuit is defective.
(DCSW)
Alarm message: Error code – 043

Over regenerafive dis- The average regenerative discharge energy is high. This occurs when acceleration/de-
charge alarm celeration is applied frequently.
(DCOH) When the overheat signal of the transformer is connected, this alarm is issued if the
transformer overheats.
For the A06B–6066–H008, if the fuse for the fan blows, this alarm is issued.
Alarm message: Error code – 043
Amplifier over heating The thermostat of the servo amplifier was activated.
(OH)
Alarm message: Error code – 049

Deposition of magnet- A deposit is present on a contact of the magnetic contactor of the servo amplifier.
ic contactor
(MCC) Alarm message: Error code – 042

Overcarrent alarm An excessively high current was detected in the main circuit of the one–axis servo ampli-
(HCL) fier or the L–axis main circuit of the two–axis servo amplifier.

Alarm message: Error code – 045

Overcarrent alarm An excessively high current was detected in the M–axis main circuit of the two–axis ser-
(HCM) vo amplifier.

Alarm message: Error code – 045

Overcarrent alarm An excessively high current was detected in the L– and M–axis main circuits of the two–
(HCLM) axis servo amplifier.

Alarm message: Error code – 045

Amplifier The magnetic contactor of the servo amplifier is open. The motor is not ready to operate.
NOT READY

Amplifier READY The magnetic contactor of the servo amplifier is closed. The motor is ready to run.

Circuit Breaker
The circuit breaker opens if a current exceeding the rated operation
current of the breaker is detected in the servo amplifier. When the
circuit breaker is open, close it.
239
5. SERVO AMPLIFIERS MAINTENANCE B–80525E/04

5.5
SERVO AMPLIFIER
Servo amplifier unit (A06B–6089–H106)
UNIT
(A06B–6089–H106)

LED
No fuse braker

Terminal unit TI

240
B–80525E/04 MAINTENANCE 5. SERVO AMPLIFIERS

Servo amplifier unit (A06B–6089–H104, H105)

No fuse braker

Terminal unit TI

LED

241
5. SERVO AMPLIFIERS MAINTENANCE B–80525E/04

Servo amplifier unit (A06B–6089–H206, H208)

No fuse braker

Terminal unit TI

LED

242
B–80525E/04 MAINTENANCE 5. SERVO AMPLIFIERS

Setting

OFF ON
Switch

4
3
2
1
→ON

Set the switch as follows


1 ON
2 OFF
3 ON (In case of A06B–6089–H106, set switch OFF)
4 ON (In case of A06B–6089–H106, set switch OFF)

243
5. SERVO AMPLIFIERS MAINTENANCE B–80525E/04

Interface of the Servo–Amplifier Unit Terminal Block


The following table lists the interface signals of the terminal box of
the servo amplifier unit.
Terminal No. Symbol Description Remarks

1 PE (G) Amplifier ground


2 L1 (R) AC power input
(200 to 230 VAC)
3 L2 (S)
4 L3 (T)
7 RL1 Point of contact relay for
8 RL2 dynamic brake.

9 U Outputs to an AC motor
10 V
11 W
12 G Motor ground
13 L1C Control power inputs L1 (R) and L1C, and L2 (S) and L2C are usually con-
14 L2C (200 to 230 VAC) nected(Note 1).

15 TH1 Thermostat input signals Usually connected(Note 2).


16 TH2
17 RC For a regenerative resistor RC and RI are usually connected(Note 3).
18 RI
19 RE
20 UL Output to an AC motor These terminals are not prepared for 1 axis servo amplifier
21 VL unit.

22 WL
23 GL Motor ground
24 FAN1 Power for the cooling fan in Provided only for A06B–6089–H106(Note 4).
the separate regenerative dis-
25 FAN2 charge unit

NOTE
1 These terminals are used to input the power for controlling the servo amplifier. L2 (S) and L1C, as well
as L3 (T) and L2C are usually connected. R–J controller controls the control and power sections
separately.
2 To use a transformer or a separate regenerative discharge unit, remove the jumper plate, then connect
the transformer or the overheat signal of the separate regenerative discharge unit between the TH1 and
TH2 terminals of the servo amplifier.
3 To use a separate regenerative discharge unit, connect it between the RC and RE terminals.
4 To use a separate regenerative discharge unit, connect the power pins of the cooling fan of the unit to these
terminals.

Type LED indication Description


Overvoltage alarm This alarm is issued when the DC voltage of the main circuit power supply unit is abnor-
(HV) mally high.

244
B–80525E/04 MAINTENANCE 5. SERVO AMPLIFIERS

Control power supply This alarm is issued when the control power supply voltage is abnormally low.
undervoltage alarm
(LV)

DC link undervoltage This alarm is issued when the DC voltage of the main circuit power supply unit is abnor-
alarm (LVDC) mally low. This alarm is also issued when the circuit breaker has tripped.

Regenerative control This alarm is issued in any of the following cases:


circuit abnormality – When a very high regenerative discharge energy is output in a short time
alarm (DCSW) – When the regenerative discharge circuit is faulty

Excessive regenera- This alarm is issued in any of the following cases:


tive discharge alarm – When the average regenerative discharge energy is too high (for example, when the
(DCOH) frequency of acceleration/deceleration is too high)
– When a connected transformer is overheated
Dynamic brake circuit This alarm is issued when the relay contact for the dynamic brake has melted.
abnormality alarm
(DBRLY)

245
5. SERVO AMPLIFIERS MAINTENANCE B–80525E/04

Type LED indication Description


L–axis overcurrent This alarm is issued when an abnormally high current flows through the motor of the
alarm (HCL) L–axis.

M–axis overcurrent This alarm is issued when an abnormally high current flows through the motor of the
alarm (HCM) M–axis.

L/M–axis overcurrent This alarm is issued when an abnormally high current flows through the motors of the
alarm (HCLM) L–axis and M–axis.

L–axis IPM alarm This alarm is issued when the intelligent power module (IPM) of the L–axis detects an
(IPML) alarm.(*1)

M–axis IPM alarm This alarm is issued when the intelligent power module (IPM) of the M–axis detects an
(IPMM) alarm.(*1)

L/M–axis IPM alarm This alarm is issued when the intelligent power modules (IPMs) of the L–axis and M–axis
(IPMLM) detect an alarm.(*1)

Circuit breaker The circuit breaker is When an abnormal current exceeding the operating current of the circuit breaker flows,
set to off. the circuit breaker trips.

NOTE
1 The alarms detected by the IPM include:
– Overcurrent
– Overheat
– Decrease in IPM control power supply voltage
2 When the circuit breaker of the servo amplifier unit is set to
off, the DC link undervoltage alarm (LVDC) is issued.

246
B–80525E/04 MAINTENANCE 5. SERVO AMPLIFIERS

In the normal operating mode, the seven–segment LED on the front of the
servo amplifier provides the indications below.
Type LED indication Description
Amplifier not ready This indicates that the servo amplifier unit is not ready to drive the motor.

Amplifier ready This indicates that the servo amplifier unit is ready to drive the motor.

247
6. SETTING AND ADJUSTING
THE POWER SUPPLY MAINTENANCE B–80525E/04

6 SETTING AND ADJUSTING THE POWER SUPPLY

The power supply is factory-set for operation. Usually, the user need not
set or adjust it.
This chapter describes settings and adjustment required if a defective
power supply unit is replaced.

248
6. SETTING AND ADJUSTING
B–80525E/04 MAINTENANCE THE POWER SUPPLY

6.1
BLOCK DIAGRAM OF
THE POWER SUPPLY

Trans former Servo amplifier


210VAC Amplifier
Power input of Circuit
200 to 575VAC breaker 210VAC

Supply voltage to the transformer:


200 to 575 VAC

Power supply unit Robot

Fan
Motor

Brake

Pulse
Battery
coder

Emergency stop control


PC board

End
effector

Main CPU PC board

Process input/output
PC board

Teach pendant

Operator’s panel

Fig.6.1 (a) Block Diagram of the Power Supply (i cabinet)

249
6. SETTING AND ADJUSTING
THE POWER SUPPLY MAINTENANCE B–80525E/04

Trans former Servo amplifier

Power input of Circuit


200 to 575VAC breaker

Supply voltage to the transformer:


200 to 575 VAC

Fan

Power supply unit


Robot

Motor

Brake
Pulse
Battery coder

End
Emergency stop control
PC board effector

Main CPU PC board

Process input/output
PC board

Teach pendant

Operator’s panel

Fig.6.1 (b) Block Diagram of the Power Supply (B–Cabinet)

250
6. SETTING AND ADJUSTING
B–80525E/04 MAINTENANCE THE POWER SUPPLY

Servo amplifier
Trans former Amplifier

Power input of Circuit


200 to 575VAC breaker

Supply voltage to the transformer:


200 to 575 VAC

Power supply unit


Robot
Fan

Motor

Brake
Pulse
coder

Emergency stop control End


PC board effector

Conversion printed
board

Main CPU PC board

Process input/output
PC board

Teach pendant

Operator’s panel

Fig.6.1 (c) Block Diagram of the Power Supply (S–900)

251
6. SETTING AND ADJUSTING
THE POWER SUPPLY MAINTENANCE B–80525E/04

6.2 (i cabinet)
Select a transformer and tap according to the supply voltage. Select a
SELECTING transformer tap such that the supply voltage is +10% to –15% of the
TRANSFORMER induced voltage.
TAPS Supply voltage Specification Transformer specification
500 to 575 A80L–0026–0016
A05B–2350–H260
440 to 480 A80L–0024–0015
380 to 415 A80L–0026–0014
A05B–2350–H261
220 to 240 A80L–0024–0013
380 to 400 A80L–0026–0015
A05B–2350–H262
200 to 220 A80L–0024–0014

Transformer

Mounting locations of transformer

Voltage setting tap Core

Structure of transformer

252
6. SETTING AND ADJUSTING
B–80525E/04 MAINTENANCE THE POWER SUPPLY

Connect the tap according to the supply voltage.

(1) H260

Input voltage: 500–575V


Connect the cable from the circuit breaker to side A.
Input voltage: 440–480V
Connect the cable from the circuit breaker to side B.

(2) H261

Input voltage: 220–240


G1–L2, G2–L3, G3–L1
Input voltage: 380–415
G1–G2–G3

(3) H262

Input voltage: 200–220


G1–L2, G2–L3, G3–L1
Input voltage: 380–400
G1–G2–G3

253
6. SETTING AND ADJUSTING
THE POWER SUPPLY MAINTENANCE B–80525E/04

(B–cabinet)
Connect taps so that the supply voltage ranges from –15% to +10%,
relative to the tap voltage.

Transformer

(ARC Mate 100, ARC Mate 120, ARC Mate 100i, ARC Mate 120i, S–6, S–12, S–6i,
M–16i, S–420, S–500, S–700, S–800, S–900, M–500i, M–400i, M–710i, A–520)

(S–450, M–410i)

Connection of taps on the primary coil Connectio


Supply voltage
L1 L2 L3 Connection line n type
220 7 15 23 7–24, 15–8, 23–16 
240 6 14 22 6–24, 14–8, 22–16
380 7 15 23
415 6 14 22
460 5 13 21
Y
480 4 12 20 8–16–24
500 3 11 19
550 2 10 18
575 1 9 17

254
6. SETTING AND ADJUSTING
B–80525E/04 MAINTENANCE THE POWER SUPPLY

6.3 (a) Checking fuses F1 to F5


CHECKING THE LINE Check that the ratings of fuses F1 to F5 are as specified.
(b) Checking voltages
FILTER UNIT AND
When the line filter unit or transformer is replaced, check the
TRANSFORMER following voltages at the locations shown below. A high voltage is
applied to the line filter unit and transformer. Be careful not to touch
them when checking the voltages.
 Voltages between terminals 1 and 3, 1 and 5, and 3 and 5 of
magnetic contactor ALC (voltages: 210 VAC, supplied to the
servo amplifier)
 Voltage between terminals 43 and 44 of the terminal block
(voltage: 220 VAC, supplied to the control unit)
 Voltage between terminals 41 and 42 of the terminal block
(voltage: 100 VAC, supplied to the servo amplifier)

Line filter unit

  

Transformer

  

255
6. SETTING AND ADJUSTING
THE POWER SUPPLY MAINTENANCE B–80525E/04

Fig.6.3 (a) B–cabinet : ARC Mate 100, ARC Mate 120, ARC Mate 100i, ARC Mate 120i, S–6, S–12, M–6i,
M–16i, S–420i, S–500, S–700, S–800, S–900, M–500, M–400i, M–710i, A–520i

(B–Cabinet : S–450, M–410i)

Transformer

  

AC reactor

  

Fig.6.3 (b) Checking the line unit and transformer

256
6. SETTING AND ADJUSTING
B–80525E/04 MAINTENANCE THE POWER SUPPLY

6.4 The power supply unit need not be set or adjusted.


CHECKING THE
Table 6.4 Rating of the Power Supply Unit
POWER SUPPLY
Maximum
UNIT Output Rated voltage Tolerance
rated current
Remarks

+5V +5V "3% 25.6A

+15V +15V "5% 0.5A

–15V –15V "5% 0.7A

+24V +24V "10% 2.0A

+24E +24E "10% 2.5A


Power supply unit : A16B–1212–0871

Figs. 6.4(a) and 6.4(b) show the interface and block diagram of the power
supply unit respectively.

257
6. SETTING AND ADJUSTING
THE POWER SUPPLY
F1 :
7.5A fuse for
Fig.6.4(a) Interface of the Power Supply Unit

AC input

MAINTENANCE
Battery cover

Battery
258

PIL :
Green LED for
indicating the AC
power supply status

ALM :
Red LED for
indicating an alarm

F4 :
5A fuse for +24E

F3 :
fuse for +24V
5A
(Slow blow) (After the battery
cover is removed)

B–80525E/04
6. SETTING AND ADJUSTING
B–80525E/04 MAINTENANCE THE POWER SUPPLY

Fig.6.4(b) Block Diagram of the Power Supply Unit

259
7. REPLACING A UNIT MAINTENANCE B–80525E/04

7 REPLACING A UNIT

In the case of the i–cabinet, the top covers can be removed from the
cabinet. Removing the top covers facilitates the replacement of units
during maintenance. The top covers are removed as follows:

 Front top cover


 Loosen the screws and remove the side brackets which secure the top
covers.
 Open the door, then loosen the screws which secure the front top
cover (these screws are only finger–tight and do not require the use of
a tool to remove them).
 Remove the front top cover.

 

 

260
B–80525E/04 MAINTENANCE 7. REPLACING A UNIT

 Rear top cover


 Loosen the screws and remove the side brackets which secure the top
covers.
 Loosen the knurled screws and remove the rear louver.
 Loosen the three knurled screws which secure the rear top cover.
Remove the rear top cover.

261
7. REPLACING A UNIT MAINTENANCE B–80525E/04

7.1 When replacing a printed circuit board, take the following precautions:
REPLACING A (a) Before starting replacement, check that the power of the control-
ler is locked and tagged out.
PRINTED CIRCUIT
(b) When removing the printed circuit board, do not touch semicon-
BOARD ductor components on it and do not let the components touch oth-
er components.
(c) Check that the printed circuit board to be installed is correctly set
and adjusted.
(d) If required, correctly adjust the printed circuit board after replace-
ment.
(e) When replacing the backplane printed circuit board, power sup-
ply unit, or main CPU printed circuit board (including the mod-
ules), the parameters and data specified for the robot may be lost.
Before starting replacement, store the data in a storage device
such as the FANUC Handy File.
(f) Connect the cables removed for replacement to the original posi-
tions. If the markings are complicated, write them down before
removing the cables.
CAUTION
There is a possibility of data loss when a backplane–mounted
printed circuit board is replaced. Be sure to back up all program
and setup data on a floppy disk before proceeding.

CAUTION
When either the power supply or main CPU printed circuit
boards are removed from the controller,the data storage
battery is disconnected. All boards must be reinstalled properly
within half an hour to avoid data loss.

7.1.1 Ordering codes: A05B-2316-C105 (3-slot backplane printed circuit


board)
Replacing the
A05B-2316-C107 (2-slot backplane printed circuit board)
Backplane Printed A05B-2316-C111 (5-slot backplane printed circuit board)
Circuit Board
(a) When replacing the backplane printed circuit board, remove the
entire rack. Remove the power supply unit and printed circuit
board following the procedure described in Section 7.1.2.
(b) Remove the ground cable from the backplane printed circuit
board.
(c) Loosen the two screws fastening the rack at the top. Then remove
the two screws fastening the rack at the bottom and replace the
rack.

262
B–80525E/04 MAINTENANCE 7. REPLACING A UNIT

Backplane
printed circuit
board

Nuts or screws (depending on the cabinet)

i cabinet M5 nuts A30L–0010–0050#M5


B cabinet M5 screws A6–SW2NA–5X12S

Fig.7.1.1 (a) Replacing the Backplane Printed Circuit Board

263
7. REPLACING A UNIT MAINTENANCE B–80525E/04

Main CPU P.C board

Battery
(A98L–0031–0012)

Fig.7.1.1 (b) Connection of Battery

264
B–80525E/04 MAINTENANCE 7. REPLACING A UNIT

7.1.2
Replacing the Power (a) Turn the power off and remove the cable from the power supply
Supply Unit or a unit or printed circuit board to be replaced.
Printed Circuit Board (b) Hold the handles at the top and bottom of the front panel of the
on the Backplane power supply unit or printed circuit board. The latches of the con-
trol unit rack are released. Holding the handles in this state, pull
Printed Circuit Board out the unit or printed circuit board.
(c) Insert a new power supply unit or printed circuit board into the
slot of the control unit rack. Carefully push it into the slot until
the front panel is latched at the top and bottom.

Name Ordering code


Power supply unit A16B-1212-0871
Main CPU printed circuit board A16B-3200-0040
Process input/output printed circuit
board A16B-2201-0470, 0472, 0480

Additional axis control printed cir-


cuit board A16B-2202-0820

Main CPU printed circuit board (NOTE1)

Power supply unit (NOTE2)


Precess input/output printed circuit board CA,
CB or DA or additional axis control printed
circuit board (If five slots are provided on the
backplane, the process I/O printed circuit
board and additional axis control printed circuit
board can be mounted simultaneously.)

Fig.7.1.2 Replacing the Power Supply Unit and Printed Circuit Board on the Backplane Printed Circuit Board

265
7. REPLACING A UNIT MAINTENANCE B–80525E/04

7.1.3 Specification : A16B–3200–0230


Replacing the (a) Open the operation box door, then disconnect the cables from the
process I/O EA process I/O printed circuit board.
printed circuit board (b) Remove the two M5 huts which secure the process I/O printed
circuit board, then replace the board.

M5 nut (x 2)
A30L–0010–0050#M5

7.2
REPLACING A (1) Move the latches at both ends of the module socket toward the
outside. The spring of the contact tilts the module. (See Fig. 7.2 (a).)
MODULE
(2) If the tilted module touches the next module, it may be difficult to
remove it. In this case, release the latches of the next module as
described in step (1) above.
(3) Now the module is free in the socket. Pull out the module carefully
in a straight line. Do not pull it out in an arc. The contact of the socket
or module may be damaged.
(4) Install a new module in the socket at an angle. Push it into the socket
until the bottom of the module reaches the bottom of the socket
groove. (See Fig. 7.2 (b).)
(5) Push the module in the top edge so that the module stands upright.
(See Fig. 7.2 (c).)

266
B–80525E/04 MAINTENANCE 7. REPLACING A UNIT

(6) Check that the module is latched properly at both ends of the socket.
If it is insufficiently latched, the electrical contact may be improper
and a malfunction may occur.

Fig.7.2 (a)

Pin 1

Fig.7.2 (b)

Fig.7.2 (c)
267
7. REPLACING A UNIT MAINTENANCE B–80525E/04

Fig.7.2 (d)

Mounting locations of the modules

CMOS module

Flush ROM module DRAM module

Axis module (J1, J2)

Axis module (J3, J4)

Axis module (J5, J6)

Main CPU printed


circuit board

Fig.7.2 (e) Mounting locations of the modules

Name Specification
Axis module A20B–2902–0060 or
A20B–2902–0070
Flush ROM module A20B–2902–0370
A20B–2902–0371
A20B–2902–0372
A20B–2902–0373
DRAM module A20B–2902–0021
A20B–2902–0020 or A20B–2902–0531
A20B–2900–0650 or A20B–2902–0530
CMOS module A20B–2902–0211
A20B–2902–0210
A20B–2902–0380

268
B–80525E/04 MAINTENANCE 7. REPLACING A UNIT

7.3 To replace the distributed I/O (Model B) interface unit, perform the
following steps:
REPLACING THE I/O
UNIT MODEL B  Unplug the cables from the upper left corner of the interface module.
INTERFACE UNIT  Unplug the cables from the bracket of the interface module adapter
plate.
 Remove the nuts holding the interface module adapter plate to the
controller wall and remove the plate from the controller.
Disconnect the wiring harness from the interface unit. If
necessary,mark the wires so that they can be connected to the new
unit in the proper places.

Remove the nuts holding the interface module to the adapter plate
and remove the module from the plate.
Install the new interface module by performing these steps in reverse
order.

Mounting location of I/O unit model B interface unit


(i cabinet)

Mounting hole

I/O unit model B interface unit


(with metal mounting plate)

Fig.7.3 (a) Replacing I/O unit MODEL B Interface unit

269
7. REPLACING A UNIT MAINTENANCE B–80525E/04

I/O unit model B


interface unit

I/O unit model B


basic unit

Mounting location of I/O unit model B (B–cabinet)

I/O unit model B


interface unit

I/O unit model B


basic unit

Mounting location of I/O unit model B (Cabinet for M–410i)

Fig.7.3 (b) Replacing I/O unit MODEL B Interface unit

270
B–80525E/04 MAINTENANCE 7. REPLACING A UNIT

7.4
REPLACING THE
INPUT/OUTPUT UNIT
OF MODEL A

7.4.1
Replacing the Base  Remove the I/O modules from the base unit.
Unit of the  Loosen the upper two mounting screws.
Input/Output Unit of
 Remove the lower two mounting screws and replace the base unit.
Model A
Ordering code: A03B–0807–J002

Fig.7.4.1 Replacing the Base Unit of the Input/Output Unit of Model A

271
7. REPLACING A UNIT MAINTENANCE B–80525E/04

7.4.2 An interface module and input/output module can be easily installed in


Replacing a Module and removed from the base unit, as described below.
Removing the Interface
Module  Turn off and lock out the controller.
 Disconnect the signal and power cables from the interface module.
 Press the latch on the bottom of the module and rotate the module
toward you and up.
Installing the Interface
Module  Turn off and lock out the controller.
 Engage the hook at the top rear of the module with the bar above the
base unit socket.
 Rotate the module downward until the latch engages.
Reconnect the signal and power cables to the interface module.
Removing an I/O Module
 Turn off and lock out the controller.
 Remove the wiring harness block.(See Fig.7.4.2.)
(a) Lift the latch at the lower left corner of the module window.
(b) Rotate the block toward you and down.
 press the latch on the bottom of the module and rotate the module
toward you and up.(See Fig.7.4.2.)
Installing an I/O Module
 Turn off and lock out the controller.
 Engage the hook at the top read of the module with the bar above the
base unit socket.
 Rotate the module downward until the latch engages.

Fig.7.4.2 Replacing the module


272
B–80525E/04 MAINTENANCE 7. REPLACING A UNIT

7.5 To remove a distributed I/O (Model B) unit mounted on a DIN


rail,perform the following steps:
MOUNTING I/O UNIT
MODEL B ON THE
DIN RAIL (USE A RAIL
THAT IS 3.5MM WIDE
AND 7.5MM HIGH.)

7.5.1
The DIN Rail is in the  Disconnect the wiring harness from the unit. If necessary,mark the
Operator’s Box. wires so that they can be connected to the new unit in the proper
places.
 Remove the screws holding the retainer plates to the unit and remove
the retainer plates.
 Slide the unit upward and lift it out of the DIN rail.

Metal support for direct installation


DIN rail or installation on the DIN rail

(b) (b)

Basic unit

(a) (a)

Metal support for installation on the DIN rail

To install a distributed I/O(Model B)unit mounted on a DIN rail,perform


the following steps:
 Hook the lower tabs of the I/O unit mounting brackets over the lower
lip of the DIN rail.
 Lay the I/O unit in the DIN rail.
 Slide the I/O unit downward. The upper tabs of the mounting
brackets will engage the upper lip of the DIN rail.
Position the retainer plates over the mounting brackets and install the
screws.

Reconnect the wiring harness.
273
7. REPLACING A UNIT MAINTENANCE B–80525E/04

7.6 (i cabinet)
Ordering code
REPLACING THE
Ordering code
TRANSFORMER Supply voltage Machine
for transformer
ARC Mate 100, ARC Mate 120,
ARC Mate 120i, S−6, S−12,
500 to 575 A80L−0026−0016
M−16i, S−420i, S−500, S−700,
A−520i, S−710i, M−400i
440 to 480 M−410i A80L−0026−0016#B
ARC Mate 100i, M−6i A80L−0024−0015
ARC Mate 100, ARC Mate 120,
ARC Mate 120i, S−6, S−12,
380 to 415 A80L−0026−0014
M−16i, S−420i, S−500, S−700,
A−520i, M−710i, M−400i
220 to 240 M−410i A80L−0026−0014#B
ARC Mate 100i, M−6i A80L−0024−0013
ARC Mate 100, ARC Mate 120,
ARC Mate 120i, S−6, S−12,
380 to 400 A80L−0026−0015
M−16i, S−420i, S−500, S−700,
A−520i, M−710i, M−400i
200 to 220 M−410i A80L−0026−0015#B
ARC Mate 100i, M−6i A80L−0024−0014

Supply voltage Machine Ordering code


for line filter
200 to 220 ARC Mate 100i, M−6i A81L−0001−0137

 Lock out and tag out power to the robot.


 Disconnect the cables connecting the controller to the robot.
 Remove the controller cabinet from the robot using the quick change
procedure described in Section 4.10.

WARNING
Support the front module of the controller before disengaging
the latches. Otherwise,the module could fall and injure
personnel and damage equipment.

Remove the front module of the controller by disengaging the four


latches.

Disconnect the cable from the voltage setting tap.
Remove the voltage setting tap and its plate from the cabinet.
Remove the nuts securing the transformer.
Remove the transformer.

274
B–80525E/04 MAINTENANCE 7. REPLACING A UNIT

Transformer

Fig.7.6 (a) Mounting location of transformer (1/2)

Voltage setting tap M6 nut and ground washer

M6 nut

Fig.7.6 (a) Mounting location of transformer (2/2)

(B cabinet)
Table7.6 Specifications of Line Filter Unit and Transformer (B cabinet)

Unit Applicable robot model Specification No.


All models A81L–0001–0128
S–800, M–500 A81L–0001–0112
Line filter unit
S–450 A81L–0001–0130
M–410i (B–cabinet) A81L–0001–0129
A80L–0026–0010#D
S–420i, S–500 or
M–710i, M–400i A80L–0026–0013#B
(Note1)
ARC Mate 120, S–700,
S–12, A–520i,
A80L–0024–0010#F
Transformer ARC Mate 100i, ARC Mate
120i, M–6i, M–16i
ARC Mate 100, S–6 A80L–0022–0007#D
S–800, M–500 A80L–0026–0010#A
S–450 A80L–0026–0018
M–410i (B–cabinet) A80L–0026–0017

275
7. REPLACING A UNIT MAINTENANCE B–80525E/04

Unit Applicable robot model Specification No.


A81L–0001–0112 (Main cabinet)
Line filter unit S–900 (Note2) A81L–0001–0116
(Additional cabinet)
A81L–0026–0010#A
(Main cabinet)
Transformer S–900 (Note2)
A81L–0024–0011
(Additional cabinet)

NOTE
1 Input voltage: 220, 380, 400, 415, 460, 480, 500, or 575 V for
A80L–0026–0010#D
220, 380, 480, or 575 V for A80L–0026–0013#B
2 In case of S–900, Line filter unit or Transformer is installed in
both of Main locker and Additional locker.

Specifications: See Table 7.6.


 Turn off and lock out the controller.
 Remove the acrylic covers from the transformer and ALC relay.
 Disconnect the wiring harnesses and ground wire from the
transformer.
Disconnect the three wires from the bottom of the ALC relay.

After removing the eight screws fastening the transformer,remove
the transformer. Put a new transformer on the rail in the controller and
push it into the controller along the rail. Then reinstall the screws.
Reconnect the wires and harnesses.
Reinstall the acrylic covers.

Eight M5 mounting screws

Fig.7.6 (b) Replacing the Line Filter Unit or Transformer


276
B–80525E/04 MAINTENANCE 7. REPLACING A UNIT

7.7 For ARC Mate 100, ARC Mate 120, ARC Mate 100i, ARC Mate 120i,
S–6, S–12, M–6i, M–16i, S–420i, S–500, S–700, M–400i, M–710i,
REPLACING A A–520i
SERVO AMPLIFIER Ordering code : A06B–6076–H001 to H005 or A06B–6076–H101 to
H106
 Disconnect all wires,cables,and harnesses from the servo amplifier.
If necessary,mark each wire,cable,and harness so that it can be
correctly connected to the new servo amplifier when it is installed.
 Remove the four mounting nuts from the servo amplifier.
 Lift the servo amplifier off of the studs and out of the cabinet.

277
7. REPLACING A UNIT MAINTENANCE B–80525E/04

For S–450 or M–410i


 Disconnect all wires,cables,and harnesses from the servo amplifier.
If necessary,mark each wire,cable,and harness so that it can be
correctly connected to the new servo amplifier when it is installed.
 Remove the mounting screws from the servo amplifier.
 Remove the servo amplifier from the cabinet.

Power supply module Servo module (1) Servo module (2)

Power supply module


Robot model Drawing No.
M–410i A06B–6087–H115
S–450 A06B–6077–H111

Servo module (1)


Robot model Drawing No.
M–410i A06B–6079–H106
S–450 A06B–6079–H206
A06B–6079–H207

278
B–80525E/04 MAINTENANCE 7. REPLACING A UNIT

Servo module (2)


Robot model Drawing No.
M–410i A06B–6079–H103
S–450 A06B–6079–H101 or
A06B–6079–H104

For S–800, S–900, M–500


 Disconnect all wires,cables,and harnesses from the servo amplifier.
If necessary,mark each wire,cable,and harness so that it can be
correctly connected to the new servo amplifier when it is installed.
 Remove the mounting screws from the servo amplifier.
 Remove the servo amplifier from the cabinet.

A06B–6066–H008 A06B–6066–H006
A06B–6089–H106 A06B–6089–H104
A06B–6089–H105
A06B–6089–H206
A06B–6089–H208

279
7. REPLACING A UNIT MAINTENANCE B–80525E/04

7.8 Ordering code : See follwing table


REPLACING THE (a) Open the door of the operator box and remove the clamp plate
from the cable inlet. (two M4 screws)
OPERATOR’S BOX
(b) Disconnect all cables from the operator box and replace the oper-
ator box.
(c) To replace only the operator box printed circuit board, replace it
together with its mounting plate.
(d) Disconnect the cable from the operator box printed circuit board,
remove the four nuts securing the metal plate, then replace the
operator box printed circuit board.
Table Operator’s Box
Specifications Indications in Remarks
A05B–2350–C029 English I/O Unit Model A and Model B can be mounted.
A05B–2350–C023 I/O Unit Model B can be mounted.
Japanese
A05B–2350–C026 I/O Unit Model A and Model B can be mounted.
A05B–2350–C037 English Only for ARC Mate 100i
A05B–2350–C038 Japanese Only for ARC Mate 100i

Operator’s box (option)

M5 nuts (4pieces)
A30L–0010–0050#M5

280
B–80525E/04 MAINTENANCE 7. REPLACING A UNIT

Replacing the operator’s panel


Specifications: A05B–2351–C020 (panel with Japanese legends)
A05B–2351–C021 (panel with English legends)
(a) Disconnect the cable connected to the operator panel
(b) Remove the six nuts securing the panel, then replace the panel.
(c) When only the operator–panel printed circuit board is to be re-
placed, replace it together with the attached metal sheet.
(d) Disconnect the cable connected to the operator–panel printed cir-
cuit board. Remove the four nuts securing the metal sheet, then
replace the board.

Operator’s panel (rear)

Four M4 nuts
A30L–0010–0050#M4

281
7. REPLACING A UNIT MAINTENANCE B–80525E/04

7.9 Ordering code: See Table 7.9.


REPLACING THE After removing the cable from the teach pendant, replace the teach
pendant.
TEACH PENDANT

Fig.7.9 Replacing the Teach Pendant

Table7.9 Ordering Codes for the Teach Pendants


Ordering code Use Remarks
A05B-2301-C300 Spot welding English
A05B-2301-C301 Material handling
A05B-2301-C302 Arc welding
A05B-2301-C303 Sealing
A05B-2301-C305 General use
A05B-2301-C310 Spot welding Japanese
A05B-2301-C311 Material handling
A05B-2301-C312 Arc welding
A05B-2301-C313 Sealing
A05B-2301-C315 General use

282
B–80525E/04 MAINTENANCE 7. REPLACING A UNIT

7.10 Ordering code: A90L-0001-0378 (for a two–slot rack, one for one unit)
A90L–0001–0385#A (for a one–slot rack, two for one unit)
REPLACING THE
(1) Replace the control unit printed circuit board placed below the fan
FAN MOTOR OF THE motor to be replaced, following the procedure described in Section
CONTROL UNIT 7.1.2.
(2) The cable suspended from the fan motor is connected to the backplane
printed circuit board which is mounted deep in the slot. Holding the
connector, remove the cable from the backplane printed circuit board.
(3) Open the lid at the top of the control unit rack. The lid can be opened
by placing the tip of a flat-blade screwdriver into the center hole at the
front of the lid and moving the screwdriver like a lever in the direction
of (3) in Fig. 7.9 to release the latch.
(4) Fully open the lid and take the fan motor out. As the fan motor is not
screwed to the rack, it can be removed easily.
(5) Install a new fan motor. Suspend the cable through the hole at the
back of the rack.
(6) Close the lid until it is latched.
(7) Connect the cable of the fan motor to the connector on the backplane
printed circuit board. Suspend the center of the cable on the hook in
the back of the rack.
(8) Install the removed control unit printed circuit board following the
procedure described in Section 7.1.2.

283
7. REPLACING A UNIT MAINTENANCE B–80525E/04

(3)

(4)

Fan motor

Cable

Connector

Back plane

Fig.7.10 Replacing the Fan Motor

284
B–80525E/04 MAINTENANCE 7. REPLACING A UNIT

7.11 When a fuse inside the control unit has blown, troubleshoot, take a proper
corrective action, and replace the fuse.
REPLACEMENT OF
FUSES

7.11.1 F1, F2, F3: Fuses for input voltage


Transformer, line filter F4, F5: Fuses for 100 VAC
unit Fuse No. Model Rating Specification
F1, F2, F3 ARC Mate 120, S–12, S–420i,
S–500, S–700, S–800, S–900,
M–710i, ARC Mate 100i, ARC Mate 30A A60L–0001–0358#JSIF–30
120i, M–6i, M–16i, S–450, M–410i,
M–500, M–400i
ARC Mate 100, ARC Mate 100i,
20A A60L–0001–0042#JSI–20
S–6
F4, F5 S–420i, S–500, S–800, ARC Mate
120, ARC Mate 120i, S–12, S–700,
S–900 ARC Mate 100i, M–6i, 5A A60L–0001–0101#P450H
M–16i, M–710i, M–500, M–400i,
S–450, M–410i
ARC Mate 100, S–6, A–520i 3.5A A60L–0001–0101#P435H

(B–cabinet: ARC Mate 100, ARC Mate 120, ARC Mate 100i, ARC Mate 120i, S–6, S–12, M–6i, M–16i, S–420i, S–500, S–700, S–900,
S–800, M–500, M–710i, A–520i) Fuse Fuse Fuse

Fuses

Transformer
Line filter
(B–cabinet: S–450, M–410i)
Fuse Fuse Fuse Fuse

Transformer AC reactor

285
7. REPLACING A UNIT MAINTENANCE B–80525E/04

NOTE
Turn off the main breaker before replacing a fuse.

Fig.7.11 Replacing Fuses on Transformer/Line Filter Unit

If a fuse blows in the control unit, examine the cause and take action to
eliminate the cause. Then replace the fuse.

7.11.2 FUSE1 : For detecting a ground on the thermostat


F1, F2 : For protecting a servo amplifier internal circuit
Servo Amplifier
Fuse No. Rated current Ordering code
FUSE1 0.3A A60L–0001–0175#0.3A

F1, F2 2A A60L–0001–0245#GP20

Fuse1

Fuse F1 Fuse F2

Fig.7.11.2 Replacing a fuse

286
B–80525E/04 MAINTENANCE 7. REPLACING A UNIT

Power supply module


F1 : Fuse for AC input
Fuse No. Rated current Ordering code
F1 2A A60L–0001–0295

F2 2A A60L–0001–GP20

7.11.3
Replacing Fuses (1) Make sure that the recharge–under–way LED (red) is off.
The recharge–under–way LED (red) is at the center of terminal board
TB1. Open the cover at the top of the module, and check the LED.

For M–410i

TB1 Recharge–under–way LED

For S–450

Recharge–under–way LED

(2) Remove the face plate.

287
7. REPLACING A UNIT MAINTENANCE B–80525E/04

For M–410i Face plate

Remove the face


plate by inserting
the tip of a flat–
blade screwdriv-
er at the hooks
(six) on the face
plate.

For S–450 Face plate

Remove the
face plate by
inserting the
tip of a flat–
blade screw-
driver at the
hooks (four)
on the face
plate.

(3) Remove connector PCB.

For M–410i
Remove the self–tapping screws holding
down connector PCB, and shift it in the direc-
tion indicated with an arrow (left) to remove
the printed–circuit board.

Connector PCB

288
B–80525E/04 MAINTENANCE 7. REPLACING A UNIT

(4) Remove the case

For M–410i
Screws (eight) Flange surface

Remove the screws


(eight) fastening the
Fan cases, and remove
the case by pulling it
off the flange sur-
Heat face.
sink Case

For S–450

Case 1 Case 2
(chassis) (cover)
 

Remove the screws fastening


the case and the screws (5 x
M4) holding down the terminal
board.

(5) Replace the fuses according to the figure below.

F1

Fig. 7.12 Locations of the Fuses

289
7. REPLACING A UNIT MAINTENANCE B–80525E/04

Servo module
Fuse No. Rated current Ordering code
F2 3.2A A60L–0001–0290#LM32C

F2 : For control power supply

Fuse2

290
B–80525E/04 MAINTENANCE 7. REPLACING A UNIT

Servo amplifer
F1 Fuse for control power supply
Specification A60L–0001–0175#3.2A (A06B–6066–H006)–,
A60L–0001–0359 (A06B–6089–H104,
H105, H106, H206, H208)
F2, F3 Fuse for Fan motor (A06B–6066–H008 only)
Specification A60L–0001–0101# P405H
F2 Fuse for Fan motor (A06B–6089–H106 only)
Specification A60L–0001–0359

(A06B–6066–H008)

Fuse F1
Fuse F1

Fuse F2 F3
(A06B–6089–H106)

F1

F2

291
7. REPLACING A UNIT MAINTENANCE B–80525E/04

7.11.4 F1 : Fuse for AC input


Power Supply Unit F3 : Fuse for +24V
F4 : Fuse for +24E
Fuse No. Rated current Ordering code
F1 7.5A A60L−0001−0245#GP75

F3 5A A60L−0001−0075#5.0

F4 5A A60L−0001−0046#5.0

F1 : 7.5A
fuse for AC input

F3 : 5AS (slow–blow)
fuse for +24V

F4 : 5A
fuse for +24E

Fig.7.11.4 Power Supply Unit

292
B–80525E/04 MAINTENANCE 7. REPLACING A UNIT

Emergency stop control printed board


F1 : Fuse for brake power supply
F2 : Fuse for +23E
Fuse No. Rated current Ordering code
F1 5A A60L−0001−0046#5.0

F2 0.32A A60L−0001−0046#0.32

Fuse2

Fuse1

293
7. REPLACING A UNIT MAINTENANCE B–80525E/04

Conversion printed board


FUSE : Fuse for brake power supply
Fuse No. Rated current Ordering code
FUSE 5A A60L−0001−0046#5.0

Fuse

294
B–80525E/04 MAINTENANCE 7. REPLACING A UNIT

7.11.5 FUSE1 : 2.0-A fuse for +24V


Process Input/Output Ordering code : A60L-0001-0046#2.0
Printed Circuit Boards
CA, CB, DA and EA

Fuse

Process input/output
printed circuit board CA, CB, and DA

Fuse

Process input/output printed circuit board EA

Fig.7.11.5 Replacing the Fuse of the Process Input/Output Printed Circuit


Board CA, CB, or DA

295
7. REPLACING A UNIT MAINTENANCE B–80525E/04

7.12 If used for a long time, a relay’s contacts may fail to provide a satisfactory
connection or may weld together. If this occurs, replace the relay as
REPLACING A described below:
RELAY printed circuit board for emergency stop control
RLY2 : To disconnect the MCC in the event of an emergency
stop
Ordering code : A58L–0001–0192#1509A
RLY6 : To disconnect the standby charging line in the event
of an emergency stop
Ordering code : A58L–0001–0422#3232K

Relay

Fig.7.12 Printed Circuit Board for emergency stop board

296
B–80525E/04 MAINTENANCE 7. REPLACING A UNIT

Emergency–stop control printed circuit board


RL1: Used for cutting off the reserved charging power (200 VAC)
upon an emergency stop
RL2: Used for cutting off MCC (200 VAC) upon an emergency stop
RL3: Used for cutting off the brake power (100 VAC) upon an
emergency stop
RL4, RL5, and RL6: Used for controlling the brake
Fuse No. Ordering code
RL1 A58L−0001−0422#3232K

RL2 A58L−0001−0192#1509A

RL3, RL4, RL5, RL6 A58L−0001−0192#1472R

Relay

297
7. REPLACING A UNIT MAINTENANCE B–80525E/04

Conversion printed circuit board (S–900) A16B–1212–0910

Relay

RL1 : For control brake


Ordering number A58L–0001–0192#1472R

298
B–80525E/04 MAINTENANCE 7. REPLACING A UNIT

7.13
REPLACING THE (1) Use a lithium battery (ordering drawing number: A98L-0031-0012).
(2) Turn on the R-J2. (The battery can be replaced when the power is
BATTERY
turned on and off. If the power is turned off, the battery must be
replaced within 30 minutes. If the power is turned off and the battery
is removed for 30 minutes or more, the contents of the memory on the
main CPU printed circuit board may be lost.)
(3) Remove the battery case from the front panel of the power supply
unit. The case can be removed easily by holding the top and bottom
of it and pulling.

Front panel of the


power supply unit

Battery case

ÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏ
Battery
(ordering drawing number : A98L–0031–0012)

Fig.7.13 (a) Replacing the Battery (1)

(4) Remove the connector from the battery.

BATTERY Cable connector

ÏÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏ
ÏÏÏÏÏ Battery

printed circuit panel of the


power supply unit

Fig.7.13 (b) Replacing the Battery (2)

(5) Replace the battery and reconnect the connector.


(6) Install the battery case.
(7) Turn off the R-J2.
299
III CONNECTIONS

Page2
III CONNECTIONS
B–80525E/04 CONNECTIONS 1. GENERAL

1 GENERAL

This section describes the electrical interface connections in the R-J2. It


also includes information about installation of the R-J2.

303
2. BLOCK DIAGRAM CONNECTIONS B–80525E/04

2 BLOCK DIAGRAM

Fig. 2 is a block diagram of electrical interface connections with the R-J2.

R-J2
Pneumatic pressure source

Mechanical unit End effector

Teach pendant (Note 4)


Operator’s box
or
operator’s panel (RS-232-C) (Note 2)

FANUC Handy File

Peripheral device A

Peripheral device B

Welder

(RS-232-C) (Note 3)

(RS-422/485) (Note 3)

AC power source

(Note 1) : Indicates electrical connection.


: Indicates mechanical connection.
(Note 2) A remote display is connected.
For more information, contact our service section.
(Note 3) Optional RS–232–C or RS–422/485 interface.
For more information, contact our service section.
(Note 4) The teach pendant can be connected in either of two ways:
1. Through the operator’s box (I–cabinet)
2. Directly to the control unit (B–cabinet)
For more information, contact our service section.

Fig.2 Block Diagram of Electrical Interface Connection

304
B–80525E/04 CONNECTIONS 3. ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS

3 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS

3.1
CONNECTION Fig. 3.1 (a) and 3.1 (e) show mechanical connection diagrams.
DIAGRAM BETWEEN
MECHANICAL UNITS

R–J2 Robot

CRF3 Pulse coder


(Pulse coder signal) J1/J2/J3

CRF4 Pulse coder


(Pulse coder signal) J4/J5/J6

Motor power
J1

Motor power
J2/J3

Servo amplifier
terminal frame
Motor power
J4/J5/J6

CN6
Motor brake
(Brake control)
CRM11
Limit switch
(ROT)
CRM10
End effector
(RDI/RDO)

(Note) This cable is not included. It must be supplied by the customer.

Fig.3.1 (a) Mechanical Connection Diagram (i cabinet:ARC Mate100, ARC Mate120, ARC Mate 100i, ARC Mate 120i, S–6,
S–12, M–6i, M–16i, S–420i, S–500, S–700, M–400i, M–710i, A–520i)

305
3. ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS CONNECTIONS B–80525E/04

Robot

Pulse coder
End effector
(Pulse coder signal)
Note 1

Servo amplifier Motor power M1


terminal
Motor brake
Servo amplifier Motor power M2
terminal

(Brake control)

Welder
Note 2

(Note 1) This cable is not included. It must be supplied by customer.


(Note 2) It is able to connect for S–500 and S–700.

Fig.3.1 (b) Mechanical Connection Diagram (B cabinet : S–420i/S–450/S–500/S–700/S–800/S–900/M–400i/M–710i)

Robot

Pulse coder
End effector
(Pulse coder signal)

Note 1

Servo amplifier Motor power M1


terminal
Motor brake

(Brake control)

Welder
Note 2

(Note 1) This cable is not included. It must be supplied by customer.


(Note 2) It is able to connect for ARC Mate100, ARC Mate120 and ARC Mate 100i.

Fig.3.1 (c) Mechanical connection Diagram


(B cabinet : S–6/S–12/ARC Mate100/ARC Mate120, ARC Mate 100i/M–6i, ARC Mate 120i/M–16i, A–520i)

306
B–80525E/04 CONNECTIONS 3. ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS

Robot

Pulse coder
(Pulse coder signal)

End effector

Note 1
Limit switch

Motor power J1

Motor power J2
Servo amplifier
terminal frame
Motor power J3

Motor power J4

Motor brake
(Brake control)

(Note 1) This cable is not included. It must be supplied by the customer.

Fig.3.1 (d) Mechanical Connection Diagram (M–410i)

307
3. ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS CONNECTIONS B–80525E/04

Robot

Pulse coder
End effector
(Pulse coder signal)

Note 1

Servo amplifier Motor power M1


terminal frame
Motor brake
Servo amplifier Motor power M2
terminal frame

(Brake control)

(Note 1) This cable is not included. It must be supplied by the customer.

Fig.3.1 (e) Mechanical Connection Diagram (M–500)

308
B–80525E/04 CONNECTIONS 3. ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS

R–J2

CRS1
(Main CPU) Teach pendant

TEACH PENDANT
(Operator’s box) (Note 1)

CRM2 (Note 2)
Peripheral device
(Process I/O)

Port 1 (Note 3) FANUC


(Operator’s box Handy File
or operator’s panel)

JD17 (Note 4, Note 5)


External device
(Main CPU)

U
Disconnect switch V
W Input power
or Braker G

PC board EX–ON (Note 4) External power


for operator’s box EX–COM
(TBOP2) EX–OFF ON/OFF swich

PC board EMGIN1 (Note 4) External emergency


for operator’s box EMGIN2 stop swich
(TBOP1)

(Note 1) The teach pendant can be connected in either of two ways:


1. Through the operator’s box or operator’s panel
2. Directly to the control unit
For more information, contact our service section.
(Note 2) For more information about connection of peripheral devices,
see the description of the peripheral device interface in this manual.
(Note 3) This cable is provided with the FANUC Handy File.
(Note 4) Not included. Must be supplied by the customer.
(Note 5) For details of connecting on external device interface to enable expansion, refer to
the section explaining on external device interface.

Fig.3.1 (f) Mechanical Connection Diagram

309
3. ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS CONNECTIONS B–80525E/04

3.2
EXTERNAL CABLE
WIRING DIAGRAM

3.2.1
Robot Connection (In case of combined type ARC Mate 100i, M–6i, S–420i, M–710i)
Cables
ARC Mate 100i, M–6i,
M–710i, S–420i

Pulse coder

RDI/O.HBK

Motor power/
brake

310
B–80525E/04 CONNECTIONS 3. ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS

Details of cable connection to the servo amplifier

R–J2
Robot
PC board for
PC board for ARC Mate 100i,
AMP emergency
main CPU ARC Mate 120i,
stop control M–6i, M–16i,
S–420i, M–710i
5U 6U CRF3
5V 6V
5W 6W
CN6 CRM10 CRF4
3U 4U G
3V 4V G
3W 4W G

1U 2U G
1V 2V G
1W 2W G

Pulse coder
J1/J2/J3
J4/J5/J6
RDI/O.HBK
Motor brake
White Motor power
J1M
Black
J2M
Green
J3M
White J4M
Black J5M
Green J6M

Note) The motor power cables have connectors of different colors to


prevent incorrect connection.

Connector name Color


J1M White
J2M Black
J3M Green
J4M White
J5M Black
J6M Green

Fig.3.2.1 (a) Robot Connection Cables


(Combined type ARC Mate 100i, ARC Mate 120i, M–6i, M–16i, S–420i, M–710i)

311
3. ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS CONNECTIONS B–80525E/04

(In case of separate type S–420i, M–710i)

Emergency
stop control
Robot S–420i, M–710i

Pulse coder

RP1

Motor power/brake
RM1

RM2

Main CPU PC board


CRM10
Servo amplifier
CN6

312
B–80525E/04 CONNECTIONS 3. ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS

Details of cable connection to the servo amplifier

R–J2 Robot S–420i, M–710i


PC board for
AMP PC board for
emergency
main CPU stop control

Pulse coder
RP1
(Pulse coder, RDI/RDO
HBK, ROT)
Motor power/brake
RM1

RM2

Note) The motor power cables have connectors of different colors to


prevent incorrect connection.

Connector name Color


J1M White
J2M Black
J3M Green
J4M White
J5M Black
J6M Green

Fig.3.2.1 (b) Robot Connection Cable (Separate type S–420i, M–710i)

313
3. ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS CONNECTIONS B–80525E/04

(In case of separate type S–6, S–12, ARC Mate100, ARC Mate120, ARC
Mate 120i, ARC Mate 100i, M–6i, M–16i)

PC board for emergency


stop control
Robot
S–6
S–12
M–16i
ARC Mate 100
ARC Mate 120
ARC Mate 100i
ARC Mate 120i

Pulse coder

RP1

Motor power/brake
RM1

Main CPU PC board


CRM10
Servo amplifier
CN6

314
B–80525E/04 CONNECTIONS 3. ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS

Details of cable connection to the servo amplifier

R–J2 Robot
PC board for S–6
AMP (6–axis amplifier) PC board for
emergency S–12
main CPU stop control ARC Mate 100
ARC Mate 120
ARC Mate 120i
ARC Mate 100i
M–6i
M–16i

Pulse coder
RP1
(Pulse coder, RDI/RDO
HBK, ROT)
Motor power/brake
RM1

Note) The motor power cables have connectors of different colors to


prevent incorrect connection.

Connector name Color


J1M White
J2M Black
J3M Green
J4M White
J5M Black
J6M Green

Fig.3.2.1 (c) Robot Connection Cable


(Separate type S–6, S–12, ARC Mate100, ARC Mate120, ARC Mate 100i, ARC Mate 120i, M–6i, M–16i)

315
3. ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS CONNECTIONS B–80525E/04

(In case of separate type S–500)

Emergency stop
control PC board
Robot S–500

Pulse coder

RP1

Motor power/brake
RM1

RM2

Main CPU PC board


CRM10
Servo amplifier
CN6

316
B–80525E/04 CONNECTIONS 3. ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS

Details of cable connection to the servo amplifier

R–J2 Robot S–500


PC board for
AMP (6–axis amplifier) PC board for
emergency
main CPU stop control

Pulse coder
RP1
(Pulse coder, RDI/RDO
HBK, ROT)
Motor power/brake
RM1

RM2

Note) The motor power cables have connectors of different colors to


prevent incorrect connection.

Connector name Color


J1M White
J2M Black
J3M Green
J4M White
J5M Black
J6M Green

Fig.3.2.1 (d) Robot Connection Cable (Separate type S–500)

317
3. ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS CONNECTIONS B–80525E/04

(In case of separate type S–700)

Emergency stop
control PC board
Robot S–700

Pulse coder

RP1

Motor power/brake
RM1

RM2

Main CPU PC board


CRM10
Servo amplifier
CN6

318
B–80525E/04 CONNECTIONS 3. ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS

Details of cable connection to the servo amplifier

R–J2 Robot S–700


PC board for
AMP (6–axis amplifier) PC board for
emergency
main CPU stop control

Pulse coder
P1
(Pulse coder, RDI/RDO
HBK, ROT)
Motor power/brake

Note) The motor power cables have connectors of different colors to


prevent incorrect connection.

Connector name Color


J1M White
J2M Black
J3M Green
J4M White
J5M Black
J6M Green

Fig.3.2.1 (e) Robot Connection Cable (Separate type S–700)

319
3. ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS CONNECTIONS B–80525E/04

(In case of B cabinet/S–420i, M–710i)

Amplifier
CN6

Emergency stop control PC board


CRF1
CRM11

Main CPU PC board


CRM10 Robot S–420i, M–710i

Motor
power/brake
RM1

RM2

Pulse coder

RP1

Details of cable connection to the servo amplifier

R–J2 Robot S–420i, M–710i

PC board for PC board for


AMP (6–axis amplifier) emergency
main CPU stop control

Pulse coder
RP1
(Pulse coder, RDI/RDO
HBK, ROT)

Motor power/brake
RM1

RM2

Fig.3.2.1 (f) Robot Connection Cable (B cabinet/S–420i/M–710i)

320
B–80525E/04 CONNECTIONS 3. ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS

(In case of B cabinet S–6, S–12, ARC Mate100, ARC Mate120, ARC
Mate 100i, ARC Mate 120i, M–6i, M–16i)

Amplifier
CN6
Emergency stop control PC board
CRF1
CRM11

Main CPU PC board Robot S–12, ARC Mate 100,


CRM10 ARC Mate 120, S–6, ARC Mate
100i, ARC Mate 120i, M–6i,
M–16i

Motor
power/brake

Pulse coder

Details of cable connection to the servo amplifier

R–J2 Robot
PC board for S–6
PC board for S–12
AMP (6–axis amplifier) emergency
main CPU stop control

ARC Mate 100i,


ARC Mate 120i,
M–6i, M–16i

Pulse coder
RP1
(Pulse coder, RDI/RDO
HBK, ROT)
Motor power/brake
RM1

Fig.3.2.1 (g) Robot Connection Cable


(B cabinet/S–6, S–12, ARC Mate100, ARC Mate120, ARC Mate 100i, ARC Mate 120i, M–6i, M–16i)
321
3. ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS CONNECTIONS B–80525E/04

(In case of B cabinet/S–500)

Amplifier
CN6

Emergency stop control PC board


CRF1
CRM11

Main CPU PC board


CRM10
Robot S–500

Motor
power/brake
RM1

RM2

Pulse coder

RP1

Details of cable connection to the servo amplifier


R–J2 Robot S–500

PC board for PC board for


AMP (6–axis amplifier) emergency
main CPU stop control

Pulse coder
RP1
(Pulse coder, RDI/RDO
HBK, ROT)
Motor power/brake
RM1

RM2

Fig.3.2.1 (h) Robot Connection Cable (B cabinet/S–500)

322
B–80525E/04 CONNECTIONS 3. ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS

(In case of B cabinet/S–700)

Amplifier
CN6
Emergency stop
control PC board
CRF1
CRM11

Main CPU PC board


CRM10
Robot S–700

Motor
power/brake
RM1

RM2

Pulse coder

RP1

Details of cable connection to the servo amplifier

R–J2 Robot S–700

PC board for PC board for


AMP (6–axis amplifier) emergency
main CPU stop control

Pulse coder
RP1
(Pulse coder, RDI/RDO
HBK, ROT)

Motor power/brake
RM1

RM2

Fig.3.2.1 (i) Robot Connection Cable (B cabinet/S–700)

323
3. ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS CONNECTIONS B–80525E/04

(In case of B cabinet/S–800)

Emergency stop
Servo module5 control PC board
CRR5, CRM11
Servo module4

Servo module3
Main CPU PC board Robot S–800
Servo module2 CRM10

Servo module1
Motor power/brake

Pulse coder

Power supply module

Details of cable connection to the servo amplifier

R–J2 Robot S–800


Servo module PC board for PC board for
emergency
1 2 3 4 5 main CPU stop control

Pulse coder

(Pulse coder, RDI/RDO


HBK, ROT)

Motor power/brake

324
B–80525E/04 CONNECTIONS 3. ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS

Fig.3.2.1 (j) Robot Connection Cable (S–800)

(In case of B cabinet/S–900)

AMP6
AMP5

Main CPU PC board


CRM10
Conversion PC board
CRR5

Emergency stop
control PC board
CRF3, CRF4, CRM11

AMP4
AMP3

Robot
AMP2 S–900
AMP1

RM1
RM2
RM3
RBK
RP1

Details of cable connection to the servo amplifier

Robot
PC board PC board for S–900
Conversion
AMP1 AMP2 AMP3 AMP4 AMP5 AMP6 for main
PC board
emergency
CPU stop control

RP1

RBK

RM1

RM2

RM3

Fig.3.2.1 (k) Robot Connection Cable (B cabinet/S–900)

325
3. ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS CONNECTIONS B–80525E/04

(In case of M–410i)


Servo module4
Servo module3
Servo module2

Servo module1

Robot M–410i

Motor power/brake

Pulse coder

Emergency stop
control PC board
CRR5
CRM11
CRF1

Main CPU PC board CRM10

Details of cable connection to the servo amplifier

R–J2 Robot M–410i


Servo module PC board for PC board for
emergency
1 2 3 4 main CPU stop control

Pulse coder

326
B–80525E/04 CONNECTIONS 3. ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS

Fig.3.2.1 (l) Robot Connection Cable (B cabinet/cabinet for M–410i)


(In case of B cabinet/M–500)
Emergency stop
Servo amplifier2 control PC board
CRR5, CRM11
Servo amplifier1

Main CPU PC board Robot M–500


Servo amplifier4 CRM10

Servo amplifier3
Motor power/brake

Pulse coder

Power supply module

Details of cable connection to the servo amplifier

R–J2 Robot M–500


Servo module PC board for PC board for
emergency
1 2 3 4 main CPU stop control

Pulse coder

(Pulse coder, RDI/RDO


HBK, ROT)
Motor power/brake

Fig.3.2.1 (m) Robot Connection Cable (B cabinet/M–500)

327
3. ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS CONNECTIONS B–80525E/04

(In case of A–520i)


Emergency stop control PC board
CRF3
CRF4
CRM11 Robot A–520i

Pulse coder

Motor power/brake

Main CPU PC board


CRM10

Servo module CN6

Details of cable connection to the servo amplifier


R–J2 Robot A–520i
PC board for PC board for
AMP emergency
main CPU stop control

Pulse coder

Motor power/brake

Note) Each connector used for a motor power cable has a different color for protection against wrong connection.

Connector Color Connector Color

White White

Black

Green

Fig.3.2.1 (n) Robot Connection Cable (B cabinet/A–520i)


328
B–80525E/04 CONNECTIONS 3. ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS

(In case of Separate type A–520i)


Emergency stop control PC board
CRF3
CRF4 Robot S–420i
CRM11

Pulse coder

Motor power/brake

Main CPU PC board


CRM10
Servo module CN6
Details of cable connection to the servo amplifier
R–J2 Robot A–520i
PC board for PC board for
AMP emergency
main CPU stop control

Pulse coder
(Pulse coder, RDI/RDO
HBK, ROT)
Motor power/brake

Each connector used for a motor power cable has a different color for protection against wrong connection.

Connector Color Connector Color

White White

Black

Green

Fig.3.2.1 (o) Robot Connection Cable (Separate type A–520i)

329
3. ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS CONNECTIONS B–80525E/04

(In case of A–520i)

Amplifier
CN6
Emergency stop
control PC board
CRF1
CRM11

Main CPU PC board


CRM10
Robot A–520i

Motor
power/brake

Pulse coder

Details of cable connection to the servo amplifier

R–J2 Robot A–520i


PC board for PC board for
AMP (6–axis amplifier) emergency
main CPU stop control

Pulse coder
RP1
(Pulse coder, RDI/RDO
HBK, ROT)

Motor power/brake

Fig.3.2.1 (p) Robot Connection Cable (B cabinet/A–520i)


330
B–80525E/04 CONNECTIONS 3. ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS

(In case of Separate type M–400i)


FAN4 terminal Emergency stop control printed board
unit A, B CRF3
CRF4 Robot M–400i
CRM11

Pulse coder
RDI/RDO
HBK
ROT

Motor
power/brake

Main CPU printed


board CRM10
Servo amplifier CN6

Detail of cable connection to the servo amplifier

R–J2 Robot M–400i


Main CPU Emergency FAN4
AMP printed stop control Terminal
board printed board

Pulse coder
RP1
(Pulse coder, RDI/RDO
HBK, ROT)
Motor power/brake
RM1
(J3M, J4M, J5M, BK,
Fan)
RM2
(J1M, J2M)

Note) Each connector used for a motor power cable has a different color for protection against wrong connection.

Connector Color Connector Color

White White

Black Black

Green

Fig.3.2.1 (q) Robot Connection Cable (Separated type M–400i)


331
3. ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS CONNECTIONS B–80525E/04

(In case of B–cabinet/M–400i)

Amplifier Power supply unit


CN6 CP3
Emergency stop
control printed board
CRF1
CRM11

Main CPU printed board


CRM10

Robot M–400i

Motor
power/brake

Pulse coder
RDI/RDO
HBK
ROT

Details of cable connection to the servo amplifier

R–J2 Robot M–400i


Main CPU Emergency Power
Amplifier (6–axis amplifier) printed of stop control supply
board printed board unit

Pulse coder
RP1
(Pulse coder, RDI/RDO
HBK, ROT)
Motor power/brake
RM1
(J3M, J4M, J5M, BK,
Fan)

Fig.3.2.1 (r) Robot Connection Cable (B cabinet/M–400i)


332
B–80525E/04 CONNECTIONS 3. ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS

(In case of S–450 (B–cabinet))


Servo module 1
Servo module 2
Servo module 3 Emergency stop control printed board
Servo module 4 CRR5
CRM11
CRF1

Main CPU printed board


CRM10

Additional axis control Robot S–450


printed board
JF7
Motor power/
brake

Pulse coder

Details of cable connection to the servo amplifier


R–J2 Robot S–450
Servo module Main CPU Emergency stop Additional
printed control printed axis control
board board printed board

Pulse coder
RPI (J1–J6)
(Pulse coder, RDI/RDO,
HBK, ROT)
RP2 (J7)

Motor power/brake
RM1 (J4, J5, J6)
RM2 (J1, J2, J3)
RM3 (J7)

Fig.3.2.1 (s) Robot Connection Cable (B–Cabinet/S–450)

333
3. ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS CONNECTIONS B–80525E/04

(In case of M–410i (B–cabinet))


Servo module 1
Servo module 2 Emergency stop control printed board
Servo module 3 CRR5
CRM11
CRF1

Main CPU printed board


CRM10

Servo module 4 Robot M–410i

Motor
power/brake

Pulse coder

Details of cable connection to the servo amplifier

R–J2 Robot M–410i


Servo module Main CPU Emergency stop Power
printed control printed supply
board board unit

Pulse coder
RPI
(Pulse coder,
RDI/RDO, HBK, ROT)

Motor brake

Motor power

Fig.3.2.1 (t) Robot Connection Cable (B–cabinet/M–410i)


334
B–80525E/04 CONNECTIONS 3. ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS

3.2.2 (1) Teach pendant


Teach Pendant Cable The robot connection cable is connected the operator’s box as
follows. This figure applies to all device types.

Operator’s box Port Teach pendant


(option) “Teach pendant”

Teach pendant cable

Fig.3.2.2 (a) Teach Pendant Cable

335
3. ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS CONNECTIONS B–80525E/04

Amplifier

Teach pendant
Main CPU PC board
CRM6

Teach pendant cable

Fig.3.2.2 (b) Teach Pendant Cable (In case of B cabinet)

3.2.3 Considering the robot power capacity and the circuit breaker capacity,
connect the power supply whose voltage conforms to the installation
Connecting the Input
conditions to the terminal located above the circuit breaker.
Power Supply
Use a ground of class 3 or better. The resistance to ground must not exceed
100 Ω.
Be sure to ground the work table or jig used by an arc welding robot or
the like so that it can handle a large current.
Use a thick wire to withstand the maximum current used.
Selection of an input transformer tap is necessary depending on the input
voltage.
The tap is set before shipment. However, check it referring to section 6.2
in ”Maintenance” when changing the input voltage and before supplying
power (before the breaker switch is turned on).
The motor is driven by the PWM inverter system using the power
transistor bridge. If the servo amplifier is used without a transformer, a
high-frequency leakage current flows through the stray capacitance
between the ground and the motor coils, power cable, and amplifier. This
may cause the leakage-current circuit breaker or leakage-protection relay
installed in the path of the power supply to cut out.

336
B–80525E/04 CONNECTIONS 3. ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS

Use the following leakage current circuit breaker for inverters to prevent
incorrect operation.

Example of Leakage Current Circuit Breaker for Inverters

Manufacture Type
Fuji Electric Co., Ltd. EG A series
SG A series
Hitachi, Ltd. ES100C type
ES225C type
Matsushita Electric Works, Leakage current circuit breaker, C type
Ltd. Leakage current circuit breaker, KC type

Fig. 3.2.3 shows the cable connection.

Use a bar lead.


(Recommended type:
H6.0/20 or H6.0/26,
manufactured by Nihon Weissmuller)

Operator’s box
Operator’s panel (option)
Disconnect switch

Fig.3.2.3 (a) Input Power Supply Connection (Operator’s box–disconnect switch)

337
3. ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS CONNECTIONS B–80525E/04

Note) Always replace the cover


after completing the wiring.

Operator’s panel

Breaker

Fig.3.2.3 (b) Input Power Supply Connection (Operator’s box–breaker)

338
B–80525E/04 CONNECTIONS 3. ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS

Note) Always replace the cover


after completing the wiring.

Fig.3.2.3 (c) Input Power Supply Connection (B cabinet)

339
3. ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS CONNECTIONS B–80525E/04

Note) Always replace the cover


after completing the wiring.

Fig.3.2.3 (d) Input Power Supply Connection (M–410i)

340
B–80525E/04 CONNECTIONS 3. ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS

3.2.4 The External Power On/Off signal turns on and off the power supply from
Connecting the the outside the control unit, and is connected as follows.
External Power Supply
ON/OFF Switch

Panel pc board
Operator’s panel

To external power
supply ON/OFF

Operator’s box

Panel pc board

Operator’s panel

To external power
supply ON/OFF
B–cabinet

341
3. ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS CONNECTIONS B–80525E/04

Remove the jumper when the external


power supply ON/OFF switch is used.

Power ON Power OFF

External power supply ON/OFF switch

PC board for operator’s panel

Use a contact conforming to the following : Voltage rating : 50 VDC, current : 100mA or more

The power supply on/off timing chart is as follows

EX–ON–EX–COM

EX–OFF–EX–COM

Power on

TON y 0.5 sec, TOFF y 0.5 sec, TOFF–ON y 5 sec

Fig.3.2.4 External Power Supply ON/OFF Switch Connection

342
B–80525E/04 CONNECTIONS 3. ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS

3.2.5
Connecting the
External Emergency
Stop

Panel pc board
Operator’s panel

To external emergency
stop ON/OFF

Operator’s box

Panel pc board

Operator’s panel

To external emergency
stop ON/OFF
B–cabinet

343
3. ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS CONNECTIONS B–80525E/04

External emergency stop output

Panel pc board

Signal Description Current, voltage


EMGOUT1 Emergency stop output signals. The contact is open if an
emergency stop occurs or the power is turned off. The Rated contact:
contact is closed during normal operation. 250 VAC, 5-A resistor load
EMGOUTC
EMGOUT2 Emergency stop output signals. The contact is closed if an
emergency stop occurs or the power is turned off. The
contact is open during normal operation.
EMGOUTC
ESTOP1 Emergency stop output signals of the teach pendant and
operator’s panel. The contact is opened if which emergen- Rated contact:
cy stop switch is pressed. The contact is closed during 24 VDC, 0.1-A resistor load
ESTOP2 normal operation.
(Option)

M4 screws are provided on the terminal. Use crimp terminals 9 mm wide or less.

Fig.3.2.5 Connecting the External Emergency Stop

344
B–80525E/04 CONNECTIONS 3. ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS

External emergency stop input

After connecting an external emergency stop switch and safety fence door switch, be sure to check the operations
of those switches, the emergency stop switch on the operator’s panel, and the emergency stop switch on the teach
pendant.

Connected at the factory.


Remove the jumperprior to use.

External emergency stop switch

Door switch on safety fense

Use a contact rated at 250 V, 10 A or more on the printed circuit board for emergency stop control.

Signal Description Current, voltage


Connect the contacts of the external emergency stop switch to
EMGIN1
these terminals. When using the contacts of a relay or contactor
Open and close of
instead of the switch, connect a spark killer to the coil of the relay or
24VDC 0.1A
EMGIN2 contactor, to suppress noise.
When these terminals are not used, jumper them.
These signals are used to stop the robot when the door on the safe-
ty fence is open.
FENCE1
While the deadman’s switch on the teach pendant is pressed and Open and close of
the teach pendant enable switch is validated, these signals are 24VDC 0.1A
FENCE2 ignored and an emergency stop does not occur.
If these signals are not used, short these terminals.

M3 screws are provided on the terminal. Use crimp terminals 9 mm wide or less.

345
3. ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS CONNECTIONS B–80525E/04

Servo on input

After connecting a servo on input switch, be sure to check the operations of the switch, the emergency stop
switch on the operator’s panel, and the emergency stop switch on the teach pendant.

Connected at the factory.


Remove the jumperprior
to use.

Servo on input switch.

Signal Description Current, voltage


Connect the contacts of the servo–on input switch to these termi-
SVON1 nals. When using the contacts of a relay or contactor instead of the
switch, connect a spark killer to the coil of the relay or contactor, to 24 VDC/0.1 A switch
suppress noise. When these terminals are not used, jumper them. on/off
SVON2

M4 screws are provided on the terminal. Use crimp terminals 9mm wide or less.

346
4. PERIPHERAL DEVICE, ARC WELDING,
B–80525E/04 CONNECTIONS AND END EFFECTOR INTERFACES

PERIPHERAL DEVICE, ARC WELDING, AND END EFFECTOR

4 INTERFACES

R-J2 I/O peripheral device interfaces include printed circuit boards and
a unit selected according to the applications. Table 4 lists the printed
circuit boards and unit. Fig. 4 shows their locations.
Table 4 Peripheral Device Interface Types

Number of I/O points


No. Name Drawing number Remarks
DI DO D/A A/D
Process I/O printed circuit A05B-2300-J030 40 40 2 6 Backplane installation
1 board CA type (with welding
interface)
Process I/O printed circuit A05B-2300-J031 40 40 – – Backplane installation
2 board CB type (without welding
interface)
Process I/O printed circuit A05B-2300-J035 Note Note – – Backplane installation
3 board DA 80 80 type (without welding
interface)
Process I/O printed circuit A05B–2300–J040 40 40 2 6 For ARC Mate 100i
board EA Operator’s box installation
4
type (without welding
interface)
I/O unit model A – Depending on a selected (Note 3)
5
I/O model.
I/O unit model B AO5B–2300–J001 Depending on a selected Interface unit
6
unit.

NOTE
1 Process I/O PC board DA of i cabinet has 96 input points
and 96 output points. Because of cable restrictions, only 80
input points and 80 output points can be used.
2 General purpose I/O (SDI/SDO) is a number which subtract
an exclusive signal from the table value.
Example : Process I/O printed circuit board CA
Table value Exclusive DI General purpose DI
DI; 40 – 18 = 22 points
Table value Exclusive DO General purpose DO
DO; 40 – 20 = 20 points
3 When you want to mount I/O unit model A in the operation
box, consult FANUC.

347
4. PERIPHERAL DEVICE, ARC WELDING,
AND END EFFECTOR INTERFACES CONNECTIONS B–80525E/04

Operator’s box Note) Some operator’s boxes


(option) support the connection of
I/O unit model A. For details,
contact your FANUC
sales representative.
Basic unit of
I/O unit model B

Process I/O
CA/CB/DA

To peripheral device

Interface unit of I/O unit model B

Fig.4 (a) Locations of Peripheral Device Interfaces (i cabinet)

Operator’s box Process I/O EA

For peripheral device

348
4. PERIPHERAL DEVICE, ARC WELDING,
B–80525E/04 CONNECTIONS AND END EFFECTOR INTERFACES

Emergency stop control PC board


Main CPU PC board

Process I/O PC board


CA/CB/DA

I/O unit MODEL A


or
I/O unit MODEL B

Fig.4 (b) Locations of Peripheral Device Interfaces (B cabinet)

I/O unit model B

I/O unit model A


or
I/O unit model B

Process I/O Printed Circuit board


Main CPU Printed Circuit board
Emergency stop control Printed Circuit board

Fig.4 (c) Locations of Peripheral Device Interfaces (Cabinet for M–410i)

349
4. PERIPHERAL DEVICE, ARC WELDING,
AND END EFFECTOR INTERFACES CONNECTIONS B–80525E/04

4.1
PERIPHERAL
DEVICE INTERFACE
BLOCK DIAGRAM

4.1.1
When Process I/O
Printed Circuit Board
CA, CB or EA is used
In case of i cabinet
Main CPU printed Process I/O printed circuit
circuit board board (CA/CB)

K10 K50A
CRM2A Peripheral device
JD1A JD4A
K50B
CRM2B Peripheral device

JD4B CRW1 K45


Welding device

CRW2

CRW1 and CRW2 are not provided for process I/O printed circuit board.

Process I/O
CA/CB/DA

For peripheral device

350
4. PERIPHERAL DEVICE, ARC WELDING,
B–80525E/04 CONNECTIONS AND END EFFECTOR INTERFACES

Cable Drawing
Name Remarks
number number
Process I/O A05B–2350–J R–J2 controller
K10 connection 100 internal cable
cable A

Peripheral de- A05B–2350–J Connected length :


vice 210 7m
connection Honda Tsushin,
Process I/O K50A cable 50,34pins : one to one
printed circuit K50B
board for CA K45 Peripheral de- A05B–2350–J Connected length :
vice 211 14m
connection Honda Tsushin,
cable 50,34pins : one to one
Peripheral de- A05B–2350–J Connected length :
vice 200 7m
connection Honda Tsushin,
Process I/O K50A cable 50pins : one to one
printed circuit K50B
board for CB Peripheral de- A05B–2350–J Connected length :
vice 201 14m
connection Honda Tsushin,
cable 50pins : one to one
Peripheral de- A05B–2350–J Connected length :
vice 240 7m
connection Honda Tsushin,
K50A cable 50pins : one to one
K50B Peripheral de- A05B–2350–J Connected length :
vice 241 14m
connection Honda Tsushin,
Process I/O cable 50pins : one to one
printed circuit
board for EA Welding de- A05B–2350–J Connected length :
vice connec- 250 7m
tion cable Honda Tsushin,
34pins
K45
Welding de- A05B–2350–J Connected length :
vice connec- 251 14m
tion cable Honda Tsushin,
34pins

351
4. PERIPHERAL DEVICE, ARC WELDING,
AND END EFFECTOR INTERFACES CONNECTIONS B–80525E/04

In case of B cabinet, cabinet for M–410i

Main CPU Process I/O printed ci


printed rcuit board (CA/CB)
circuit board
Peripheral device
JD1A
Peripheral device

Welder

Analog signal input

Process I/O printed


circuit board (CA/CB)

Peripheral device

Peripheral device

(Note1) CRW1 and CRW2 are not provided for process I/O printed circuit board CB.
(Note2) In case of M–410i, process I/O is specified only one sheet.

352
4. PERIPHERAL DEVICE, ARC WELDING,
B–80525E/04 CONNECTIONS AND END EFFECTOR INTERFACES

Cable
Name Drawing number Remarks
number
K10 Process I/O connection cable A05B–2300–J013 Internal cable of R–J control unit
Internal cable of R–J control unit
K11 Process I/O connection cable A05B–2300–J014
For connecting additional PC board
Connected length : 7m
A05B–2302–J113
Honda Tsushin, 50pins : one to one
K50A
K50B Connected length : 14m
Peripheral device connecting cable A05B–2302–J114
K50C Honda Tsushin, 50pins : one to one
K50D
Connected length : 30m
A05B–2302–J115
Honda Tsushin, 50pins : one to one
A05B–2302–J273 Connected length : 3m
A05B–2302–J274 Connected length : 6m
K45 Welder connecting cable
Connected length : 13m
A05B–2302–J275
In case of Tig welding it is impossible to use
This cable is not included
K46 Peripheral device connecting cable ____
It must be supplied by customer

4.1.2
When Process I/O
Printed Cricuit Board
DA is used

Main CPU printed Process I/O printed circuit


circuit board board (DA)

K10 K50A
CRM2A Peripheral device
JD1A JD4A
K50B
CRM2B Peripheral device

K50C
JD4B CRM2C Peripheral device

K50D
CRM2D Peripheral device

353
4. PERIPHERAL DEVICE, ARC WELDING,
AND END EFFECTOR INTERFACES CONNECTIONS B–80525E/04

(i cabinet)

To peripheral device

Cable Drawing
Name Group Remarks
number number
Process I/O A05B–2350– R–J2 controller
K10 connection PB1 J100 internal cable
cable A

Peripheral A05B–2350– Connected length :


Process device J220 7m
PC7
I/O K50A connection Honda Tsushin,
printed K50B cable 50pins : one to one
circuit K50C Peripheral A05B–2350– Connected length :
board for K50D device J221 14m
DA PC8
connection Honda Tsushin,
cable 50pins : one to one

354
4. PERIPHERAL DEVICE, ARC WELDING,
B–80525E/04 CONNECTIONS AND END EFFECTOR INTERFACES

In case of B cabinet, cabinet for M–410i

Main CPU Process I/O printed


printed circuit board (DA)
circuit board Peripheral device

JD1A Peripheral device

Peripheral device

Peripheral device

Peripheral device

Peripheral device

Process I/O printed


circuit board (DA)
Peripheral device

Peripheral device

Peripheral device

Peripheral device

Peripheral device

Peripheral device

(Note) In case of M–410i, process I/O is specified only one sheet.

Cable
Name Drawing number Remarks
number
K10 Process I/O connection cable A05B–2300–J013 Internal cable of R–J control unit
Internal cable of R–J control unit
K11 Process I/O connection cable A05B–2300–J014
For connecting additional printed circuit board
Connected length : 7m
A05B–2302–J113
Honda Tsushin, 50pins : one to one

K50 Connected length : 14m


Peripheral device connecting cable A05B–2302–J114
A–H Honda Tsushin, 50pins : one to one
Connected length : 30m
A05B–2302–J115
Honda Tsushin, 50pins : one to one
Connected length : 7m
A05B–2302–J120
Honda Tsushin, 20pins : one to one

K51 Connected length : 14m


Welder connection cable A05B–2302–J121
A–D Honda Tsushin, 20pins : one to one
Connected length : 30m
A05B–2302–J122
Honda Tsushin, 20pins : one to one

355
4. PERIPHERAL DEVICE, ARC WELDING,
AND END EFFECTOR INTERFACES CONNECTIONS B–80525E/04

4.1.3 In case of i cabinet


When I/O Unit Model A
is used

Main CPU Printed circuit


printed board
circuit board TBOP3
+24V
0V
JD1A JRM10

I/O unit model A power


JD1A connection cable

I/O unit model A


connection cable

JD1A JD1B CP32


I/O base unit

K54
Back plane

K54

K54 Peripheral
device welder

K54

K54

I/O unit model A is mounted in the operator’s box.


Refer to I/O model A manual for more details.

Cable
Name Group Drawing number Remarks
number
Operator’s box internal cable.
– I/O unit model A connection cable – ____
Attached to the I/O unit mainframe.
I/O unit model A power connection Operator’s box internal cable.
– – ____
cable Attached to the I/O unit mainframe.
Peripheral device connection Not included.
– – ____
cable Must be supplied by the customer.

356
4. PERIPHERAL DEVICE, ARC WELDING,
B–80525E/04 CONNECTIONS AND END EFFECTOR INTERFACES

In case of B cabinet/cabinet for M–410i

Power
supply unit

CP5

Main CPU
printed
circuit
board
JD1A

I/O base unit


Back plane

Peripheral device
Welder

Refer to model A I/O manual for more details.

Cable
Name Drawing number Remarks
number
Internal cable of R–J control unit
K15 I/O unit model A connection cable ____
Attached to I/O unit mainframe
Internal cable of R–J control unit
K16 I/O unit model A connection cable ____
Attached to I/O unit mainframe
This cable is not included
K54 Peripheral device connecting cable ____
It must be supplied by customer

357
4. PERIPHERAL DEVICE, ARC WELDING,
AND END EFFECTOR INTERFACES CONNECTIONS B–80525E/04

4.1.4 In case of i cabinet


When I/O Unit Model B
is used

In control unit
Main CPU
printed
circuit I/O unit model B
board Interface unit
S1+ CRS7
JD1A JD1B Mechanical unit
S1– end effector

S2+ CRS8A
JD1A S2–

Power 24V S3+ CRS8B


supply unit 0V S3–

CP6

Printed circuit TBOP3


board for +24V
operator’s box 0V
I/O unit model B 24V
Basic unit 0V
CRS9
S+ DI/DO
S2+ S–
S2– FG

Peripheral
device
I/O unit model B 24V
Basic unit 0V

S+ DI/DO
S–
FG

In operator’s box

Refer to model B I/O manual for more details.

Cable
Name Group Drawing number Remarks
number
– I/O unit model B connection cable – ____ R-J2 controller unit internal cable
– I/O unit model B connection cable – ____ R-J2 controller unit internal cable
Peripheral device connection Not included.
– – ____
cable Must be supplied by the customer

358
4. PERIPHERAL DEVICE, ARC WELDING,
B–80525E/04 CONNECTIONS AND END EFFECTOR INTERFACES

Connection to I/O Unit Model B, installed in the operator’s box


(a) Connect terminals S2+ and S2– of terminal block TBOP3 on the
panel PCB to terminals S+ and S– of the Model B, as shown be-
low.
(b) Connect terminals +24V and 0V of terminal block TBOP3 on the
panel PCB to terminals +24V and 0V of the Model B, as shown
below.
(c) When the +24 V power of the panel PCB is used for LV, the maxi-
mum current is 2 A. If a current exceeding 2 A is required, use
other DC power units to supply power to LV.

Operator’s box (option)

M4 terminal

M3 terminal

Panel printed board

I/O unit model B M3 terminal

359
4. PERIPHERAL DEVICE, ARC WELDING,
AND END EFFECTOR INTERFACES CONNECTIONS B–80525E/04

In case of B cabinet/cabinet for M–410i

Internal control unit


Main CPU
printed
circuit I/O unit model B
board
Interface unit
Mechanical
unit end
effector

I/O unit model B


Basic unit
Power
supply unit

Peripheral
device

I/O unit model B


Expanded unit

Peripheral
control I/O unit model B
Basic unit

Peripheral
device

I/O unit model B


Expanded unit

Cable
Name Group Drawing number Remarks
number
K** I/O unit model B connection cable – ____ Internal cable of R–J control unit
K** I/O unit model B connection cable – ____ Internal cable of R–J control unit
Peripheral device connection This cable is not included
K** – ____
cable It must be supplied by customer

360
4. PERIPHERAL DEVICE, ARC WELDING,
B–80525E/04 CONNECTIONS AND END EFFECTOR INTERFACES

4.1.5 (a) In case of cabinet i


When Two or more The following figure shows the connection when two or more process
Process I/O Printed I/O printed circuit boards and I/O unit (model A or model B) are used.
Circuit Boards and I/O 1 process I/O CA/CB/DAs and 1 I/O unit model A or I/O unit model
Unit (Model A or Model B can be installed in one cabinet, operator’s box.
B) are used

In controller
Main CPU
printed
circuit board Process I/O printed I/O unit model B
circuit board Interface unit

Power
supply unit

CP6

Printed circuit
board for
operator’s box
I/O unit model B
Basic unit

I/O unit model B


Basic unit

I/O base unit

I/O unit model A


Back plane

361
4. PERIPHERAL DEVICE, ARC WELDING,
AND END EFFECTOR INTERFACES CONNECTIONS B–80525E/04

(b) B cabinet and M–410i cabinet


When several units of the process I/O PCB, I/O Unit Model A, or I/O
Unit Model B are used, connect them as shown below.
One cabinet can include two units of the process I/O PCB (CA, CB,
or DA) and one unit of I/O Unit Model A or B.

Main CPU printed Process I/O printed circuit


circuit board board (CA/CB/DA)

K10
JD1A JD4A

K11
JD4B

Process I/O printed circuit


board (CA/CB/DA)

Power supply unit JD4A

JD4B

K15
CP5
K16

I/O unit model B JD1A JD1B CP32


K12 Interface unit
JD1B
Interface module

JD1A
I/O
+24V
0V base
S+, S–, FG unit

S+, S–, I/O unit model B


FG basic unit
+24V
0V

Cable
Name Drawing number Remarks
number
Internal cable of R–J control unit
K12 Process I/O connection cable ____
For connecting additional pc board
others See 4.1.1 to 4.1.3

362
4. PERIPHERAL DEVICE, ARC WELDING,
B–80525E/04 CONNECTIONS AND END EFFECTOR INTERFACES

4.2 The peripheral device interface can be used with combinations of process
I/O PC boards CA, CB, DA and EA as well as I/O unit models A and B.
PERIPHERAL
Fig. 4.2 shows the combinations.
DEVICE INTERFACE
COMBINATION (a) i cabinet

[1-board]
Combination A Combination B Combination C Combination D

CA/CB/EA (40 points) DA (80 points) I/O unit model A I/O unit model B

[2-board combination]
Combination AC Combination AD Combination BC Combination BD

CA/CB (40 points) CA/CB (40 points) DA (80 points) DA (80 points)

I/O unit model A I/O unit model B I/O unit model A I/O unit model B

Fig.4.2 Peripheral Device Interface Combination

(b) B cabinet, M410i cabinet

[1-board]
Combination C Combination D Combination E

CA/CB (40 points) DA (96 points) I/O unit model A


or model B

[2-board combination]
Combination CC Combination CE

CA/CB (40 points) CA/CB (40 points)

CA/CB (40 points) I/O unit model A


or model B

Combination DC Combination DD Combination DE

DA (96 points) DA (96 points) DA (96 points)

I/O unit model A


CA/CB (40 points) DA (96 points) or model B

[3-board combination]

Combination CCE Combination DCE Combination DDE

CA/CB (40 points) DA (96 points) DA (96 points)

CA/CB (40 points) CA/CB (40 points) DA (96 points)


I/O unit model A I/O unit model A I/O unit model A
or model B or model B or model B

363
4. PERIPHERAL DEVICE, ARC WELDING,
AND END EFFECTOR INTERFACES CONNECTIONS B–80525E/04

4.3 There are 18 exclusive data inputs (DI) and 20 exclusive data outputs
(DO) for a process I/O printed circuit board.
PROCESS I/O
These signals are allocated to the process I/O printed circuit board
PRINTED CIRCUIT connected first when two or more printed boards are combined. (General
BOARD SIGNALS signals SDI/SDO are allocated to the second and the following process
I/O printed circuit boards.)
The common voltage of the DI signals input to pins 1 to 4 of connector
CRM2A is clamped +24 V (common) in each process I/O printed circuit
board.
Table 4.3 shows signals of a process I/O printed circuit board.

Table 4.3 Process I/O Printed Circuit Board Signals


(DI signals)
Connector
Signal name Description Remarks
number
CRM2A-1 *IMSTP Immediate stop Clamped at +24 V
common
CRM2A-2 *HOLD Temporary stop Clamped at +24 V
common
CRM2A-3 *SFSD Safe speed Clamped at +24 V
common
CRM2A-4 CSTOPI Cycle stop Clamped at +24 V
common
CRM2A-5 FAULT RESET External reset
CRM2A-6 START Start
CRM2A-7 HOME Return to home
position
CRM2A-8 ENBL Operation enabled
CRM2A-9 RSR1 Robot service request
PNS1 Program number Option
selection
CRM2A-10 RSR2 Robot service request
PNS2 Program number Option
selection
CRM2A-11 RSR3 Robot service request
PNS3 Program number Option
selection
CRM2A-12 RSR4 Robot service request
PNS4 Program number Option
selection
CRM2A-13 RSR5 Robot service request
PNS5 Program number Option
selection
CRM2A-14 RSR6 Robot service request
PNS6 Program number Option
selection
CRM2A-15 RSR7 Robot service request
PNS7 Program number Option
selection

364
4. PERIPHERAL DEVICE, ARC WELDING,
B–80525E/04 CONNECTIONS AND END EFFECTOR INTERFACES

Table4.3 Process I/O Printed Circuit Board Signals (Continued)


(DI signals)
Connector
Signal name Description Remarks
number
CRM2A-16 RSR8 Robot service request
PNS8 Program number Option
selection
CRM2A-29 PNSTROBE PNS strobe
CRM2A-30 PROD START Start of automatic
operation
CRM2A-31 SDI01 Peripheral device General signal
status
CRM2A-32 SDI02
CRM2B-1 SDI03
CRM2B-2 SDI04
CRM2B-3 SDI05
CRM2B-4 SDI06
CRM2B-5 SDI07
CRM2B-6 SDI08
CRM2B-7 SDI09
CRM2B-8 SDI10
CRMSB-9 SDI11
CRM2B-10 SDI12
CRM2B-11 SDI13
CRM2B-12 SDI14
CRM2B-13 SDI15
CRM2B-14 SDI16
CRM2B-15 SDI17
CRM2B-16 SDI18
CRM2B-29 SDI19
CRM2B-30 SDI20
CRM2B-31 SDI21
CRM2B-32 SDI22
CRM2A-33 CMDENBL During automatic
operation
CRM2A-34 SYSRDY Preparation
completed
CRM2A-35 PROGRUN During regeneration
CRM2A-36 PAUSED Program being
interrupted
CRM2A-38 HELD During temporary stop
CRM2A-39 FAULT Alarm
CRM2A-40 ATPERCH Home position
CRM2A-41 TPENBL Teach pendant
enabled
CRM2A-43 BATALM Battery voltage drop

365
4. PERIPHERAL DEVICE, ARC WELDING,
AND END EFFECTOR INTERFACES CONNECTIONS B–80525E/04

Table4.3 Process I/O Printed Circuit Board Signals (Continued)


(DO signals)
Connector
Signal name Description Remarks
number
CRM2A-44 BUSY During operation
CRM2A-45 ACK1 Robot service request
acceptance
SNO1 Selected program Option
number
CRM2A-46 ACK2 Robot service request
acceptance
SNO2 Selected program Option
number
CRM2A-19 ACK3 Robot service request
acceptance
SNO3 Selected program Option
number
CRM2A-20 ACK4 Robot service request
acceptance
SNO4 Selected program Option
number
CRM2A-21 ACK5 Robot service request
acceptance
SNO5 Selected program Option
number
CRM2A-22 ACK6 Robot service request
acceptance
SNO6 Selected program Option
number
CRM2A-24 ACK7 Robot service request
acceptance
SNO7 Selected program Option
number
CRM2A-25 ACK8 Robot service request
acceptance
SNO8 Selected program Option
number
CRM2A-26 SNACK Response signal to
PNS
CRM2A-27 RESERVED
CRM2B-33 SDO01 Peripheral device General signal
control signal
CRM2B-34 SDO02
CRM2B-35 SDO03
CRM2B-36 SDO04
CRM2B-38 SDO05
CRM2B-39 SDO06
CRM2B-40 SDO07
CRM2B-41 SDO08
CRM2B-43 SDO09

366
4. PERIPHERAL DEVICE, ARC WELDING,
B–80525E/04 CONNECTIONS AND END EFFECTOR INTERFACES

Table4.3 Process I/O Printed Circuit Board Signals (Continued)


(DI signals)
Connector
Signal name Description Remarks
number
CRM2B-44 SDO10 Reripheral device General signal
control signal
CRMSB-45 SDO11
CRM2B-46 SDO12
CRM2B-19 SDO13
CRM2B-20 SDO14
CRM2B-21 SDO15
CRM2B-22 SDO16
CRM2B-24 SDO17
CRM2B-25 SDO18
CRM2B-26 SDO19
CRM2B-27 SDO20

367
4. PERIPHERAL DEVICE, ARC WELDING,
AND END EFFECTOR INTERFACES CONNECTIONS B–80525E/04

4.4
INTERFACE FOR
PERIPHERAL
DEVICES, END
EFFECTORS, AND
WELDERS
4.4.1
Peripheral Device and
Control Unit
Connection
Control unit
Peripheral device control interface A1
CRM2A
1 *IMSTP 33 CMDENBL
2 *HOLD 34 SYSRDY
19 ACK3/SNO3
3 *SFSPD 35 PROGRUN
20 ACK4/SNO4
4 CSTOPI 36 PAUSED
21 ACK5/SNO5
5 FAULT RESET 37 COM–A1
22 ACK6/SNO6
6 START 38 HELD
23 COM–A4
7 HOME 39 FAULT
24 ACK7/SNO7
8 ENBL 40 ATPERCH
25 ACK8/SNO8 Peripheral
9 RSR1/PNS1 41 TPENBL device A1
26 SNACK
10 RSR2/PNS2 42 COM–A2
27 RESERVED
11 RSR3/PNS3 43 BATALM
28 COM–A5
12 RSR4/PNS4 44 BUSY
29 PNSTROBE
13 RSR5/PNS5 45 ACK1/SNO1
14 30 PROD START
RSR6/PNS6 46 ACK2/SNO2
31 SDI01
15 RSR7/PNS7 47 COM–A3
32 SDI02
16 RSR8/PNS8 48
17 0V 49 +24E
18 0V 50 +24E

Peripheral device control interface A2


CRM2B
1 SDI03 33 SDO01
2 SDI04 34 SDO02
19 SDI03
3 SDI05 35 SDO03
20 SDI14
4 SDI06 36 SDO04
21 SDI15
5 SDI07 37 COM–B1
22 SDI16
6 SDI08 38 SDO05
23 COM–B4
7 SDI09 39 SDO06
24 SDI17
8 SDI10 40 SDO07
25 SDI18 Peripheral
9 SDI11 41 SDO08 device A2
26 SDI19
10 SDI12 42 COM–B2
27 SD20
11 SDI13 43 SDO09
28 COM–B5
12 SDI14 44 SDO10
29 SDI19
13 SDI15 45 SDO11
30 SDI20
14 SDI16 46 SDO12
31 SDI21
15 SDI17 47 COM–B3
32 SDI22
16 SDI18 48
17 0V 49 +24E
18 0V 50 +24E

368
4. PERIPHERAL DEVICE, ARC WELDING,
B–80525E/04 CONNECTIONS AND END EFFECTOR INTERFACES

NOTE
1 The peripheral device connection cables are optional.
2 All of COM-** are connected to 0 V.

Applicable process I/O printed circuit board


Type Specifications CRM2A CRM2B
CA A05B-2300-J030  
CB A05B-2300-J031  
DA A05B-2300-J035  
EA A05B-2300-J040  

369
4. PERIPHERAL DEVICE, ARC WELDING,
AND END EFFECTOR INTERFACES CONNECTIONS B–80525E/04

Control unit
Peripheral device control interface A3
CRM2C
1 SDI23 33 SDO21
2 SDI24 34 SDO22
19 SDO33
3 SDI25 35 SDO23
20 SDO34
4 SDI26 36 SDO24
21 SDO35
5 SDI27 37 COM–C1
22 SDO36
6 SDI28 38 SDO25
23 COM–C4
7 SDI29 39 SDO26
24 SDO37
8 SDI30 40 SDO27
25 SDO38 Pripheral
9 SDI31 41 SDO28 device A3
26 SDO39
10 SDI32 42 COM–C2
27 SDO40
11 SDI33 43 SDO29
28 COM–C5
12 SDI34 44 SDO30
29 SDI39
13 SDI35 45 SDO31
30 SDI40
14 SDI36 46 SDO32
31 SDI41
15 SDI37 47 COM–C3
32 SDI42
16 SDI38 48
17 0V 49 +24E
18 0V 50 +24E

Peripheral device control interface A4


CRM2D
1 SDI43 33 SDO41
2 SDI44 34 SDO42
19 SDO53
3 SDI45 35 SDO43
20 SDO54
4 SDI46 36 SDO44
21 SDO55
5 SDI47 37 COM–D1
22 SDO56
6 SDI48 38 SDO45
23 COM–D4
7 SDI49 39 SDO46
24 SDO57
8 SDI54 40 SDO47
25 SDO58 Pripheral
9 SDI51 41 SDO48 device A4
26 SDO59
10 SDI52 42 COM–D2
27 SDO60
11 SDI53 43 SDO49
28 COM–D5
12 SDI54 44 SDO50
29 SDI59
13 SDI55 45 SDO51
30 SDI60
14 SDI56 46 SDO52
31 SDI61
15 SDI57 47 COM–D3
32 SDI62
16 SDI58 48
17 0V 49 +24E
18 0V 50 +24E

NOTE
1. The peripheral device connection cables are optional.
2. All of COM-** are connected to 0 V.

Applicable process I/O printed circuit board


Type Specifications CRM2C CRM2D
CA A05B-2300-J030
CB A05B-2300-J031

370
4. PERIPHERAL DEVICE, ARC WELDING,
B–80525E/04 CONNECTIONS AND END EFFECTOR INTERFACES

Type Specifications CRM2C CRM2D


DA A05B-2300-J035  
EA A05B-2300-J040

Control unit Connector pin No. Peripheral device


(peripheral device control interface A1)
+24E
CRM2A (49,50)
Receiver circuit
CRM2A (1)
*IMSTP RV
CRM2A (2)
*HOLD RV
CRM2A (3)
*SFSPD RV
CRM2A (4)
CSTOPI RV

CRM2A (5)
FAULT RESET RV
CRM2A (6)
START RV
CRM2A (7)
HOME RV
CRM2A (8)
ENBL RV
CRM2A (9)
RSR1/PNS1 RV
CRM2A (10)
RSR2/PNS2 RV
CRM2A (11)
RSR3/PNS3 RV
CRM2A (12)
RSR4/PNS4 RV
CRM2A (13)
RSR5/PNS5 RV
CRM2A (14)
RSR6/PNS6 RV
CRM2A (15)
RSR7/PNS7 RV
CRM2A (16)
RSR8/PNS8 RV
CRM2A (29)
PNSROBE RV
CRM2A (30)
PROD START RV
CRM2A (31)
SDI01 RV
CRM2A (32)
SDI02 RV

+24E
B A

Common setting
pin (ICOM1)

371
4. PERIPHERAL DEVICE, ARC WELDING,
AND END EFFECTOR INTERFACES CONNECTIONS B–80525E/04

NOTE
This is a connection diagram for +24v common.

Control unit Connector pin No. Peripheral device


(peripheral device control interface A1)

Receiver circuit LOAD


DV CRM2A (33)

ÂÂ Â
RELAY
CMDENBL

CRM2A (34)
SYSRDY DV LOAD
CRM2A (35)
PROGRUN DV LOAD
CRM2A (36)
PAUSED DV LOAD
CRM2A (38)
HELD DV LOAD
CRM2A (39)
FAULT DV LOAD
CRM2A (40)
ATPERCH DV LOAD
CRM2A (41)
TPENBL DV LOAD
CRM2A (43)
BATALM DV LOAD
CRM2A (44)
BUSY DV LOAD
CRM2A (45)
ACK1/SNO1 DV LOAD
CRM2A (46)
ACK2/SNO2 DV LOAD
CRM2A (19)
ACK3/SNO3 DV LOAD
CRM2A (20)
ACK4/SNO4 DV LOAD
CRM2A (21)
ACK5/SNO5 DV LOAD
CRM2A (22)
ACK6/SNO6 DV LOAD
CRM2A (24)
ACK7/SNO7 DV LOAD
CRM2A (25)
ACK8/SNO8 DV LOAD
CRM2A (26)
SNACK DV LOAD
CRM2A (27)
RESERVED DV LOAD

CRM2A(23,28,37,
42,47)
0V +24V
+24 V regulated
power supply

372
4. PERIPHERAL DEVICE, ARC WELDING,
B–80525E/04 CONNECTIONS AND END EFFECTOR INTERFACES

Control unit Connector pin No. Peripheral device


(peripheral device control interface A2)
+24E
CRM2B (49,50)

Receiver circuit
CRM2B (1)
SDI03 RV
CRM2B (2)
SDI04 RV
CRM2B (3)
SDI05 RV
CRM2B (4)
SDI06 RV
CRM2B (5)
SDI07 RV
CRM2B (6)
SDI08 RV
CRM2B (7)
SDI09 RV
CRM2B (8)
SDI10 RV
CRM2B (9)
SDI11 RV
CRM2B (10)
SDI12 RV
CRM2B (11)
SDI13 RV
CRM2B (12)
SDI14 RV
CRM2B (13)
SDI15 RV
CRM2B (14)
SDI16 RV
CRM2B (15)
SDI17 RV
CRM2B (16)
SDI18 RV
CRM2B (29)
SDI19 RV
CRM2B (30)
SDI20 RV
CRM2B (31)
SDI21 RV
CRM2B (32)
SDI22 RV

+24E
B A

Common setting
pin (ICOM2)

NOTE
This is a connection diagram for +24V common.

373
4. PERIPHERAL DEVICE, ARC WELDING,
AND END EFFECTOR INTERFACES CONNECTIONS B–80525E/04

Control unit Peripheral device


(peripheral device control interface A2)

Connector pin No. LOAD

Â
CRM2B (33)
SDO01 DV RELAY

CRM2B (34)
SDO02 DV LOAD
CRM2B (35)
SDO03 DV LOAD
CRM2B (36)
SDO04 DV LOAD
CRM2B (38)
SDO05 DV LOAD
CRM2B (39)
SDO06 DV LOAD
CRM2B (40)
SDO07 DV LOAD
CRM2B (41)
SDO08 DV LOAD
CRM2B (43)
SDO09 DV LOAD
CRM2B (44)
SDO10 DV LOAD
CRM2B (45)
SDO11 DV LOAD
CRM2B (46)
SDO12 DV LOAD
CRM2B (19)
SDO13 DV LOAD
CRM2B (20)
SDO14 DV LOAD
CRM2B (21)
SDO15 DV LOAD
CRM2B (22)
SDO16 DV LOAD
CRM2B (24)
SDO17 DV LOAD
CRM2B (25)
SDO18 DV LOAD
CRM2B (26)
SDO19 DV LOAD
CRM2B (27)
SDO20 DV LOAD

CRM2A(23,28,37,
42,47)
0V +24V
+24 V regulated
power supply

374
4. PERIPHERAL DEVICE, ARC WELDING,
B–80525E/04 CONNECTIONS AND END EFFECTOR INTERFACES

Control unit Peripheral device


Connector pin No.
(peripheral device control interface A3)
+24E
CRM2C (49,50)

Receiver circuit
CRM2C (1)
SDI23 RV
CRM2C (2)
SDI24 RV
CRM2C (3)
SDI25 RV
CRM2C (4)
SDI26 RV
CRM2C (5)
SDI27 RV
CRM2C (6)
SDI28 RV
CRM2C (7)
SDI29 RV
CRM2C (8)
SDI30 RV
CRM2C (9)
SDI31 RV
CRM2C (10)
SDI32 RV
CRM2C (11)
SDI33 RV
CRM2C (12)
SDI34 RV
CRM2C (13)
SDI35 RV
CRM2C (14)
SDI36 RV
CRM2C (15)
SDI37 RV
CRM2C (16)
SDI38 RV
CRM2C (29)
SDI39 RV
CRM2C (30)
SDI40 RV
CRM2C (31)
SDI41 RV
CRM2C (32)
SDI42 RV

+24E
B A

Common setting
pin (ICOM3)

NOTE
This is a connection diagram for +24V common.

375
4. PERIPHERAL DEVICE, ARC WELDING,
AND END EFFECTOR INTERFACES CONNECTIONS B–80525E/04

Control unit Peripheral device


(peripheral device control interface A3)

Connector pin No. LOAD

Â
CRM2C (33)
SDO21 DV
RELAY

ÂÂ
CRM2C (34)
SDO22 DV LOAD
CRM2C (35)
SDO23 DV LOAD
CRM2C (36)
SDO24 DV LOAD
CRM2C (38)
SDO25 DV LOAD
CRM2C (39)
SDO26 DV LOAD
CRM2C (40)
SDO27 DV LOAD
CRM2C (41)
SDO28 DV LOAD
CRM2C (43)
SDO29 DV LOAD
CRM2C (44)
SDO30 DV LOAD
CRM2C (45)
SDO31 DV LOAD
CRM2C (46)
SDO32 DV LOAD
CRM2C (19)
SDO33 DV LOAD
CRM2C (20)
SDO34 DV LOAD
CRM2C (21)
SDO35 DV LOAD
CRM2C (22)
SDO36 DV LOAD
CRM2C (24)
SDO37 DV LOAD
CRM2C (25)
SDO38 DV LOAD
CRM2C (26)
SDO39 DV LOAD
CRM2C (27)
SDO40 DV LOAD

CRM2C(23,28,37,
42,47)
0V +24V
+24 V regulated
power supply

376
4. PERIPHERAL DEVICE, ARC WELDING,
B–80525E/04 CONNECTIONS AND END EFFECTOR INTERFACES

Control unit Peripheral device


Connector pin No.
(peripheral device control interface A4)
+24E
CRM2D (49,50)

Receiver circuit
CRM2D (1)
SDI43 RV
CRM2D (2)
SDI44 RV
CRM2D (3)
SDI45 RV
CRM2D (4)
SDI46 RV
CRM2D (5)
SDI47 RV
CRM2D (6)
SDI48 RV
CRM2D (7)
SDI49 RV
CRM2D (8)
SDI40 RV
CRM2D (9)
SDI51 RV
CRM2D (10)
SDI52 RV
CRM2D (11)
SDI53 RV
CRM2D (12)
SDI54 RV
CRM2D (13)
SDI55 RV
CRM2D (14)
SDI56 RV
CRM2D (15)
SDI57 RV
CRM2D (16)
SDI58 RV
CRM2D (29)
SDI59 RV
CRM2D (30)
SDI60 RV
CRM2D (31)
SDI61 RV
CRM2D (32)
SDI62 RV

+24E
B A

Common setting
pin (ICOM4)

NOTE
This is a connection diagram for +24V common.

377
4. PERIPHERAL DEVICE, ARC WELDING,
AND END EFFECTOR INTERFACES CONNECTIONS B–80525E/04

Control unit Peripheral device


(peripheral device control interface A4)

Connector pin No. LOAD

Â
CRM2D (33)
SDO41 DV
RELAY

ÂÂ
CRM2D (34)
SDO42 DV LOAD
CRM2D (35)
SDO43 DV LOAD
CRM2D (36)
SDO44 DV LOAD
CRM2D (38)
SDO45 DV LOAD
CRM2D (39)
SDO46 DV LOAD
CRM2D (40)
SDO47 DV LOAD
CRM2D (41)
SDO48 DV LOAD
CRM2D (43)
SDO49 DV LOAD
CRM2D (44)
SDO50 DV LOAD
CRM2D (45)
SDO51 DV LOAD
CRM2D (46)
SDO52 DV LOAD
CRM2D (19)
SDO53 DV LOAD
CRM2D (20)
SDO54 DV LOAD
CRM2D (21)
SDO55 DV LOAD
CRM2D (22)
SDO56 DV LOAD
CRM2D (24)
SDO57 DV LOAD
CRM2D (25)
SDO58 DV LOAD
CRM2D (26)
SDO59 DV LOAD
CRM2D (27)
SDO60 DV LOAD

CRM2D(23,28,37,
42,47)
0V +24V
+24 V regulated
power supply

378
4. PERIPHERAL DEVICE, ARC WELDING,
B–80525E/04 CONNECTIONS AND END EFFECTOR INTERFACES

4.4.2
Connection Between
the Mechanical Unit
and End Effector

EE

379
4. PERIPHERAL DEVICE, ARC WELDING,
AND END EFFECTOR INTERFACES CONNECTIONS B–80525E/04

NOTE
1. This is a connection diagram for +24V common.
2. The connector pin numbers of the end effector depend on
the robot.

380
4. PERIPHERAL DEVICE, ARC WELDING,
B–80525E/04 CONNECTIONS AND END EFFECTOR INTERFACES

4.4.3
Connection Between
the Control Unit and
Welder

Control unit
Welder interface
CRW1

Welder

Analog input interface


CRW2

Peripheral device

Applicable process I/O printed circuit board

Type Drawing number CRW1 CRW2


CA A05B–2300–J030
CB A05B–2300–J031  
DA A05B–2300–J035
EA A05B–2300–J040  

Note1) Welder and peripheral device connection cable is option.

381
4. PERIPHERAL DEVICE, ARC WELDING,
AND END EFFECTOR INTERFACES CONNECTIONS B–80525E/04

Control unit Welder


(Welding interface)
Connector pin number MS connector pin number

Welding voltage
command signal
The input impedance
shall be more than 3.3kΩ
high–pass filter shall be
provided.
Wire speed
command signal

Welding voltage
detection signal

Output signals
without ripples.

Welding current
detector signal

R=100Ω or more

Wire soldering
detector signal

Welding power supply

382
4. PERIPHERAL DEVICE, ARC WELDING,
B–80525E/04 CONNECTIONS AND END EFFECTOR INTERFACES

Control unit Welder


(Welding interface)

Welding start
signal

Gas signal

Wire inching
(positive) signal
Wire inching
(negative) signal

+24V regulated
power supply

Receiver circuit
Arc detection
signal
Gas shortage
detection signal
Wire cut
detection signal
Cooling water
shortage detection
signal
Welding power
supplu abnomality
signal

Common switching
set pin

Shield
FG (cabinet ground)

383
4. PERIPHERAL DEVICE, ARC WELDING,
AND END EFFECTOR INTERFACES CONNECTIONS B–80525E/04

Control unit Peripheral device


(Analog input interface)

Output signals without


ripples.

384
4. PERIPHERAL DEVICE, ARC WELDING,
B–80525E/04 CONNECTIONS AND END EFFECTOR INTERFACES

4.5 This section describes the specifications of the digital I/O signals
interfaced with the peripheral device, end effector, and arc welder.
DIGITAL I/O SIGNAL
SPECIFICATIONS

4.5.1
Peripheral Device (1) Output signals in peripheral device interface A
Interface Example of connection

Spark killer diode

+24V

0.2 A
or less

0V

+24V

Lamp
0.2 A
or less

0V
Protective resistance

Electrical specifications
Rated voltage : 24 VDC
Maximum applied voltage : 30 VDC
Maximum load current : 0.2 A
Transistor type : Open collector NPN
Saturation voltage at connection : 1.0 V (approx.)

Spark killer diode


Rated peak reverse voltage : 100 V or more
Rated effective forward current : 1 A or more

Note on use
Do not use the +24 V power supply of the robot.
When loading a relay, solenoid, and so on directly, connect them in
parallel with diodes for preventing back electromotive force.
If a load is connected causing a surge current when a lamp is turned
on, use a protective resistance.

Applicable signals
Output signals of process I/O printed circuit board CRM2
CMDENBL, SYSRDY, PROGRUN, PAUSED, HELD, FAULT,
ATPERCH, TPENBL, BATALM, BUSY, ACK1 to ACK8, SNO1 to
SNO8, SNACK, SDO1 to SDO20

385
4. PERIPHERAL DEVICE, ARC WELDING,
AND END EFFECTOR INTERFACES CONNECTIONS B–80525E/04

(2) Input signals in peripheral device interface A


Example of connection

+24V

RV
3.3 kW
+24V

B A
ICOM

Electrical specifications of the receiver


Type : Grounded voltage receiver
Rated input voltage : Contact close
: +20 V to +28 V
Contact open
: 0 V to +4 V
Maximum applied input voltage : +28 VDC
Input impedance : 3.3 kΩ (approx.)
Response time : 5 ms to 20 ms
Specifications of the peripheral device contact
Rated contact capacity : 30 VDC, 50 mA or more
Input signal width : 200 ms or more (on/off)
Chattering time : 5 ms or less
Closed circuit resistance : 100 Ω or less
Opened circuit resistance : 100 kΩ or more

TB (Signal) TB (Signal) TB

Peripheral device
contact signal

Robot receiver signal


TC TC TB ; Chattering 5 ms or less
TC ; 5 to 20 ms

Note on use
Apply the +24 V power at the robot to the receiver.
However, the above signal specifications must be satisfied at the
robot receiver.
Applicable signals
Input signals of process I/O printed circuit board CRM2
*IMSTP, *HOLD, *SFSD, CSTOPI, FAULT RESET, START,
HOME, ENBL, RSR1 to RSR8, PNS1 to PNS8, PNSTROBE,
PROD START, SDI1 to SDI22

386
4. PERIPHERAL DEVICE, ARC WELDING,
B–80525E/04 CONNECTIONS AND END EFFECTOR INTERFACES

4.5.2
End Effector Control (1) Output signals
Interface Example of connection

Spark killer diode

+24V

0.2 A
or less

0V

+24V
Lamp
0.2 A
or less

0V
Protective resistance

Electrical specifications
Rated voltage : 24 VDC
Maximum applied voltage : 30 VDC
Maximum load current : 0.2 A
Transistor type : Open collector NPN
Saturation voltage at connection : 1.0 V (approx.)

Spark killer diode


Rated peak reverse voltage : 100 V or more
Rated effective forward current : 1 A or more

Note on use
The +24 V power supply at the robot can be used when the total
current of the welding interface and end effector interface is 0.7 A or
less.
When loading a relay, solenoid, and so on directly, connect them in
parallel with diodes for preventing back electromotive force.
If a load is connected causing a surge current when a lamp is turned
on, use a protective resistance.

Applicable signals
Output signals of the end effector control interface
RDO1 to RDO8

387
4. PERIPHERAL DEVICE, ARC WELDING,
AND END EFFECTOR INTERFACES CONNECTIONS B–80525E/04

(2) Input signal


Example of connection

+24V

RV

3.3 kW
+24V

B A
ICOM

Electrical specifications of the receiver


Type : Grounded voltage receiver
Rated input voltage : Contact close : +20 V to +28 V
Contact open : 0 V to +4 V
Maximum applied input voltage : +28 VDC
Input impedance : 3.3 kΩ (approx.)
Response time : 5 ms to 20 ms

Specifications of peripheral device contact


Rated contact capacity : 30 VDC, 50 mA or more
Input signal width : 200 ms or more (on/off)
Chattering time : 5 ms or less
Closed circuit resistance : 100 Ω or less
Opened circuit resistance : 100 kΩ or more

TB (Signal) TB (Signal) TB

Peripheral device
contact signal

Robot receiver signal


TC TC
TB ; Chattering 5 ms or less
TC ; 5 to 20 ms

Note on use
Apply the +24 V power at the robot to the receiver.
However, the above signal specifications must be satisfied at the
robot receiver.

Applicable signals
Input signals of the end effector control interface
RDI1 to RDI8, *HBK, *PPABN

388
4. PERIPHERAL DEVICE, ARC WELDING,
B–80525E/04 CONNECTIONS AND END EFFECTOR INTERFACES

4.5.3
I/O Signal (1) Digital output signal specifications for arc–welding interface
Specifications for
ARC–Welding Interface Example connection
Spark killer diode

0.2 A or
less

Electrical characteristics
Rated voltage: 24 VDC
Maximum applied voltage: 30 VDC
Maximum load current: 0.2 A
Transistor type: Open–collector NPN
Saturation voltage at on: About 1.0 V
Spark killer diode
Rated peak reverse voltage: 100 V or more
Rated effective forward current: 1 A or more
NOTE on use
NOTE
A power voltage of +24 V, provided for the robot, can be
used for interface signals of up to 0.7 A. This limit applies
to the sum of the currents flowing through the arc–welding
and end–effector control interfaces. To directly drive a relay
or solenoid, connect a diode preventing back electromotive
force to the load in parallel. To connect a load which
generates an inrush current upon power–on connect a
protective resistor.

Applicable signals
– Output signals on the arc–welding interface
– WDO1 to WDO8

389
4. PERIPHERAL DEVICE, ARC WELDING,
AND END EFFECTOR INTERFACES CONNECTIONS B–80525E/04

(2) Digital input signal specifications for arc–welding interface

Example connection

Electrical characteristics of receivers


Type: Grounded voltage receiver
Rated input voltage: +20 to +28 V with contacts closed
0 to +4 V when open
Maximum input voltage: +28 VDC
Input impedance: About 3.3 k
Response time: 5 to 20 ms
Contact specifications for peripherals
Rated contact capacity: 30 VDC, 50 mA or more
Input signal width: 200 ms or more for on and off states
Chattering period: 5 ms or less
Closed–circuit resistance: 100 or less
Open–circuit resistance: 100 k or more

(Signal) (Signal)

Contact signal
for peripheral

Receiver
signal for robot

TB: Chattering of 5 ms or less


TC: 5 to 20 ms

NOTE on use
NOTE
Supply the +24 V power, provided for the robot, to the
receivers. The receiver signal on the robot must satisfy the
signal timing specified above.

Applicable signals
– Input signals for arc–welding interface
– WDI1 to WDI8
390
4. PERIPHERAL DEVICE, ARC WELDING,
B–80525E/04 CONNECTIONS AND END EFFECTOR INTERFACES

(3) Analog output signal specifications for arc–welding interface


(Welding voltage command, wire–feedrate command)
Example connection
Welder

NOTE on use
NOTE
Input impedance: 3.3 k or more
Connect a high–pass filter.

(4) Analog input signal specifications for arc–welding interface


(Welding–voltage detection, welding–current detection)
Example connection
Welder

NOTE on use
NOTE
Output a signal with no ripple.

(Wire deposit detection: WDI+ and WDI–)

Example connection
Welder

Welding electrode

NOTE on use
NOTE
Connect a resistor of 100 or more between the positive and
negative electrodes of the welder. Isolate the deposit
detection signals for TIG welding from the welding circuit,
which uses high–frequency components. The dielectric
withstand voltage of this circuit is 80 V.

391
4. PERIPHERAL DEVICE, ARC WELDING,
AND END EFFECTOR INTERFACES CONNECTIONS B–80525E/04

4.6 If the customer manufactures cables, conform to the FANUC standard


cables described in this section.
SPECIFICATIONS OF
(See the description in ”Peripheral Device Interface” in this manual for
THE CABLES USED the specifications of the FANUC standard cables.)
FOR PERIPHERAL
DEVICES AND
WELDERS
4.6.1
Peripheral Device
Interface A Cable
(CRM2: Honda
Tsushin, 50 pins)
Honda Tsushin Honda Tsushin

Process I/O Peripheral


device

Honda Tsushin
Honda Tsushin’s MR50RFH
Supplied with an ordered cable

4.6.2
Peripheral Device
Interface B Cable
(CRM4: Honda
Tsushin, 20 pins)
Honda Tsushin Honda Tsushin

Process I/O Peripheral


device
CRM4*

Honda Tsushin
Honda Tsushin’s MR20RFH
Supplied with an ordered cable

392
4. PERIPHERAL DEVICE, ARC WELDING,
B–80525E/04 CONNECTIONS AND END EFFECTOR INTERFACES

4.6.3 Be sure to use our cable for connection of welder.


ARC Weld Connection
Cable (CRW1: Honda
Tsushin, 34 pins)

ARC welder

Honda Tsushin

Process I/O

Japan Aviation Electronics


Industry Ltd.
MS3102A28–21S
Honda Tsushin Japan Aviation Electronics Standard position of guide key
MR34RFA Industry Ltd.
MS3108B28–21P
MS3057–16

393
4. PERIPHERAL DEVICE, ARC WELDING,
AND END EFFECTOR INTERFACES CONNECTIONS B–80525E/04

4.7
CABLE
CONNECTION FOR
THE PERIPHERAL
DEVICES, END
EFFECTORS, AND
ARC WELDERS

4.7.1 Fig. 4.7.1 shows the connection of the peripheral device cable in the
control unit.
Peripheral Device
Connection Cable

Operator’s box Process I/O EA

For peripheral device

Note : Tight the clamp with hand.


Metallic clamp Do not use pliers.

External shield

Shield plate

Noise protection: Remove a part of the sheath of a peripheral cable to expose the outside shield.
Secure the cable to the shield plate with the metallic clamp at the exposed position.

Fig.4.7.1 (a) Peripheral Device Cable Connection (i cabinet)

394
4. PERIPHERAL DEVICE, ARC WELDING,
B–80525E/04 CONNECTIONS AND END EFFECTOR INTERFACES

Process I/O printed circuit board


CA/CB/DA

I/O unit model A


or
I/O unit model B

Note : Tight the clamp with hand.


Do not use pliers.
Metallic clamp

External shield

Shield plate

Noise protection: Remove a part of the sheath of a peripheral cable to expose the outside shield.
Secure the cable to the shield plate with the metallic clamp at the exposed position.

Fig.4.7.1 (b) Peripheral Device Cable Connection (B cabinet)

395
4. PERIPHERAL DEVICE, ARC WELDING,
AND END EFFECTOR INTERFACES CONNECTIONS B–80525E/04

4.7.2
Peripheral Device (1) Fig. 4.7.2 shows the connector for peripheral device cables A and B.
Cable Connector

Connector Applicable Dimensions


Remark
specifications interface A (B) C (D)
MR50LMH CRM2 67.9 73.5 44.8 18 Honda Tsushin Kogyo,
50 pins
MR20LMH CRM4 39.3 44.9 39.8 17 Honda Tsushin Kogyo,
20 pins

Symbol Name
 Connector cover
 Cable clamp screw
 Connector clamp spring
Connector clamp screw

Connector 50 pins (male) MR50MH
20 pins (male) MR20MH

Fig.4.7.2 (a) Peripheral Device Cable Connector (Honda Tsushin Kogyo)

396
4. PERIPHERAL DEVICE, ARC WELDING,
B–80525E/04 CONNECTIONS AND END EFFECTOR INTERFACES

(2) Peripheral device connector

Dimen-
Connector Applicable sions Remark
specifications interface
A B
MR50RFH (CRM2) 61.4 56.4 Honda Tsushin Kogyo,
50 pins
MR20RFH (CRM4) 39.3 44.9 Honda Tsushin Kogyo,
20 pins

Symbol Name
 Connector clamp screw
 Screw ø2.6_8
 Connector (MR50RFH)
(MR20RFH)

Fig.4.7.2 (b) Peripheral Device Connector (Honda Tsushin Kogyo)

397
4. PERIPHERAL DEVICE, ARC WELDING,
AND END EFFECTOR INTERFACES CONNECTIONS B–80525E/04

4.7.3
End Effector Cable (1) Connector
Connector

A : M301 E : ø33
B : 63.0 F : 11.2
C : 54.5 G : 24.7
D : 9.6 to 15.0 (Inside diameter)
Manufactured by Daiichi Denshi Kogyo JMLP2524M

Fig.4.7.3 (a) Connector (Elbow type)

A : M301 E : ø33
B : 54.1 F : 11.2
C : 37.5 G : 24.7
D : 9.6 to 15.0 (Inside diameter)
Manufactured by Daiichi Denshi Kogyo JMLP2524M

Fig.4.7.3 (b) Connector (Straight type)

398
4. PERIPHERAL DEVICE, ARC WELDING,
B–80525E/04 CONNECTIONS AND END EFFECTOR INTERFACES

4.7.4
Recommended Cables (1) Peripheral device connection cable
Connect a peripheral device using a completely shielded, heavily
protected cable conforming to the specifications in Table 4.7.5 (a).
Allow an extra 50 cm for routing the cable in the control unit.
The maximum cable length is 30 m.
Table 4.7.4 (a) Recommended Cable (for Peripheral Device Connection)

Electrical characteris-
Conductor Effective
Sheath tics
Number Wire specifications outside
thickness Conductor Allowable
of wires (FANUC specifications) Diameter Configura- diameter
(mm) resistance current
(mm) tion (mm)
(Ω/km) (A)
50 A66L-0001-0042 ø1.05 7/0.18 1.5 ø12.5 106 1.6
AWG24
20 A66L-0001-0041 ø1.05 7/0.18 1.5 ø10.5 106 1.6
AWG24

(2) End effector connection cable


Connect an end effector using a heavily protected cable with a
movable wire conforming to the specifications in Table 4.7.5 (b).
The cable length is determined so that the cable will not interfere with
the end effector and the wrist can move through its full stroke.
Table 4.7.4 (b) Recommended Cable (for End Effector Connection)

Electrical characteris-
Conductor Effective
Sheath tics
Number Wire specifications outside
thickness Conductor Allowable
of wires (FANUC specifications) Diameter Configura- diameter
(mm) resistance current
(mm) tion (mm)
(Ω/km) (A)
6 A66L-0001-0143 ø1.1 40/0.08 1.0 ø5.3 91 3.7
AWG24
20 A66L-0001-0144 ø1.1 40/0.08 1.0 ø8.6 91 2.3
AWG24

399
4. PERIPHERAL DEVICE, ARC WELDING,
AND END EFFECTOR INTERFACES CONNECTIONS B–80525E/04

4.8
QUICK CHANGE
(i–cabinet)

4.8.1 With R–J2, the cabinet is so structured that it can be divided into a front
General cabinet unit and rear cabinet unit to allow immediate control unit
replacement if a failure occurs. The front cabinet unit houses units such
as a servo amplifier and control printed circuit board. The rear cabinet
unit houses units such as a transformer and emergency stop control unit.
If a failure in the control unit cannot be located easily and requires a long
troubleshooting time before recovery, operation can be resumed in about
15 minutes (excluding a time required to back up data such as programs)
by replacing the front cabinet unit. This replacement operation is referred
to as quick change. (Note that if an alarm associated with the emergency
stop system is issued, the operator’s box and emergency stop control unit
mounted in the rear cabinet unit must be checked first.)

Step 1: Start of work


Faulty unit
Disconnect the cables connecting
the front and rear units.

Front cabinet unit Rear cabinet unit

Step 2: Separating the front unit from the rear unit


Remove the brackets joining the front
unit and rear unit, then pull out the front
cabinet unit toward you.

400
4. PERIPHERAL DEVICE, ARC WELDING,
B–80525E/04 CONNECTIONS AND END EFFECTOR INTERFACES

Step 3: Replacement unit installation


Install a replacement unit.

Replacement unit

Step 4: Cable connection and start–up


Connect the cables by reversing the pro-
cedure used to disconnect the cables,
then load the backup data for start–up.

401
4. PERIPHERAL DEVICE, ARC WELDING,
AND END EFFECTOR INTERFACES CONNECTIONS B–80525E/04

4.8.2
Flowchart
Occurrence of failure

Back up contents of memory


if not backed up yet(*1)(*3).

Start quick change.

Prepare replacement unit.

Remove faulty cabinet unit.


See Section 4.8.6.
Install replacement unit.

Read memory of faulty cabinet


unit via memory card, for
example, into replacement unit.
(Refer to the description of file I/O
in the operator’s manual.)(*3)

Start up control unit.

”Servo – 38 Pulse count YES


mismatch” occurred?

NO Perform operation indicated in *2.

NO
Control unit normal?

Cables wired correctly? YES


Printed circuit board specification Perform work such as laying
s same as those of faulty cabinet cables neatly and storing used
unit? tools.
Memory read normally?

Restart control unit. If control unit


cannot be started yet, contact
FANUC service center.

End of quick change

402
4. PERIPHERAL DEVICE, ARC WELDING,
B–80525E/04 CONNECTIONS AND END EFFECTOR INTERFACES

NOTE
1 In backup operation, save all of the TPE program, system
files, and applications. Also save the options of position
registers and pallet registers, if included. For backup
operation, see *3 below, and also refer to the description of
file I/O in the operator’s manual.
2 When the alarm ”Servo –38 Pulse count mismatch” is
issued, take action according to the following procedure:
1 Display the system variable screen.
2 Set $MCR.$SPC_RESET to TRUE.
($MCR.$SPC_RESET is reset to FALSE immediately
after being set to TRUE, but this poses no problem.)
3 Set $DMR_GRP.$MASTER_DONE to TRUE.
4 Turn off the power.
3 Two types of external memory units are available; memory
cards and Handy Files. A memory card allows data to be
saved and read at high speed. (When a system requires
about 15 minutes to save system data and programs with
a Handy File, for example, the same information can be
saved using a memory card in about 30 seconds.) The
method of using a memory card is described below.

(1) Installing a memory card


– Install the memory card interface printed circuit board (referred to
as the interface printed circuit board) in the slot next to the power
supply unit as shown below.
– Before installing or removing the interface printed circuit board,
turn off the power to the control unit. Otherwise, the interface
printed circuit board, memory card, and backplane and so forth can
be damaged. Moreover, install the interface printed circuit board
securely. If the interface printed circuit board is not installed
securely, a malfunction can occur.

403
4. PERIPHERAL DEVICE, ARC WELDING,
AND END EFFECTOR INTERFACES CONNECTIONS B–80525E/04

Remove the blank


plate next to the
power supply unit.
Power supply unit

Memory card interface printed circuit board

Memory card

(2) Setting
 Install the interface printed circuit board in the control unit, then
insert the memory card into the interface printed circuit board.
 Turn on the power to the control unit.
 Press the SCREEN SELECT key on the teach pendant, then select
7 (File).
Press the F5 key (Function) on the teach pendant, then select 1
(Switch Unit).

The upper part of the teach pendant screen displays selectable
units. Select 3 (Memory Card (MC:)). The left end of the fourth
line from the top of the teach pendant screen displays MC: *.*.

NOTE
If Memory Card (MC:) is not displayed, check the
connection of the interface printed circuit board.

This makes the memory card usable. Operations such as save,


read, and list processing can be performed using the same
procedures as used for the Handy File. (Refer to the description
of file I/O in the operator’s manual.)

NOTE
If the setting procedure above is used, the Handy File
cannot be used. To use the Handy File, select 1 (Serial
Floppy Disk) in step 5.

(3) Memory card initialization


As with a floppy disk, a memory card must be initialized before it can
be used. (Set the switch on the memory card to the middle position
to release write protection.)
 Select Memory Card (MC:) in (2) above.
 Press the SCREEN SELECT key on the teach pendant, then select
7 (File).
 Press the F5 key (Function) on the teach pendant, then select
Format.
The teach pendant screen prompts the user for confirmation.
Press the F4 key (Yes).

The system asks you to enter a volume label. Press the INPUT
key.
404
4. PERIPHERAL DEVICE, ARC WELDING,
B–80525E/04 CONNECTIONS AND END EFFECTOR INTERFACES

4.8.3 A replacement front cabinet unit for quick change contains units such as
Replacement front a control printed circuit board, servo amplifier, and fan.
cabinet unit The configuration of the control printed circuit board, in particular, varies
from one system to another. So, prepare a replacement front cabinet unit
carefully. The configuration of major options is described below.

Model B unit (option)

Servo amplifier

Option printed circuit board

Power supply unit

Main CPU printed circuit board

1) The servo amplifier specification varies from one model of robot to


another.
2) The control printed circuit board consists of backplanes, a main CPU
printed circuit board, power supply unit, option printed circuit board,
and model B unit (option). The main CPU printed circuit board and
power supply unit are always necessary. For a system with no option
printed circuit board mounted, two slots of backplanes can be
specified. However, when an option printed circuit board is used,
three slots of backplanes are required.
3) On the main CPU printed circuit board, various modules are
mounted. These modules must have the same specifications as those
of the system before replacement.

405
4. PERIPHERAL DEVICE, ARC WELDING,
AND END EFFECTOR INTERFACES CONNECTIONS B–80525E/04

4.8.4 The following items are required for quick change:


Hardware items
required for quick
change 1. Replacement cabinet unit (This unit must have the same specifi-
cations as the faulty unit. Pay attention to the option configura-
tion. No replacement is allowed between different models of ro-
bots.)
2. External memory unit such as a memory card to which the con-
tents of memory of the faulty unit are saved
3. Flat–blade screwdriver
4. Phillips screwdriver

4.8.5 Be sure to read this section before starting quick change.


Notes on quick change – Quick change must be performed by two persons.
– Required data must already be saved to an external memory unit
such as a memory card.
– Be sure to turn off the main power supply unit connected to the
control unit before starting quick change.
– A replacement unit for quick change must have an FROM module
with the same contents as those of the faulty unit, and must already
have its initial start work completed.

4.8.6 Replace a faulty unit with a replacement unit according to steps 


through .
Faulty unit
replacement procedure  Person A: Remove the two brackets securing the top cover, then
open the door of the control unit.
Person B: Check that the main power supply unit connected to the
control unit is turned off. Manually loosen the cap of
the cord grip securing the power cable, then pull the
rubber ring installed on the cable toward you. Next,
remove the four mounting screws securing the side
plate with a flat–blade screwdriver, then set the breaker
mounted in the control unit to off (when the control unit
has no breaker, set the breaker mounted in the
operator’s box, for example, to off.) Then, separate the
side plate as shown below. At this time, leave the
cables connected.

406
4. PERIPHERAL DEVICE, ARC WELDING,
B–80525E/04 CONNECTIONS AND END EFFECTOR INTERFACES

Cord grip

Rubber ring

Cap

Brackets (2 locations)

Side plate mounting screws


Each screw can be removed by rotating it by a one–fourth turn.

1/4 turn

Power cable

Operator’s box cable

407
4. PERIPHERAL DEVICE, ARC WELDING,
AND END EFFECTOR INTERFACES CONNECTIONS B–80525E/04

Person A is to perform steps –1 to –4. Person B is to perform step


–5.
–1 Open the door of the front cabinet unit, then disconnect the
cables below.
– Cables connected to CP1 and CP2 of the power supply unit
– Cables connected to JF21, JRM10, JD1A, JD17, JRM3, and
CRM10 of the main CPU printed circuit board (When a process I/O
printed circuit board and model B unit are mounted, the cable
connected to JD1A need not be disconnected. See 2–2.)
– Cables connected to CN7B, CN8B, CN1, and CN6

408
4. PERIPHERAL DEVICE, ARC WELDING,
B–80525E/04 CONNECTIONS AND END EFFECTOR INTERFACES

Model B unit

Process I/O printed circuit board


or ME–NET printed circuit board
Power supply unit
Servo amplifier
Main CPU printed circuit board

Servo amplifier Main CPU printed circuit board Power supply unit

409
4. PERIPHERAL DEVICE, ARC WELDING,
AND END EFFECTOR INTERFACES CONNECTIONS B–80525E/04

–2 When a process I/O printed circuit board, ME–NET printed


circuit board, and model B unit are mounted, disconnect the
cables and fixing plate below in addition to the cables listed in
–1.
– Cables connected to JD4B, CRM2, and CRW1 of the process I/O
printed circuit board, and cable fixing plate
– Cable connected to L1 (or L2) of the ME–NET printed circuit
board
– Cables connected to JD1A, CRS7, CRS8A, and CRS8B of the
model B unit

410
4. PERIPHERAL DEVICE, ARC WELDING,
B–80525E/04 CONNECTIONS AND END EFFECTOR INTERFACES

Peripheral equipment
connection cables

Fixing plate for peripheral


I/O model B unit equipment connection cables

Process I/O printed circuit board


or ME–NET printed circuit board

Process I/O printed circuit board ME–NET printed circuit board

I/O model B unit

Peripheral equipment connection interface

411
4. PERIPHERAL DEVICE, ARC WELDING,
AND END EFFECTOR INTERFACES CONNECTIONS B–80525E/04

–3 Loosen the cable holders located on the near side of the cabinet,
then pull out the cables disconnected in steps –1 and –2.

Cable holder

–4 Disconnect the cables connected to the two Faston terminals


located in the inner left part of the cabinet.

412
4. PERIPHERAL DEVICE, ARC WELDING,
B–80525E/04 CONNECTIONS AND END EFFECTOR INTERFACES

Faston terminal

–5 Disconnect the cables below from the breaker room.


– Cables connected to JRF2, CRM9, and CRM15 of the emergency
stop control printed circuit board
– Cables (screwed at three locations) connected to the secondary side
(pins 2, 4, and 6) of the MCC
– Relay connectors for robot connection cables(*1)

NOTE
The robot connection cables consist of six cables, J1M to
J6M. The J1M to J6M cables are connected using relay
connectors. (These connectors have a strong mating
power.) These cables can be pulled out of the cabinet so
that the cables can be easily connected or disconnected.
When disconnecting the cables, pull the cables out of the
cabinet to make the work easier to perform.

413
4. PERIPHERAL DEVICE, ARC WELDING,
AND END EFFECTOR INTERFACES CONNECTIONS B–80525E/04

Emergency stop control printed


circuit board

Pull the cables out of the cabinet.

Disconnect the cables while holding down the lock on the top of
the connector.
J1–J3 connector
Emergency stop control printed
circuit board Lock

Robot side cables

Control unit side cables

J4–J6 connector

414
4. PERIPHERAL DEVICE, ARC WELDING,
B–80525E/04 CONNECTIONS AND END EFFECTOR INTERFACES

 Separate the front cabinet unit from the rear cabinet unit
The front cabinet unit weighs about 40 kg. This work must be
performed by two persons. While one person is holding the front
cabinet unit, the other person is to remove the lower brackets and the
upper brackets. Next, the two persons gradually pull the front cabinet
unit about 10 cm toward the near side. (When there is a step between
the front cabinet unit and the floor, be careful not to drop the front
cabinet unit.) In this state, the cables drop through openings for
cables on the front and rear cabinet units. Ensuring that the cables do
not tangle, separate the front cabinet unit.

(Front cabinet unit) (Rear cabinet unit)

Bracket
(two brackets each on
the right and left side)

Cables

Opening for cables

415
4. PERIPHERAL DEVICE, ARC WELDING,
AND END EFFECTOR INTERFACES CONNECTIONS B–80525E/04

Install a replacement unit by reversing steps 1 through 3, observing


the notes below.
Notes on connection of the front and rear cabinet units:
– When running the cables through the openings for cables, run the
robot connection cables on the near side, and run the other cables
on the far side.
– Ensure that the cables are not caught between the front and rear
cabinet units. For easier work, connect the relay connectors for the
robot connection cables outside the cabinet, then push the
connectors into the front cabinet unit.
– Ensure that the cables connected to the Faston terminals located in
the inner left part of the front cabinet unit are not caught between
the front and rear cabinet units.
– When making connections to the connectors and terminals, be
careful not to make wrong connections by checking the wire marks
and stamps provided on the cables. (The connectors for the robot
connection cables have different colors. Match these colors when
making connections.)

416
4. PERIPHERAL DEVICE, ARC WELDING,
B–80525E/04 CONNECTIONS AND END EFFECTOR INTERFACES

Front cabinet unit Rear cabinet unit

Colors of robot connection


cable connectors
Connector No. Color
White
Black
Cables other than the robot
Green
Robot connection cables connection cables
(to be run on the near side) (to be run on the far side) White
Black
Green

Make a connection outside the Ensure that the cables are not caught between
cabinet, then push the connectors the front and rear cabinet units.
into the front cabinet unit.

417
5. TRANSPORTATION AND
INSTALLATION CONNECTIONS B–80525E/04

5 TRANSPORTATION AND INSTALLATION

5.1 The control unit is transported by a crane. Attach a rope to eye bolts at
the top of the control unit.
TRANSPORTATION

NOTE
A combination control unit is incorporated into the
mechanical unit of the robot.

(I–cabinet separate type) (B–cabinet)

Fig.5.1 Transportation

418
5. TRANSPORTATION AND
B–80525E/04 CONNECTIONS INSTALLATION

5.2
INSTALLATION

5.2.1 When installing the control unit, allow the space for maintenance shown
Installation Area in the following figure.

Fig.5.2.1 (a) Installation Area (Separate type i cabinet)

419
5. TRANSPORTATION AND
INSTALLATION CONNECTIONS B–80525E/04

Control unit Control unit Control unit

Fig.5.2.1 (b) Installation Area (B cabinet : ARC Mate100, ARC Mate120, ARC Mate 100i, ARC Mate 120i, S–6, S–12,
M–6i, M–16i, S–420i, S–450, S–500, S–700, S–800, M–410i, M–500, M–400i, M–710i, A–520i)

Additional Control unit


Control unit locker locker Control unit

Fig.5.2.1 (c) Installation Area (S–900)

420
5. TRANSPORTATION AND
B–80525E/04 CONNECTIONS INSTALLATION

5.2.2
Connecting Cables at
Installation
(Combined Type of i
Cabinet)

Operator’s box

Input power cable

Teach pendant

Peripheral device connection cable

Fig.5.2.2(a) Connecting Cables at Installation

421
5. TRANSPORTATION AND
INSTALLATION CONNECTIONS B–80525E/04

Separate type of i
cabinet

Operator’s box

Input power cable

Teach pendant

Robot mechanical unit connection cable

Peripheral device connection cable

Fig.5.2.2 (b) Connecting Cables at Installation (i cabinet)

422
5. TRANSPORTATION AND
B–80525E/04 CONNECTIONS INSTALLATION

(B cabinet)

Teach pendant connection

Robot mechanical unit


connection cable

Peripheral device
connection cable
Input power cable connection

Welding interface
connection cable

Fig.5.2.2 (c) Connecting Cables at Installation (B cabinet)

423
5. TRANSPORTATION AND
INSTALLATION CONNECTIONS B–80525E/04

(Cabinet for M–410i)

Operator’s box
connection

Teach pendant
connection

Input power cable


Cabinet for M410i is installed
in Robot’s frame

Peripheral device
connection cable

Fig.5.2.2 (d) Connecting Cables at Installation (Cabinet for M–410i)

424
5. TRANSPORTATION AND
B–80525E/04 CONNECTIONS INSTALLATION

5.2.3 (ARC Mate100, ARC Mate120, ARC Mate 100i, ARC Mate 120i, S–6,
Separate–Type Control S–12, M–6i, M–16i, S–420i, S–500, S–700, M–710i, A–520i)
Unit of i Cabinet The control unit can be separated from the robot. To enable separate
installation of the control unit, an optional robot connection cable is
required.

Robot

Robot connection cable


(option)

Controller

Fig.5.2.3 Assembly of Controller

425
5. TRANSPORTATION AND
INSTALLATION CONNECTIONS B–80525E/04

5.3
INSTALLATION
CONDITION
Item Model Specifications/condition
Line filter All models Three–phase 200 VAC +10% –15%, 50 q1 Hz;
three–phase 200 to 220 VAC +10% –15%, 60 q1 Hz
Transformer All models Three–phase 220, 240, 380, 415, 460, 480, 500, 550, or
575 V +10% –15%, 50/60 q1 Hz
Input power source capac- ARC Mate 100, S–6, ARC 2.5kVA
ity Mate 100i, M–6i, M–16i
ARC Mate 120, ARC Mate 3kVA
120i, S–12, A–520i
S–700, M–710i 6.5kVA
S–500, M–400i 7kVA
S–420i, S–800, M–410i, 12kVA
M–500, S–450
S–900 18kVA
Average power consump- ARC Mate 100, ARC Mate 120, 1.0KW
tion ARC Mate 120i, S–6, S–12,
ARC Mate100i, M–6i, M–16i
S–500, S–700, M–710i, 1.7KW
M–400i
M–500, A–520i 2.0KW
S–420i, S–800, M–410i, 2.5KW
S–450
S–900 3.5KW
Permissible ambient temper- All models 0xC to 45xC
ature
Permissible ambient humid- All models 75% RH or less, non–condensing, up to 95% RH for a lim-
ity ited period (within one month)
Surrounding gas All models No corrosive gas. When using the robot in an environment
with a high concentration of dust or coolant, consult with
your FANUC sales representative.
Vibration All models 0.5 G or less. When using the robot in a location subject
to serious vibration, consult with your FANUC sales repre-
sentative.
Weight of control unit B cabinet About 180 kg
i cabinet About 100 kg (front cabinet: About 40 kg, rear cabinet:
About 60 kg)

NOTE
As a continuous rating in the above capacity is enough
though, when the robot is rapidly accelerated, the capacity
of the power supply will momentarily need the capacity of
about two times the continuous rating value.

426
5. TRANSPORTATION AND
B–80525E/04 CONNECTIONS INSTALLATION

5.4 Adjust the robot according to the following procedure at installation.


ADJUSTMENT AND
CHECKS AT
INSTALLATION
No. Description
1 Visually check the inside and outside of the control unit.
2 Check if the screwed terminal is connected properly.
3 Check that the connectors and printed circuit boards are inserted correctly.
4 Check transformer tap setting. (See II MAINTENANCE 6.3)
5 Turn disconnector and the breaker off and connect the input power cable.
6 Check the input power voltage.
7 Press the EMERGENCY STOP button on the operator’s box and turn the power on. Check the output voltage. (See
II MAINTENANCE 6.3.)
8 Check the interface signals between control unit and robot mechanical unit.
9 Check the parameters. If necessary, set them.
10 Release the EMERGENCY STOP button on the operator’s box. Turn the power on.
11 Check the movement along each axis in the manual jog mode.
12 Check the end effector interface signals.
13 Check the peripheral device control interface signals.

427
5. TRANSPORTATION AND
INSTALLATION CONNECTIONS B–80525E/04

5.5 An overtravel and emergency stop occur when the robot is operated for
the first time after it is installed and the mechanical and control units are
RESETTING wired. This section describes how to reset the overtravel and emergency
OVERTRAVEL AND stop.
EMERGENCY STOP Remove the red plate fastening the swiveling axis beforehand.
AT INSTALLATION The J2 and J3 axes are pressed against the hard stops at shipment.
Therefore, an overtravel alarm occurs when the power is turned on after
installation.
The robot enters the emergency stop state when the peripheral device
control interface is not connected.

5.5.1 Take the following actions if signals *IMSTP, *HOLD, *SFSD, and
ENBL are not used.
Peripheral Device
Interface Processing

CRM2A
+24F
49, 50

*IMSTP 1
RV

*HOLD 2
RV

*SFSD 3
RV

ENBL 8
RV Connect the signals to pins 49 and 50 of CRM2A.

5.5.2 Press the reset switch on the operator’s panel or the reset key on the teach
pendant.
Resetting Overtravel
Manually move an axis that has overtraveled into the operating range
while pressing the shift key on the teach pendant.

428
APPENDIX

Index
APPENDIX
B–80525E/04 APPENDIX A. TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAM

A TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAM

A.1
I–CABINET (ARC
Mate 100, ARC Mate
120, ARC Mate 100i,
ARC Mate 120i, S–6,
S–12, M–6i, M–16i,
S–420i, S–500, S–700,
M–400i, M–710i,
A–520i)

431
A. TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAM APPENDIX B–80525E/04

Fig.A.1 (a) Total Diagram (ARC Mate 100i, M–6i S–420i, M–710i, A–520i)

432
B–80525E/04 APPENDIX A. TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAM

ROBOT
ARC Mate 100i
M–6i, S–420i,
M–400i, M–710ii A520i

CRR20

433
A. TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAM APPENDIX B–80525E/04

Fig.A.1 (b) Total Diagram (S–500, S–700, S–6, S–12, M–16i, ARC Mate 100, ARC Mate 120, ARC Mate 120i, M–400i)

434
B–80525E/04 APPENDIX A. TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAM

THIS CONNECTION IS
DIFFERENT FOR EACH ROBOT
REFER TO THE PAGE ROBOT
”ROBOT CONNECTION” S–500
S–700
S–6
RM2 S–12
ARC Mate 100
ARC Mate 120

RM1

RP1
J1–J6 PULSE CODER
AND RDI/RDO

CRR20

435
A. TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAM APPENDIX B–80525E/04
TYPE 1 TRANSFORMER (7.5KVA; A80L–0026–0015, A80L–0024–0014)

TYPE 2 TRANSFORMER (7.5KVA; A80L–0026–0014, A80L–0024–0013)

TYPE 3 TRANSFORMER (7.5KVA; A80L–0026–0016, A80L–0024–0015)


Fig.A.1 (c) Transformer
(ARC Mate 100, ARC Mate 120, ARC Mate 100i, ARC Mate 120i, S–6, S–12, M–6i, M–16i, S–420i, S–500, S–700,
M–400i, M–710i, A–520i)
436
B–80525E/04 APPENDIX A. TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAM
Fig.A.1 (d) Power Supply Unit
(ARC Mate 100, ARC Mate 120, ARC Mate 100i, ARC Mate 120i, S–6, S–12, M–6i, M–16i, S–420i, S–500, S–700,
M–400i, M–710i, A–520i)
437
A. TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAM APPENDIX B–80525E/04
*BRKALMZ
*BRKONZ
SVON–RV

SVON–EMG
Fig.A.1 (e) Main CPU
(ARC Mate 100, ARC Mate 120, ARC Mate 100i, ARC Mate 120i, S–6, S–12, M–6i, M–16i, S–420i, S–500, S–700,
M–400i, M–710i, A–520i)
438
B–80525E/04 APPENDIX A. TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAM
Fig.A.1 (f) Servo Amplifier 1 (Internal connection)
(ARC Mate 100, ARC Mate 120, ARC Mate 100i, ARC Mate 120i, S–6, S–12, M–6i, M–16i, S–420i, S–500, S–700,
M–400i, M–710i, A–520i)
439
A. TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAM APPENDIX B–80525E/04
SERVO AMP
A06B–6076

A06B–6076
–C001

–C101
or
SERVO AMP
A06B–6076

A06B–6076
–C001

–C101
or
Fig.A.1 (g) Servo Amplifier 2 (S–420i, M–710i)
440
B–80525E/04 APPENDIX A. TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAM
Fig.A.1 (h) Servo Amplifier 3
(ARC Mate 100, ARC Mate 120, ARC Mate 100i, ARC Mate 120i, S–6, S–12, M–6i, M16i, M–710i)
441
A. TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAM APPENDIX B–80525E/04
Fig.A.1 (i) Servo Amplifier 4 (S–500, S–700)
442
B–80525E/04 APPENDIX A. TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAM
Fig.A.1 (j) Servo Amplifier 5 (A–520i)
443
A. TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAM APPENDIX B–80525E/04
Fig.A.1 (k) Emergency Stop Unit
444
B–80525E/04 APPENDIX A. TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAM
Fig.A.1 (l) Process I/O PCB
445
A. TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAM APPENDIX B–80525E/04
Fig.A.1 (m) External Connection Diagram (I/O Unit MODEL B)
(ARC Mate 100, ARC Mate 120, ARC Mate 100i, ARC Mate 120i, S–6, S–12, M–6i, M–16i, S–420i, S–500, S–700,
M–400i, M–710i, A–520i)
446
B–80525E/04 APPENDIX A. TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAM

447
A. TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAM APPENDIX B–80525E/04

EMGTP12
EMGB110
EMGB211
EMGDM03
EMGEN16

OPEMG A1 13A
OPEMG A2 13B
OPEMG C1 14A
OPEMG C2 14B
OPEMG B1 15A

ESTOP2 08
ESTOP1 07

Fig.A.1 (n) Emergency Stop Circuit

448
B–80525E/04 APPENDIX A. TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAM

449
A. TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAM APPENDIX B–80525E/04

Fig.A.1 (o) Operator’s Box–1

450
B–80525E/04 APPENDIX A. TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAM

451
A. TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAM APPENDIX B–80525E/04
SVON–EMG
SVON–RV
Fig.A.1 (p) External Connection Diagram (Operator’s Box–2)
452
B–80525E/04 APPENDIX A. TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAM

A.2
B–CABINET (ARC
Mate 100, ARC Mate
120, ARC Mate 100i,
ARC Mate 120i, S–6,
S–12, M–6i, M–16i,
S–420i, S–500, S–700,
M–400i, M–710i,
A–520i)

453
A. TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAM APPENDIX B–80525E/04

Fig.A.2 (a) Total Diagram

454
B–80525E/04 APPENDIX A. TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAM

455
A. TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAM APPENDIX B–80525E/04
Fig.A.2 (b) Transformer/Line filter
456
B–80525E/04 APPENDIX A. TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAM
5-SLOT A20B–2001–0990
3-SLOT A20B–2001–0670
2-SLOT A20B–2001–0860
Fig.A.2 (c) DC Power Supply Unit
457
A. TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAM APPENDIX B–80525E/04
*BRKALMZ
*BRKONZ
SVON–RV

SVON–EMG

(RDI/RDO)
CRM10
5-SLOT A20B–2001–0990
3-SLOT A20B–2001–0670
2-SLOT A20B–2001–0860
Fig.A.2 (d) Main CPU
458
B–80525E/04 APPENDIX A. TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAM
Fig.A.2 (e) Servo Amplifier
459
A. TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAM APPENDIX B–80525E/04
*BRKALMZ
*BRKONZ
Fig.A.2 (f) Emergency Stop Unit
460
B–80525E/04 APPENDIX A. TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAM

461
A. TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAM APPENDIX B–80525E/04

Fig.A.2 (g) Operator’s Panel–1

462
B–80525E/04 APPENDIX A. TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAM

463
A. TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAM APPENDIX B–80525E/04
SVON–EMG
SVON–RV
Fig.A.2 (h) Operator’s Panel–2
464
B–80525E/04 APPENDIX A. TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAM
FG
OV Power 8
LV Power 7
I/O unit–MODEL B

OV Power
5
3 +24Y10GK 6
S+ 4
S–
1
2
Fig.A.2 (i) Mechanical Unit Interface
(S–420i, S–500, M–710i, ARC Mate 100, ARC Mate 120, ARC Mate 100i, ARC Mate 120i, S–6, S–12, M–6i, M–16i)
465
A. TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAM APPENDIX B–80525E/04
Fig.A.2 (j) Mechanical Unit Interface (A–520i/S–700)
466
B–80525E/04 APPENDIX A. TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAM
Fig.A.2 (k) Process I/O
467
A. TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAM APPENDIX B–80525E/04
Fig.A.2 (l) I/O Unit MODEL A, B
468
B–80525E/04 APPENDIX A. TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAM

469
A. TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAM APPENDIX B–80525E/04

Fig.A.2 (m) Emergency Stop Circuit

470
B–80525E/04 APPENDIX A. TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAM

471
A. TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAM APPENDIX B–80525E/04

A.3
CABINET OF
S–800/M–500

472
B–80525E/04 APPENDIX A. TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAM

473
A. TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAM APPENDIX B–80525E/04

Fig.A.3 (a) Total Diagram (S–800)

474
B–80525E/04 APPENDIX A. TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAM

475
A. TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAM APPENDIX B–80525E/04

Fig.A.3 (b) Total Diagram (M–500)

476
B–80525E/04 APPENDIX A. TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAM

477
A. TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAM APPENDIX B–80525E/04

Fig.A.3 (c) Transformer/Line filter (S–800, M–500)

478
B–80525E/04 APPENDIX A. TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAM

479
A. TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAM APPENDIX B–80525E/04
5-SLOT A20B–2001–0990
3-SLOT A20B–2001–0670
2-SLOT A20B–2001–0860
Fig.A.3 (d) DC Power Supply Unit (S–800, M–500)
480
B–80525E/04 APPENDIX A. TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAM
5-SLOT A20B–2001–0990
3-SLOT A20B–2001–0670
2-SLOT A20B–2001–0860
Fig.A.3 (e) Main CPU (S–800, M–500)
481
A. TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAM APPENDIX B–80525E/04
Fig.A.3 (f) Servo Amplifier (S–800, M–500)
482
B–80525E/04 APPENDIX A. TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAM
Fig.A.3 (g) Emergency Stop PCB (S–800, M–500)
483
A. TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAM APPENDIX B–80525E/04

Fig.A.3 (h) Operator’s Panel–1 (Both Models)

484
B–80525E/04 APPENDIX A. TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAM

485
A. TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAM APPENDIX B–80525E/04
Fig.A.3 (i) Operator’s Panel–2 (S–800, M–500)
486
B–80525E/04 APPENDIX A. TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAM
Fig.A.3 (j) Mechanical Unit Interface (S–800)
487
A. TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAM APPENDIX B–80525E/04
Fig.A.3 (k) Mechanical Unit Interface (M–500)
488
B–80525E/04 APPENDIX A. TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAM
Fig.A.3 (l) Process I/O (S–800, M–500)
489
A. TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAM APPENDIX B–80525E/04
Fig.A.3 (m) I/O Unit MODEL A, B (S–800, M–500)
490
B–80525E/04 APPENDIX A. TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAM

491
A. TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAM APPENDIX B–80525E/04

Fig.A.3 (n) Emergency Stop Circuit (S–800, M–500)

492
B–80525E/04 APPENDIX A. TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAM

493
A. TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAM APPENDIX B–80525E/04

A.4
CABINET OF M–410i
AND S–450

494
B–80525E/04 APPENDIX A. TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAM

495
A. TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAM APPENDIX B–80525E/04

Fig.A.4 (a) Total Diagram (M–410i)

496
B–80525E/04 APPENDIX A. TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAM

497
A. TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAM APPENDIX B–80525E/04

Fig.A.4 (b) Total Diagram (M–410i, B–cabinet)

498
B–80525E/04 APPENDIX A. TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAM

499
A. TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAM APPENDIX B–80525E/04

Fig.A.4 (c) Total Diagram (S–450)

500
B–80525E/04 APPENDIX A. TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAM

501
A. TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAM APPENDIX B–80525E/04
Fig.A.4 (d) Transformer/Line filter (M–410i)
502
B–80525E/04 APPENDIX A. TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAM

503
A. TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAM APPENDIX B–80525E/04

Fig.A.4 (e) Tranformer/Line filter (M–410i, S–450/B–cabinet)

504
B–80525E/04 APPENDIX A. TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAM

505
A. TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAM APPENDIX B–80525E/04
Fig.A.4 (f) DC Power Supply Unit (S–450, M–410i)
506
B–80525E/04 APPENDIX A. TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAM
Fig.A.4 (g) Main CPU (S–450, M–410i)
507
A. TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAM APPENDIX B–80525E/04
Fig.A.4 (h) Addtional axis Control printed board (S–450)
508
B–80525E/04 APPENDIX A. TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAM
Fig.A.4 (i) Servo Amplifier (S–450, M–410i)
509
A. TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAM APPENDIX B–80525E/04
Fig.A.4 (j) Emergency Stop Unit (S–450, M–410i)
510
B–80525E/04 APPENDIX A. TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAM

511
A. TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAM APPENDIX B–80525E/04

Fig.A.4 (k) Operator’s Box–1 (M–410i)

512
B–80525E/04 APPENDIX A. TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAM

513
A. TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAM APPENDIX B–80525E/04

Fig.A.4 (l) Operator’s Box–1 (M–410i/S–450/B–cabinet)

514
B–80525E/04 APPENDIX A. TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAM

515
A. TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAM APPENDIX B–80525E/04
Fig.A.4 (m) Operator’s Box–2/Operator’s panel–2 (S–450, M–410i)
516
B–80525E/04 APPENDIX A. TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAM
Fig.A.4 (n) Process I/O (S–450, M–410i)
517
A. TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAM APPENDIX B–80525E/04
Fig.A.4 (o) I/O Unit MODEL A, B (S–450, M–410i)
518
B–80525E/04 APPENDIX A. TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAM

519
A. TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAM APPENDIX B–80525E/04

Fig.A.4 (p) Emergency Stop Circuit (S–450, M–410i)


520
B–80525E/04 APPENDIX A. TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAM

521
A. TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAM APPENDIX B–80525E/04

A.5
B–CABINET OF
S–900

522
B–80525E/04 APPENDIX A. TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAM

523
A. TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAM APPENDIX B–80525E/04

Fig.A.5 (a) Transformer/Line filter (Internal connection)

524
B–80525E/04 APPENDIX A. TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAM

525
A. TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAM APPENDIX B–80525E/04

Fig.A.5 (b) Transformer/Line filter (B–cabinet) (S–900)

526
B–80525E/04 APPENDIX A. TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAM

527
A. TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAM APPENDIX B–80525E/04

Fig.A.5 (c) Servo Amplifier (Internal connection)

528
B–80525E/04 APPENDIX A. TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAM

529
A. TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAM APPENDIX B–80525E/04
5-SLOT A20B–2001–0990
3-SLOT A20B–2001–0670
2-SLOT A20B–2001–0860
Fig.A.5 (d) DC Power Supply Unit (Internal connection)
530
B–80525E/04 APPENDIX A. TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAM
5-SLOT A20B–2001–0990
3-SLOT A20B–2001–0670
2-SLOT A20B–2001–0860
Fig.A.5 (e) Main CPU (Internal connection)
531
A. TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAM APPENDIX B–80525E/04
Fig.A.5 (f) Conversion PCB/Emergency Stop Unit (Internal connection)
532
B–80525E/04 APPENDIX A. TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAM
Fig.A.5 (g) Conversion PCB/Emergency Stop Unit (Internal connection)
533
A. TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAM APPENDIX B–80525E/04

Fig.A.5 (h) Operator’s Panel–1 (Internal connection)

534
B–80525E/04 APPENDIX A. TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAM

535
A. TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAM APPENDIX B–80525E/04
Fig.A.5 (i) Operator’s Panel–2
536
B–80525E/04 APPENDIX A. TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAM
Fig.A.5 (j) Mechanical Unit Connection Interface
537
A. TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAM APPENDIX B–80525E/04
Fig.A.5 (k) Process I/O
538
B–80525E/04 APPENDIX A. TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAM
Fig.A.5 (l) I/O Unit MODEL A, B (Internal Connection)
539
A. TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAM APPENDIX B–80525E/04

Fig.A.5 (m) Emergency Stop Circuit

540
B–80525E/04 APPENDIX A. TOTAL CONNECTION DIAGRAM

541
B. SPECIFICATIONS OF
PERIPHERAL DEVICE INTERFACE APPENDIX B–80525E/04

B SPECIFICATIONS OF PERIPHERAL DEVICE INTERFACE

B.1 The following table lists the I/O signals used for the peripheral device
interface in the R-J2 controller.
SIGNALS
Input signals
Signal Description
*IMSTP Instantaneous stop signal
*HOLD Hold signal
*SFSPD Safety speed signal
CSTOPI Cycle stop signal
FAULT_RESET Alarm release signal
START Cycle start signal
HOME
ENBL Enabling signal
RSR1/PNS1 Robot service request/program number select signal (*1)
RSR2/PNS2 Robot service request/program number select signal (*1)
RSR3/PNS3 Robot service request/program number select signal (*1)
RSR4/PNS4 Robot service request/program number select signal (*1)
RSR5/PNS5 Robot service request/program number select signal (*1)
RSR6/PNS6 Robot service request/program number select signal (*1)
RSR7/PNS7 Robot service request/program number select signal (*1)
RSR8/PNS8 Robot service request/program number select signal (*1)
PNSTROBE PNS strobe signal
PROD_START Automatic operation start signal
SDI01 General-purpose input signal
SDI02 General-purpose input signal

SDI03 General-purpose input signal


SDI04 General-purpose input signal
SDI05 General-purpose input signal
SDI06 General-purpose input signal
SDI07 General-purpose input signal
SDI08 General-purpose input signal
SDI09 General-purpose input signal
SDI10 General-purpose input signal
SDI11 General-purpose input signal
SDI12 General-purpose input signal
SDI13 General-purpose input signal
SDI14 General-purpose input signal
SDI15 General-purpose input signal
SDI16 General-purpose input signal
SDI17 General-purpose input signal
SDI18 General-purpose input signal
SDI19 General-purpose input signal
SDI20 General-purpose input signal
SDI21 General-purpose input signal
SDI22 General-purpose input signal

*1: RSR : Robot Service Request (RSR5 to RSR8 are optional)

542
B. SPECIFICATIONS OF
B–80525E/04 APPENDIX PERIPHERAL DEVICE INTERFACE

PNS : Program Number Select Input (optional)


Whether RSR is used or PNS is used can be preset.

Output signals
Signal Description
CMDENBL Command acceptance enabled signal
SYSRDY System ready signal
PROGRUN Program run signal
PAUSED Program paused signal
HELD Held signal
FAULT Alarm signal
ATPERCH Reference point signal
TPENBL Teach pendant enabled signal
BATALM Battery alarm signal
BUSY Operating signal
ACK1/SNO1 RSR acknowledge/Selected program number signal
ACK2/SNO2 RSR acknowledge/Selected program number signal
ACK3/SNO3 RSR acknowledge/Selected program number signal
ACK4/SNO4 RSR acknowledge/Selected program number signal
ACK5/SNO5 RSR acknowledge/Selected program number signal
ACK6/SNO6 RSR acknowledge/Selected program number signal
ACK7/SNO7 RSR acknowledge/Selected program number signal
ACK8/SNO8 RSR acknowledge/Selected program number signal
SNACK PNS acknowledge signal
______ Not used (for future expansion)

SDO01 General-purpose output signal


SDO02 General-purpose output signal
SDO03 General-purpose output signal
SDO04 General-purpose output signal
SDO05 General-purpose output signal
SDO06 General-purpose output signal
SDO07 General-purpose output signal
SDO08 General-purpose output signal
SDO09 General-purpose output signal
SDO10 General-purpose output signal
SDO11 General-purpose output signal
SDO12 General-purpose output signal
SDO13 General-purpose output signal
SDO14 General-purpose output signal
SDO15 General-purpose output signal
SDO16 General-purpose output signal
SDO17 General-purpose output signal
SDO18 General-purpose output signal
SDO19 General-purpose output signal
SDO20 General-purpose output signal

543
B. SPECIFICATIONS OF
PERIPHERAL DEVICE INTERFACE APPENDIX B–80525E/04

B.2 The process I/O printed board has a setting pin to set the common voltage
of input signals to 0 V or 24 V. The system automatically adjusts the
SETTING COMMON polarity by software according to the status of this pin. Therefore, the user
VOLTAGE can operate the system without being concerned about the setting of the
common voltage.
To ensure safety, the reference voltage of the following four signals,
however, a common voltage is remained at +24V.
*IMSTP
*HOLD
*SFSPD
CSTOPI

B.3
I/O SIGNALS

B.3.1 This section describes the specifications of each input signal.


Input Signals (1) Instantaneous stop signal (input) *IMSTP
Effective : At any time
Function : Use the normally-closed switch because it is a reverse
signal.
The system turns off power to the servo unit when the
*IMSTP is open (turned off). This signal has the same
effect as that of the emergency stop signal, but it is con-
trolled by software. For this reason, use the emergency
stop external interface on the emergency stop control
board for wiring of the emergency stop signal.
Do not use *IMSTP.

(2) Alarm release signal (input) FAULT RESET


Effective : In the alarm status
Function : The FAULT RESET signal releases the alarm status.
If the servo unit has been turned off, it also turns on the
unit. At the same time, the alarm display on the teach-
pendant (the top line) is cleared.
Description : This signal releases only the alarm status. It does not
stop execution of the program.
(3) Hold signal (input) *HOLD
Effective : At any time
Function : Use the normally-closed switch because it is a reverse
signal.
The *HOLD signal has the same function as the hold
button on the operator’s panel. It halts the current pro-
gram and stops the operation of the robot. While this
signal is being input, the held signal (output) HELD is
turned on and the robot cannot be operated.

544
B. SPECIFICATIONS OF
B–80525E/04 APPENDIX PERIPHERAL DEVICE INTERFACE

(4) Start signal (input) START


Effective : When the command acceptance enabled signal (out-
put) CMDENBL is turned on.
See the description of CMDENBL in Section 2.2.1 for
details.
Function : This input signal starts the selected program at the fal-
ling edge when the signal is turned off after being
turned on. Its function differs according to the setting
of parameter $SHELL_CFG.$CONT_ONLY.
- If parameter $SHELL_CFG.$CONT_ONLY is set
to DISABLED, the START signal starts the pro-
gram which has been selected from the teach pen-
dant. By default, the program starts from the cur-
rent cursor position.
- If parameter $SHELL_CFG.$CONT_ONLY is set
to ENABLED, the START signal only resumes the
execution of the temporarily held program. To
execute an inactivated program from the start, input
the PROD_START signal.
(5) Cycle stop signal (input) CSTOPI
Effective : At any time
Function : - If parameter $SHELL_CFG.$USE_ABORT is set
to DISABLED, the CSTOPI signal releases the
program from the wait status caused by an RSR. It
does not stop the execution of the current program
and allows it to continue processing (by default).
- If parameter $SHELL_CFG.$USE_ABORT is set
to ENABLED, the CSTOPI signal immediately
cancels the execution of the current program. The
program returns to the status in which it was before
execution, and the information for the subprogram
to return to the main program is lost. At the same
time, this signal also releases the program from the
wait status caused by RSR.
(6) Enabling signal (input) ENBL
Effective : At any time
Function : If the ENBL signal is turned off, the operation of the
robot or the activation of a program is inhibited, and
the execution of the current program is suspended.

545
B. SPECIFICATIONS OF
PERIPHERAL DEVICE INTERFACE APPENDIX B–80525E/04

(7) Safety speed signal (input) *SFSPD


Effective : At any time
Function : - Use the normally-closed switch because it is a re-
verse signal. Usually this switch should be con-
nected to safety fence. It must be set normally on.
- Since the *SFSPD signal is counted as a remote
condition, such input signals as RSR and START to
the peripheral device interface cannot take effect
unless this signal is turned on.
- If this signal is turned from on to off during robot
operation, the execution of the current program is
suspended. At the same time, the overriding value
is switched to a preset value (parameter $SCR.
$FENCEOVER.)
- As long as this signal is off, the overriding value
cannot be increased beyond the preset value
($SCR.$SFJOGOVLIM: For jog, $SCR. $SFRU-
NOVLIM : For test execution.)
(8) Robot service request signal (input) RSR1/RSR2/RSR3/RSR4
Effective : When the command acceptance enabled signal (out-
put) CMDENBL is turned on.
See the description of CMDENBL in Section 2.2.1 for
details.
Function : - The user can choose between RSR and PNS (op-
tional), although they cannot be used simultaneous-
ly.
- Four input signals, RSR1 to RSR4, are used.
- If a signal is input to an RSR input, a specified. pro-
gram is started. The program number can be set by
a menu.
- If another program has already started processing,
the newly activated program enters the wait status.
As soon as the current program terminates, the
waiting program starts processing.
- By using an RSR instruction, each RSR in a pro-
gram can be enabled or disabled.
- A menu is provided to register the program number
of a specified program when each RSR is input.
(Refer to the application manual for details of the
menu).

546
B. SPECIFICATIONS OF
B–80525E/04 APPENDIX PERIPHERAL DEVICE INTERFACE

- When an RSR is input, the program whose program


name consists of the specified program number
plus a base value is started. For exam ple, if a signal
is input to RSR2 when program number 23 is regis-
tered in RSR2, the program to be started is the one
with the program name calculated from the expres-
sion
RSR + (RSR2 program number + base
number),
i.e., RSR0123.
The base number is stored in parameter
$SHELL_CFG.$JOB_BASE, and can be changed
in a program with a parameter instruction. (For ex-
ample, $SHELL_ CFG. $JOB_BASE =100). In
this way, the combination of programs which can
be started by RSRs can be changed.
- Whether the system should output an acknowledge
signal to an RSR can be selected from the menu.
If so specified, a pulse is output from the signal cor-
responding to the RSR, one of signals ACK1 to
ACK4, when the input of the RSR is accepted.
From the same menu, the width of the pulse can also
be specified.
It is possible to accept other RSRs while outputting
an acknowledge signal.
- Input of a CSTOPIT signal can clear the program
queue waiting for execution after acceptance of
RSRs.

547
B. SPECIFICATIONS OF
PERIPHERAL DEVICE INTERFACE APPENDIX B–80525E/04

(9) PNS/PNSTROBE (input)


Signal name : PNS : Program number select
PNSTROBE: Strobe input for PNS
Effective : When the command acceptance enabled signal (out-
put) CMDENBL is turned on.
See the description of CMDENBL in Section 2.2.1 for
details.
Function : - The PNS/PNSTROBE signal selects whether the
RSR function is used or the PNS function (option-
al) is used. If the PNS function is enabled, the RSR
function cannot be used.
- The eight signals PNS1 to PNS8 are used to specify
a program at the instant the strobe signal
PNSTROBE rises.
- A menu is provided to specify the information
about PNS.

If a number other than zero is entered to PNS input, a


program is selected whose program number is the en-
tered value plus the base number. For example, if the
PNS value is 23, the program to be started has the pro-
gram name calculated from the expression
PNS + (entered PNS value + base number),
i.e., PNS0123.
If zero is entered to PNS input, it is cleared as if no
selection has been made.
- A PNS signal, which can only select a program,
cannot execute the selected program. The execu-
tion of the selected program can only be started af-
ter input of automatic operation start signal
PROD_START.

548
B. SPECIFICATIONS OF
B–80525E/04 APPENDIX PERIPHERAL DEVICE INTERFACE

- For safety, the selected program cannot be changed


from the teach pendant unless PNSTROBE is
turned off.
- If a program is selected by PNS, the program num-
ber is output to selected program number signal
(output) SNO, and a pulse is output to program
selection acknowledge signal SNACK. Using
these signals, peripheral devices can confirm the
correct program has been selected. For the timing
of these signals, see the sections describing SNO
and SNACK.
- The following operations are effective for the pro-
gram selected by PNS.
· Starting up a program by input of automatic op-
eration start signal PROD_START
· Restarting the program that has been suspended.
Inputting the START signal restarts the program
selected by PNS when $SHELL_CFG.$CONT
_ONLY is set to ENABLED.
· Inputting of CSTOPI cancels execution of the pro-
grams selected by PNS when $SHELL_ CFG.
$USE_ ABORT is set to ENABLED.
(10) Automatic operation start signal (input) PROD_START
Effective : When the command acceptance enabled signal (out-
put) CMDENBL is turned on.
See the description of CMDENBL in Section 2.2.1 for
details.
Function : This input signal executes the selected program at the
falling edge when the signal is turned off after being
turned on.

549
B. SPECIFICATIONS OF
PERIPHERAL DEVICE INTERFACE APPENDIX B–80525E/04

B.3.2 This section describes the specifications of output signals for the
Output signals peripheral device interface.
(1) Command acceptance enabled signal (output) CMDENBL
Turned on : When the remote conditions are satisfied and the sys-
tem is not in the alarm status
Turned off : When the remote conditions are not satisfied or the sys-
tem is in the alarm status
The remote conditions are satisfied when all of the following are satis-
fied.
- The teach pendant is in the DISABLED status.
- The remote switch on the operator’s panel is set to
REMOTE side.
- Parameter $RMT_MASTER is set to 0 (external
interface).
- Signal *SFSPD is set to on, or in the normal status.

(2) System ready signal (output) SYSRDY


Turned on : When power is applied to the motor of the robot.
Turned off : When power is not applied to the motor of the robot.
(3) Program run signal (output) PROGRUN
Turned on : When the program is being executed.
Turned off : When the program is not being executed.
(4) Held signal (output) HELD
This signal is used to check the status of the hold input.
Turned on : When the hold button (or input) is being pressed down
(or turned on).
Turned off : When the hold button (or input) is not being pressed
down (or is turned off).
(5) Program paused signal (output) PAUSED
This signal is used together with output signal PROGRUN to deter-
mine whether a program can be restarted while it is being held.
Turned on : When a program is held and has not been restarted yet.
While this signal is on, the program can be restarted
and retains information such as that to return from a
subprogram to the main program.

Turned off : When a program is being executed or is ready to start.


If signal PROGRUN is on, the program is being
executed. If signal PROGRUN is off, the program has
not been executed and can be started from this status.

550
B. SPECIFICATIONS OF
B–80525E/04 APPENDIX PERIPHERAL DEVICE INTERFACE

(6) Alarm status signal (output) FAULT


Turned on : When the system is in the alarm status (or an alarm
which can stop a program execution is detected.) The
indicator lamp does not go on in warning.
Turned off : When the alarm status is released by an alarm release
operation.
(7) Reference point signal (output) ATPERCH
Turned on : When the robot is in the reference position specified in
the parameter.
Turned off : When the robot is not in the reference position speci-
fied in the parameter.
Up to three reference positions can be specified, but this signal is out-
put when the robot is in the first reference position. For the other two
reference positions, general-purpose signals can be assigned to output
as such. (They can be set from the setup screen.)
(8) Teach pendant enabled signal (output) TPENBL
Turned on : When the teach pendant is enabled.
Turned off : When the teach pendant is disabled.
(9) Battery alarm signal (output) BATALM
Turned on : When the voltage of the battery for the CMOS memory
backup drops below the reference.
Turned off : When the voltage of the battery for the CMOS memory
backup is at the normal level.
(10) Operating signal (output) BUSY
Turned on : When a program is being executed or is being pro-
cessed from operation panels such as the teach pen-
dant. (This has the same function as that of the BUSY
lamp on the teach pendant.)
Turned off : When a program is not being executed nor is being pro-
cessed from operation panels such as the teach pen-
dant.
(11)RSR acknowledge signals (output) ACK1/ACK2/ACK3/ACK4
These signals are used together with the RSR function. They can be
specified to be enabled or disabled from the RSR setup menu.
Turned on : When one of signals RSR1 to RSR4 is input and ac-
cepted. A pulse whose width is specified from the
menu is output to acknowledge the signal.
Turned off : Normally. Since these signals are always output as
pulses, they are normally in the off status.
The following chart shows the timing of the RSR input and ACK out-
put.

551
B. SPECIFICATIONS OF
PERIPHERAL DEVICE INTERFACE APPENDIX B–80525E/04

CMDENBL (O)
(The remote conditions need to be satisfied.)

RSR1 (I)

The maximum delay is 32 msec.

ACK1 (O)
(The width of the pulse is set in the parameter.)

RSR2 (I)

ACK2 (O)

RSR3 (I)

ACK3 (O)

RSR4 (I)

ACK4 (O)

* Other RSR signals can be accepted even when the ACK signal is being output.

(12) PNS acknowledge signal (output) SNO/SNACK


These signals are used together with the PNS function.
Turned on : Whenever the PNS function is enabled.
The selected program number is displayed in binary
code (SN01 to SN08) on the teach pendant. If the num-
ber cannot be represented as an eight-bit number, it be-
comes zero.
After selecting a program by PNS, a pulse is output
from signal SNACK as a part of the PNS operation.
The width of the pulse can be specified from the menu.
See the timing chart below.

552
B. SPECIFICATIONS OF
B–80525E/04 APPENDIX PERIPHERAL DEVICE INTERFACE

CMDENBL (O)
(The remote conditions need to be satisfied.)

PNS1-8 (I)
(A value is input.)

PNSTROBE (I)
(A strobe is input for PNS.)

Detection and
processing of
PNSTROBE by (PNS is read within a maximum of 32 msec after PNSTROBE is turned
software. on.)

SNO1-8 (O)

SNACK (O)

PROD_START (I)
(Program execution
starts within 32 msec.)

PROGRUN (O)

553
B. SPECIFICATIONS OF
PERIPHERAL DEVICE INTERFACE APPENDIX B–80525E/04

B.4
SPECIFICATIONS OF
DIGITAL
INPUT/OUTPUT

B.4.1 This section describes the external specifications of digital and analog
Overview input/output in the R-J2 controller.

B.4.2 The R-J2 controller can use up to 512 digital input and output points or
Input/Output Hardware an equivalent number of analog input and output points. One analog
input/output point uses the resources equivalent to those used by 16
Usable in the R-J2 digital I/O points. The R-J2 can use a total of up to 512 I/O points.
Controller
The R-J2 controller can use the following I/O hardware.
- Process I/O printed circuit board
- I/O unit model A
- I/O unit model B
The process I/O printed circuit board and the I/O unit model A or B can
be used together.

B.4.3
Software (1) RDI/RDO
Specifications These are signals sent to the connector at the wrist of the robot.
They cannot be assigned (redefined) and are fixed.
The standard format is eight inputs and eight outputs. The number of
points that can be used for the connector at the wrist depends on the
individual robot.
(2) SDI/SDO
These signals can be assigned (redefined). Eight points form a pairs
and they are assigned in units of pairs.
(3) Analog I/O
An analog I/O signal can access the analog I/O port (optional) on the
process I/O printed circuit board or the I/O port on the analog I/O
module (used together with the I/O unit model A).
It reads and writes the digital value converted from the analog value
of the I/O voltage. It means that the value does not always represent
the real I/O voltage.
(4) Group I/O
Group I/O is a function which can input or output multiple DI/DO
signals as binary codes.
Any number of continuous signals of up to 16 bits can be set for its
use.
It can be set in the menu DETAILS on the group I/O screen.

554
B–80525E/04 APPENDIX C. DIAGRAM OF POWER SUPPLY PATH
C DIAGRAM OF POWER SUPPLY PATH
Fig.C.1 (a) 200VAC (i–cabinet)
555
C. DIAGRAM OF POWER SUPPLY PATH APPENDIX B–80525E/04
Fig.C.1 (b) 200VAC
(B–cabinet : ARC Mate 100, ARC Mate 120, ARC Mate 100i, ARC Mate 120i, S–6, S–12, M–6i, M–16i, S–420i, S–500,
S–700,M–400i, M–710i)
556
B–80525E/04 APPENDIX C. DIAGRAM OF POWER SUPPLY PATH
Fig.C.1 (c) 200VAC (S–800, M–500)
557
C. DIAGRAM OF POWER SUPPLY PATH APPENDIX B–80525E/04
Fig.C.1 (d) 200VAC (S–900)
558
B–80525E/04 APPENDIX C. DIAGRAM OF POWER SUPPLY PATH
Fig.C.1 (e) 200VAC (S–450, M–410i)
559
C. DIAGRAM OF POWER SUPPLY PATH APPENDIX B–80525E/04
Fig.C.1 (f) 100VAC (S–450, S–800, S–900, M–410i, M–500)
560
B–80525E/04 APPENDIX C. DIAGRAM OF POWER SUPPLY PATH
Fig.C.1 (g) +5V/+15V/–15V (i–cabinet)
561
C. DIAGRAM OF POWER SUPPLY PATH APPENDIX B–80525E/04
Fig.C.1 (h) +5V/+15V/–15V (B–cabinet : ARC Mate 100, ARC Mate 120, ARC Mate 100i, ARC Mate 120i, S–6, S–12,
M–6i, M–16i, S–420i, S–500, S–700, M–400i, M–710i, A–520i)
562
B–80525E/04 APPENDIX C. DIAGRAM OF POWER SUPPLY PATH
Fig.C.1 (i) +5V/+15V/–15V (S–450, S–800, M–410i, M–500)
563
C. DIAGRAM OF POWER SUPPLY PATH APPENDIX B–80525E/04
Fig.C.1 (j) +5V/+15V/–15V (S–900)
564
B–80525E/04 APPENDIX C. DIAGRAM OF POWER SUPPLY PATH
Fig.C.1 (k) +5V Robot mechanicel unit
565
C. DIAGRAM OF POWER SUPPLY PATH APPENDIX B–80525E/04
566
B–80525E/04 APPENDIX C. DIAGRAM OF POWER SUPPLY PATH
Fig.C.1 (l) +24V (i–cabinet/B–cabinet) (ARC Mate 100, ARC Mate 120, ARC Mate 100i, ARC Mate 120i, S–6, S–12, M–6i,
M–16i, S–420i, S–500, S–700, M–400i, M–710i, A–520i)
Fig.C.1 (m) +24V (S–800, M–500)
567
C. DIAGRAM OF POWER SUPPLY PATH APPENDIX B–80525E/04
568
B–80525E/04 APPENDIX C. DIAGRAM OF POWER SUPPLY PATH
Fig.C.1 (n) +24V (S–900)
Fig.C.1 (o) +24V (S–450, M–410i)
569
C. DIAGRAM OF POWER SUPPLY PATH APPENDIX B–80525E/04
Fig.C.1 (p) +24V (Robot mechanical unit)
570
B–80525E/04 Index
[A]
Additional Axis Control Printed Board, 217
Adjustment and Checks at Installation, 427
ARC Weld Connection Cable (CRW1: Honda Tsushin, 34 pins), 393

[B]
B–CABINET (ARC Mate 100, ARC Mate 120, ARC Mate 100i, S–6, S–12, M–6i, S–420i, S–500, S–700, M–400i,
M–710i, A–520i), 453
B–Cabinet of S–900, 522
Backplane PC Board, 204
Block Diagram, 304
Block Diagram of the Power Supply, 249

[C]
Cabinet of M–410i AND S–450, 494
Cabinet of S–800/M–500, 472
Cable Connection for the Peripheral Devices, end Effectors, and ARC Welders, 394
Checking the Line Filter Unit and Transformer, 255
Checking the Power Supply Unit, 257
Component Functions, 34
Configuration, 16
Connecting Cables at Installation (Combined Type of i Cabinet), 421
Connecting the External Emergency Stop, 343
Connecting the External Power Supply ON/OFF Switch, 341
Connecting the Input Power Supply, 336
Connection Between the Control Unit and Welder, 381
Connection Between the Mechanical Unit and End Effector, 379
Connection Diagram Between Mechanical Units, 305

[D]
Diagram of Power Supply Path, 555
Digital I/O Signal Specifications, 385

[E]
Electrical Connections, 305
Emergency Stop Control PC Board, 199
End Effector Cable Connector, 398
End Effector Control Interface, 387
External Cable Wiring Diagram, 310
External View of the Controller, 16
i–1
Index B–62574EN/02

[F]
Faulty unit replace ment procedure, 406
Flowchart, 402

[H]
Hardware items required for quick change, 406

[I]
I–CABINET (ARC Mate 100, ARC Mate 120, ARC Mate 100i, ARC Mate 120i, S–6, S–12, M–6i, M–16i, S–420i,
S–500, S–700, M–400i, M–710i, A–520i), 431
I/O Signal Specifications for Arc–Welding Interface, 389
I/O Signals, 544
Input Signals, 544
Input/Output Hardware Usable in the R-J2 Controller, 554
Installation, 419
Installation Area, 419
Installation Condition, 426
Interface for Peripheral Devices, End Effectors, and Welders, 368

[M]
Main CPU PC Boards (A16B–3200–0040), 197
Manual Operation Impossible, 194
Mounting I/O Unit Model B on the Din Rail (Use a Rail that is 3.5mm wide and 7.5mm high.), 273

[N]
Notes on quick change, 406

[O]
Operator Safety, 3, 5
Output signals, 550

[P]
Peripheral Device and Control Unit Connection, 368
Peripheral Device Cable Connector, 396
Peripheral Device Connection Cable, 394
Peripheral Device Interface, 385
i–2
B–80525E/04 Index

Peripheral Device Interface A Cable (CRM2: Honda Tsushin, 50 pins), 392


Peripheral Device Interface B Cable (CRM4: Honda Tsushin, 20 pins), 392
Peripheral Device Interface Block Diagram, 350
Peripheral Device Interface Combination, 363
Peripheral Device, ARC Welding, and End Effector Interfaces, 347
Position Deviation Found in Return to the Reference Position (Positioning), 194
Power Cannot be Turned On, 37
Power Supply Imodule (PSM) (A06B–6087–H115), 224
Power Supply Unit, 292
Precautions for Mechanism, 9
Precautions for Mechanisms, 10
Precautions in Operation, 10
Precautions in Programming, 9, 10, 11
Preventive Maintenance, 35
Printed Circuit Boards, 196
Process I/O Printed Board EA (A16B–3200–0230), 213
Process I/O Printed Circuit Board Signals, 364
Process Input/Output PC Board, 205
Process Input/Output PC Board CA (A16B–2201–0470), 205
Process Input/Output PC Board CB (A16B–2201–0472), 209
Process Input/Output PC Board DA (A16B–2201–0480), 211
Process Input/Output Printed Circuit Boards CA, CB, DA and EA, 295

[Q]
Quick Change (i–cabinet), 400

[R]
Recommended Cables, 399
Replacement front cabinetunit, 405
Replacement of Fuses, 285
Replacing a Module, 266, 272
Replacing a Printed Circuit Board, 262
Replacing a Relay, 296
Replacing a Servo Amplifier, 277
Replacing a Unit, 260
Replacing Fuses, 287
Replacing the Backplane Printed Circuit Board, 262
Replacing the Base Unit of the Input/Output Unit of Model A, 271
Replacing the Battery, 299
Replacing the Fan Motor of the Control Unit, 283
Replacing the I/O Unit Model B Interface Unit, 269

i–3
Index B–62574EN/02

Replacing the Input/Output Unit of Model A, 271


Replacing the Operator’s Box, 280
Replacing the Power Supply Unit or a Printed Circuit Board on the Backplane Printed Circuit Board, 265
Replacing the process I/O EA printed circuit board, 266
Replacing the Teach Pendant, 282
Replacing the Transformer, 274
Resetting Overtravel, 428
Resetting Overtravel and Emergency Stop at Installation, 428
Robot Connection Cables, 310

[S]
Safety During Maintenance, 7
Safety in Maintenance, 12
Safety of the End Effector, 11
Safety of the Robot Mechanism, 10
Safety of the Teach Pendant Operator, 6
Safety of the Tools and Peripheral Devices, 9
Safety Precautions, 3
Selecting Transformer Taps, 252
Separate–Type Control Unit of i Cabinet, 425
Servo Amplifier, 286
Servo Amplifier (A06B–6066–H006), 235
Servo Amplifier for (ARC Mate 100, ARC Mate 120, ARC Mate 100i, ARC Mate 120i, S–6, S–12, M–6, M–16i,
S–420i, S–500, S–700, M–400i, M–710i, A–520i), 220
Servo Amplifier Module (SVM) , 228
Servo Amplifier Unit (A06B–6089–H106), 240
Servo Amplifiers, 218
Setting and Adjusting the Power Supply, 248
Setting Common Voltage, 544
Signals, 542
Software Specifications, 554
Specifications of Digital Input/Output, 554
Specifications of Peripheral Device Interface, 542
Specifications of the Cables used for Peripheral Devices and Welders, 392

[T]
Teach Pendant Cable, 335
The DIN Rail is in the Operator’s Box., 273
Total Connection Diagram, 431
Transformer, line filter unit, 285
Transportation, 418
Transportation and Installation, 418
i–4
B–80525E/04 Index

Troubleshooting, 36
Troubleshooting Using the Error Code, 39

[V]
Vibration Observed During Movement, 194

[W]
When I/O Unit Model A is used, 356
When I/O Unit Model B is used, 358
When Process I/O Printed Circuit Board CA or CB is used, 350
When Process I/O Printed Cricuit Board DA is used, 353
When Two or more Process I/O Printed Circuit Boards and I/O Unit (Model A or Model B) are used, 361

i–5
Revision Record

FANUC Robot series R–J2 CONTROLLER MAINTENANCE MANUAL (B–80525E)

Addition of descriptions for ARC Mate 100i/M–6i, S–450,


04 Apr.,’97
A–520i, M–400i, M–710i and ARC Mate 120i/M–16i

03 Oct., ’95 Addition of descriptions for M–500, A–520i

02 Nov., ’94 Addition of cabinets

01 Aug., ’94

Edition Date Contents Edition Date Contents

Potrebbero piacerti anche